JP2022111306A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part has plural first recessed parts formed by a leftward diffusion part 425a, a front direction diffusion part 425b, and a rightward diffusion part 425c at least by the width of an emission surface of an LED 424 for a backside lower part. Accordingly, light applied from the first LED 424 for a backside lower part is diffused by optical paths in three directions within a backside light guide plate 420 by plural recessed parts of the diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part. Since the diffusion part 425a for a leftward direction, the diffusion part 425b for a front direction, and the diffusion part 425c for a rightward direction are configured to have the same side length each, width of optical paths of light to be diffused is also configured to be identical.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This game machine is provided with a display unit that can change patterns and the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine, and a plurality of light emitting means that can change a single color or light emission color. By changing the display mode of the means, it is configured to enhance the performance effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-126296 A

For such gaming machines, it is necessary to raise the level of attention to the game by enhancing the presentation effect of the light emitting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determination is made based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game value to a player based on determination means and a determination result of the determination means, wherein the predetermined game value is provided to the player based on the determination result of the determination means. suggestion information lottery means for drawing a lottery for execution of suggestion by suggestion information capable of suggesting the degree of expectation to be played, wherein the suggestion information is capable of suggesting to the player at least a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded. second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is high from the first suggestion information; and the predetermined game from the second suggestion information. and third suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a value will be awarded is high, wherein the gaming machine comprises first light emitting means for emitting light, and capable of emitting light, and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined starting condition is met, determination means for making a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and A gaming machine for awarding a predetermined game value to a player based on a determination result by a determination means, wherein the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded to the player is suggested based on the determination result by the determination means. suggesting information lottery means for drawing lots for execution of suggestion based on possible suggesting information, wherein the suggesting information is at least first suggesting information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded. and second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded is high from the first suggestion information, and the predetermined game value is given from the second suggestion information. third suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation is high; and a different second light emitting means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a pattern arrangement arranged on each reel of the drum display device. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a board back unit. It is a back perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a front side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. FIG. 4 is a rear-side exploded perspective view of the light guide unit; 8 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp and the display area forming member with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX of FIG. 7. FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view of a front light guide plate and a rear light guide plate; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between a first decorative pattern group that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, and the rear upper LEDs of the rear upper LED unit and the rear lower LEDs of the lower LED unit; . FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. 12, schematically showing the relationship between the rear lower diffusion lens formed on the lower end face of the rear light guide plate and the rear lower LEDs of the lower LED unit. It is a front view. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of the B portion of FIG. 13 , schematically showing the optical path of light through the rear lower diffusion lens. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing lighting modes of a first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, in which (a) shows rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate; FIG. 4B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the LEDs are lit, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative pattern group at the time of additionally lighting LED and LED for the back side downward direction. 15(a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the side upper LED and the rear side lower LED are additionally lit, and (b) shows the rear side from the state of (a) FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right region of the light guide plate are turned off; FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp is lit, and FIG. FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right region of the side light guide plate are lit; ), the confirmation lamp is lit, and the rear lower LED corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, while corresponding to the central area and the right side area of the rear light guide plate. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED is turned off. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate in accordance with the lighting of the confirmation lamp, and FIG. In a state where the lighting continues, and while additionally lighting the rear lower LEDs corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate, the rear LEDs corresponding to the left region, the central region, and the right region of the rear light guide plate FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the side upper LED is turned off, and FIG. , the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate are additionally lit, while the rear upper LEDs and the rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are additionally lit. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting aspect of the 1st decorative pattern group at the time of putting out light. Schematic showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern group, and the fourth decorative pattern group that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit, and the front left LED unit. It is a front view. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing optical paths of light through respective condensing lenses; (a) is a diagram showing the concave-convex shape forming the second decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group can be lit and displayed, and (b) is the front light guide plate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the concave-convex shape forming a fourth decorative pattern group and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative pattern group can be lit and displayed. FIG. 10A is a view showing lighting modes of a second decorative pattern group, a third decorative pattern group, and a fourth decorative pattern group that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and FIG. FIG. 4B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group when the LED and the front left LED are lit, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting aspect of the 2nd decorative pattern group when LED lights. FIG. 10A is a view showing lighting modes of a second decorative pattern group, a third decorative pattern group, and a fourth decorative pattern group that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and FIG. FIG. 4B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern when the downward LEDs are lit, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting aspect of a design group and a 3rd decorative design. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing effects performed by the front light guide plate, the rear light guide plate, and the drum display device; (b) is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of, while the fourth decorative pattern group is in the lighting state, the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern are non-lighting It is the figure which showed the state typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing effects performed by the front light guide plate, the rear light guide plate, and the drum display device, and (a) shows that the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern group are in a lighting state, while the first decorative pattern group; and a fourth decorative pattern group in a non-lighted state, (b) shows that the first decorative pattern group is in a lit state, while the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern and the fourth It is the figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of a decorative pattern group. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a change pattern table for losing; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a light guide plate lighting pattern table; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a fixed lamp lighting pattern table; 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of each possessed information storage area and execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a flowchart which shows the variation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a fixed lamp lighting setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a light guide pattern setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light distributed by a rear lower diffusion lens when one rear lower LED is lit; FIG. 4A is a schematic side cross-sectional view of the front light guide plate showing the light guiding mode of light guided in the front light guide plate when the front lower LED is lit; FIG. 4B is a diagram schematically showing a light guide mode in the front light guide plate of light incident on the front light guide plate at an angle of 45 degrees, and FIG. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically showing how incident light is guided in the front light guide plate, and (c) is a diagram showing how light is incident in the front light guide plate in the front direction from the front lower LED. It is the figure which showed the light guide aspect typically. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the position of a switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate shown in FIG. 19; FIG. 10 is a perspective view schematically showing how light is guided in the front light guide plate by light incident on the front light guide plate from the front right LED at an upward angle of 45 degrees; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit in the second embodiment; The positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group and the third upper LED, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative pattern group and the third right LED unit. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship with right LEDs and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and third left LEDs of the third left LED unit. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variable elements of the “pseudo-variation” performed by the drum display device in the fourth embodiment, and (a) shows a state in which the pseudo-stop symbol as “pseudo-stop 1” is stopped; (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of (a), and (c) is a ) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "ready-to-reach formation pattern" is stopped, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "ready-to-win display" is performed from the state of (c). It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a left reel unit in a fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the principle of operation of the stepping motor in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor in a fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between excitation data and excitation order pointers in the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed by a series of variable effects in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed at the time of the production|presentation of "full rotation" in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of normal acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of special acceleration processing in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the “full rotation” effect in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the “full rotation” effect performed by the drum display device according to the fifth embodiment, and (a) shows a state in which the provisional jackpot result of the “1” symbol is stopped. FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and the right reel have started to rotate from the state of FIG. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and the right reel are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, and the left reel has started to rotate by special acceleration processing, and (d) is the state of (c). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state, and (e) shows the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel as in the state (d). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reels are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, and (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result of the “2” symbol has stopped from the state of (e). is. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing motor control processing executed by an MPU in the display control device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing reel rotation start processing executed by an MPU in the display control device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the “full rotation” effect in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the “full rotation” effect in the seventh embodiment; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 46, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 26) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). .

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of an effect executed by a drum display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content such as the type of so-called advance notice display, which is one aspect of the variable effect, and the execution timing.

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the drum display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (first starting hole 64a or second starting hole described later). It is executed when the ball is entered into the opening 64b (see FIG. 3) (start winning), and after the symbols (each third symbol printed on the drum display device 81 described later) are variably displayed for a predetermined time, the game is stopped. This is an effect for presenting to the player the result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the starting prize, depending on the combination of the displayed symbols.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the drum display device 81 are made uniform, and the pachinko machine 10 has three stages: a "town stage", an "sky stage", and an "island stage". is provided. Various effects, such as the variable effects described above and the ready-to-win effects executed during the variable effects, are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed change invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Further, when the effect element of "normal reach" to be described later is started in the variable effect performed by the drum display device 81, the effect element of "normal reach" is developed into the effect element of "super reach" to be similarly described later. In some cases, the selection screen for the "super reach" effect element may be displayed on the drum display device 81 during the "normal reach" effect element.

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect element candidates that can be selected as the effect element of "super reach" are displayed, and one of the effect element candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, based on the effect element candidate selected when developing into the effect element of "super reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined, and according to the content " The effect element "Super Reach" is executed on the drum display device 81. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. , rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the production element of "super reach" may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. A full-color light-emitting diode (“Light Emitting Diode”) capable of emitting light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, bluish-green, green, yellow, and red), hereinafter sometimes referred to as “LED”, is provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. ), etc., are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, and has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED, which can indicate that the prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. The ball shooting interval of the ball shooting unit 112a is set at about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 26). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board that constitutes the main controller 110, a setting key 501 is used by a person involved in the hall or the like to change the set probability setting value or to confirm the set probability setting value. Setting change switch 502 used when updating the probability setting value by being operated during setting change, and when wanting to initialize the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 110), or probability setting value during setting change and a probability display device 504 capable of displaying the set probability value.

The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erasing switch 503 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main substrate covered by the substrate box 100 .

The setting key 501 can be switched between the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key managed by a hall official or the like into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between two positions. The setting key 501 is turned off when positioned on the off side, and turned on when positioned on the on side. Each state is maintained as long as it is not operated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when changing the probability setting value (that is, "setting change mode" to be described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 by being operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Also, the RAM erase switch 503 is used to end the update of the probability setting value (that is, end the "setting change mode") when changing the probability setting value (that is, the "setting change mode" to be described later). be done.

In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (that is, when the power switch is turned on) and the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed, the setting key 501 is turned off. 110 outputs a RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal is input, and the payout control device 111 also controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Send to device 111 .

Further, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in a probability set value updateable state (that is, a "setting change mode" to be described later), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability set values is to be terminated, and performs the probability setting. End the value updateable state and shift to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value when confirming the probability setting value (i.e., "setting confirmation mode" to be described later) or when changing the probability setting value (i.e., "setting change mode" to be described later). is configured as The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, when the game is available or when the power is turned off), and the probability setting value is not displayed. In the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode"), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, the startup mode at the time of power startup in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. is configured to

As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", "setting confirmation mode" and "normal mode" are prepared.

The "RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the current probability setting value, and the probability setting value is updated each time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this "setting change mode", the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the probability is updated as the probability setting value is updated. The display on display device 504 is also changed.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504. - 特許庁

The "normal mode" is a startup mode other than the "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", and "setting confirmation mode". This is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203, except when the stored data is broken. be.

In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, remaining in the off state) and while the setting key 501 remains in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting change mode". When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is kept off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting confirmation mode".

In addition, when the data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", when the update of the probability setting value is completed in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the "setting confirmation mode" When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the "normal mode", and the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

Thus, if the setting key 501 is turned off when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated by the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a "RAM clear mode" or a "normal mode" which is a start-up mode unrelated to the set probability value.

On the other hand, when turning on the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As a mode, it is possible to select a "setting change mode" or a "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability set value and a startup mode related to the probability set value can be selected. When the start-up mode that is not related to the set probability value is selected, the start-up mode is set to "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can choose to

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed. If the pachinko machine 10 does not have a predetermined game performance, such as a discrepancy with the jackpot probability of the variable performance to be acquired from now on, or the jackpot counted as the limit number of times described later is accumulated while each jackpot probability is different. may not be able to demonstrate Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the "setting change mode". On the other hand, the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode for only confirming the probability setting value, so that the data stored in the RAM 203 is held (cleared) so that the game can be continued by taking over the game state before power failure do not do).

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on to turn on the pachinko machine 10. is turned on, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. . Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 503, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. to turn on. In other words, if the people involved in the hall understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started from now on.

Also, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily confirming the probability setting value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). In addition, since the RAM erase switch 503 is provided at a position that is not easily touched by the normal player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability set value to a high probability.

Furthermore, the number of switches to be operated at the same time is two even when starting up in the "setting change mode", and since both hands can be sufficiently operated, the operability is good. As described above, the persons involved in the hall can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 .

In addition, when starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether the inner frame 12 is open ) is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for a person involved in the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. 12 must be open. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, it is not started in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". As in the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, if the RAM erasure switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "normal mode", and if the RAM erasure switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine is started in the "RAM clear mode". Raise 10. As a result, although the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine starts up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". 10, it is possible to prevent the game from starting. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, it is possible for the player to open the inner frame 12 arbitrarily, check the probability setting value, search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high probability of big win, or arbitrarily change the probability setting value to a high probability. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 made of resin that has been cut into a substantially square shape in front view. , a first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b, an ordinary electric circuit 64c, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning opening is provided, and the shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 26) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc member 70 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

The general prize winning port 63, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the ordinary electric terminal 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 or the first special symbol or A drum type that performs a variable performance of a plurality of reels (left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR (see FIG. 4) described later) on which the third pattern is printed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special pattern. A drum display device 81 composed of a rotating device, and a normal pattern composed of an LED that variably displays the normal pattern with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger (hereinafter, variable display of the normal pattern is referred to as "variable display"). A display device 83 is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 .

The drum display device 81 is assembled to a board back unit 300 (see FIG. 5) to be described later, and includes a left reel unit 81a1 having a left reel LR, a middle reel unit 81a2 having a middle reel CR and a right It has a drum unit 81a integrated with a reel unit 81a3, and is variably driven by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, to variably display the reels LR, CR, and RR. The effective line in the drum display device 81 is set as the effective line on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in a range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) of the light guide unit 400, which will be described later. be done.

A plurality of patterns are printed on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and the third pattern is variably displayed on the drum display device 81. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol display device 37 displays the game state under the control of the main controller 110, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is the drum display. It is performed in device 81 . It should be noted that, instead of the drum-type rotating device, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like may be used to configure the display device for the third pattern.

Instead of the drum-type rotating device, for example, a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device may be used to construct a display device that performs variable display of the third pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the pattern arrangement of each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing pattern arrays arranged on the respective reels LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, each of the reels LR, CR, and RR has 16 symbol areas formed therein. Blank (blank) areas are arranged alternately.

For example, on the left reel LR, from the top, "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank Each pattern is arranged so as to be an area, a "7" pattern, a blank area, an "8" pattern, a blank area, a "chance" pattern, and a blank area. Therefore, when the left reel LR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed in descending order such as "8" symbol→"7" symbol→"6" symbol→ . . .

On the right reel RR, from top to bottom, "8" pattern, blank area, "7" pattern, blank area, "6" pattern, blank area, "5" pattern, blank area, "3" pattern, blank Each pattern is arranged such that it becomes a region, a "2" pattern, a blank region, a "1" pattern, a blank region, a "chance" pattern, and a blank region. Therefore, when the right reel RR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed in ascending order such as "1" symbol→"2" symbol→"3" symbol→ . . .

Furthermore, on the middle reel CR, from the top, "8" pattern, blank area, "7" pattern, blank area, "6" pattern, blank area, "543" pattern, blank area, "2" pattern, blank The symbols are arranged in such a manner that they are an area, a "1" symbol, a blank area, a "chance" symbol, and a blank area. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is rotated downward, the symbols are arranged in ascending order such as "1" symbol→"2" symbol→"3" symbol→... like the right reel RR. Variable display.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three symbols are visible on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR from a central opening of a display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper parallel line formed by the pattern on the left reel LR, the pattern on the middle reel CR, and the pattern on the right reel RR is used as the effective line for the variable display of the third pattern. , middle parallel line formed by left reel LR center pattern, middle reel CR middle pattern and right reel RR middle pattern, left reel LR bottom pattern, middle reel CR bottom pattern and right reel RR bottom pattern. Lower parallel line to be formed, left reel LR top pattern, middle reel CR middle pattern and right reel RR bottom pattern, right downward line formed, left reel LR bottom pattern, middle reel CR middle pattern and right A total of 5 active lines are set, including a line rising to the right formed by the symbols on the top of the reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR has three numerical patterns (third pattern) from a central opening of a display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "main pattern".) and a blank area are configured to be visible. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3×3=9 number patterns and blank areas are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the effective lines for the variable display of the third symbols, the number patterns or blank area above the left reel LR, the number patterns or blank area above the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR The upper parallel line formed by the upper number pattern or blank area, the number pattern or blank area in the middle of the left reel LR, the middle number pattern or blank area in the middle reel CR, and the number pattern or blank area in the middle of the right reel RR. The lower parallel line formed by the formed middle parallel line, the number pattern or blank area below the left reel LR, the number pattern or blank area below the middle reel CR, and the number pattern or blank area below the right reel RR, the left reel Lower right line formed by number patterns or blank area on top of LR, number patterns or blank area on middle reel CR, and number patterns or blank area on bottom of right reel RR, number patterns or blank area on bottom of left reel LR , a number pattern or a blank area in the middle of the middle reel CR, and a right rising line formed by a number pattern or a blank area in the upper part of the right reel RR.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned on one of the effective lines. ) is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "high-probability patterns") to which odd numbers are added are aligned on any of the effective lines. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") are aligned on one of the effective lines.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left reel LR→right reel RR→middle reel CR in each variable effect. If a combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns) is aligned on any of the effective lines when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning performance (for example, rainbow lighting display, etc.) is executed as a big winning. In addition, since the pattern arrangement of the left reel LR and the right reel RR are reversed (ascending order and descending order), when the left reel LR and the right reel RR are stopped, the same symbols are displayed on one or two activated lines, respectively. It is configured so that the symbol can be stopped. That is, it is possible to generate a single reach in which the same symbol is stop-displayed only on one effective line and a double reach in which the same symbol is stop-displayed on each of two effective lines.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description continues. While the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being performed on the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), the ball moves to the first starting port 64a. When entering a ball, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of held balls) is suspended up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 1 of the first reserved symbol display portion Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the reserved display portion Db provided in the lower part of the drum display device 81 when viewed from the front. The first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d are also shown. In the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved design display parts Db1a to Db1d, there is one reserved design (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of display of the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1d, the number of suspended balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed. be done.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display parts Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display part Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved design display units Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 1 first to third reserved design display parts Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special design indicates that it is 3 times, and when a total of four reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display units Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved design display parts Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special design is 0 and there is a fluctuation effect that is reserved indicate not to.

In addition, while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is second started. When a ball is entered into the mouth 64b, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 of the second reserved symbol display portion Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the reserved display portion Db provided in the lower part of the drum display device 81 when viewed from the front. It is also shown in the first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db2a to Db2d. In the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved design display parts Db2a to Db2d, 1 reserved design (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle patterns)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern variable effect is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed in the special 2 first to fourth reserved pattern display parts Db2a to Db2d. be done.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display parts Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display part Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved design display parts Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved design display parts Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 3 times, and when a total of four reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display parts Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display parts Db2a to Db2d, there is a variable effect that the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 0 and is reserved. indicate not to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. is configured to In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored, is configured to preferentially execute the second lottery game of the second special symbol over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). In addition, the lottery game may be executed in order of winning (so-called winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called special (Fig. 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) may be configured.

An execution pattern display portion Db0 for displaying an execution pattern indicating that the drum display device 81 is executing a variable effect is provided in the central portion of the holding display portion Db. This execution design display section Db0 is the central portion of the reservation display section Db, that is, the right side of the special figure 1 first reservation design display section Db1a, and the left side of the special figure 2 first reservation design display section Db2a, It is configured to display an execution symbol larger than each of the reserved symbols displayed in each of the reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. In addition, in this execution design display section Db0, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display section Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved design display section Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution design. be.

The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display unit Db0 are erased when the variable effect is completed, and along with the erasure of the executed symbols, the displayed reserved symbols are on the lower side (if the first special symbol is on the right side, the second 2 If it is a special symbol, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved designs of the second special design and there are four reserved designs of the first special design, the end of the fluctuation production of the first special design or the second special design When the execution design displayed in the execution design display unit Db0 is erased along with, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 first reservation design display unit Db1a is moved as the execution design in the execution design display unit Db0 (shifted). In addition, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved design display portion Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 1 first reserved design display portion Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved design display section Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 1 second reserved design display section Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved design display portion Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 1 third reserved design display portion Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display unit Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is done, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display section Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution design in the execution design display section Db0. In addition, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved design display section Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 2 first reserved design display section Db2a. Furthermore, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved design display section Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 2 second reserved design display section Db2b. Also, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved design display section Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 2 third reserved design display section Db2c.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times at maximum. The number of balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Alternatively, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display section Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by numbers on a part of a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device, etc.) separate from the reserved display section Db, or divided into four sections. It is also possible to display the marked areas in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) corresponding to the number of held balls. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls in the reserved display section Db. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric player 64c above the second starting port 64b in the front view is a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described special symbol display device 37, and the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. The normal pattern holding lamps 84 are provided four times as many as the maximum holding number, and are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81 You may make it carry out using a part. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the drum display device 81. - 特許庁Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

More specifically, the variable display of normal symbols may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution portion. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed in a portion other than the third symbol execution portion of the drum display device 81 .

A display area forming member 430, a front light guide plate 410, and a rear light guide plate 420 (see FIG. 8) are arranged in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the front side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. A light guiding unit 400 is provided.

The display area forming member 430 is made of transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate), and has a shape along (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. , and formed in a shape along (corresponding to) the shape of a front side light guide plate 410 and a rear side light guide plate 420 to be assembled in the light guide unit 400, which will be described later. The display area forming member 430 is formed with a central opening 431 so that three symbols can be visually recognized on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. . A predetermined lens cut 432 is applied to the peripheral edge of this central opening 431, and the rear side of the lens cut 432 is made invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, the pattern display area and the effective line on the drum display device 81 are clearly indicated to the player by the lens cut 432 around the central opening 431 . Details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and is formed in a shape along (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, similarly to the display area forming member 430. It is formed in a shape along (corresponding to) the shape of the display area forming member 430 and the rear light guide plate 420 assembled to the optical unit 400 . In addition, the front light guide plate 410 allows the drum display device 81 and a part of the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the front light guide plate 410 to be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. is configured to Further, on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), various uneven lens cuts are applied, and a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, or a front left LED unit, which will be described later. By turning on the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c of the unit 416 (see FIGS. 8 and 9), the second decorative pattern group 411, which is a pattern imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals (so-called falling cherry blossom petals), imitates a sunfish. A third decorative pattern 412, which is a pattern formed by a bubble, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 (see FIG. 17), which is a pattern simulating a plurality of bubbles (so-called bubble group patterns), are displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. configured to be Details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410 , the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and similar to the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 , the rear light guide plate 420 follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . The display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 to be assembled to the light guide unit 400 are formed in (corresponding) shapes. Further, in the rear light guide plate 420, like the front light guide plate 410, the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420 can be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. is configured to Furthermore, on the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), various uneven lens cuts are applied, and the rear upper LED unit 422 or / and the lower LED unit 414 (see FIG. 8 and FIG. 9) are turned on, a first decorative pattern group 421 (see FIG. 12), which is a pattern imitating a plurality of types of fish (so-called school of fish patterns), is displayed on the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be displayed so as to be visible from each side. Details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative pattern group 421 and the second decorative pattern group 421 and the second decorative pattern group 421 during execution of the variable performance (for example, when the ready-to-win display is formed) according to the lottery result of the variable performance of the third symbol. 411, the third decorative pattern, 412 and/or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured to be lit and displayed. Specifically, when a big hit result appears in the variable effect, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 Only, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is easily lit and displayed in that order. Only the 3 decorative patterns 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern group 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to be lit up and displayed in this order.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, during the execution of the variable effect (for example, when forming the ready-to-win display) according to the lottery result of the variable effect of the third symbol, Any one of the second decorative design group 411, the third decorative design 412, or the fourth decorative design group 413, or the first decorative design group 421, the second decorative design group 411, the third decorative design, 412, or the fourth At least two or more combinations of the decorative pattern group 413 are configured to be illuminated. Specifically, when a big hit result appears in the variable effect, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 Only, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is easily lit and displayed in that order. Only the 3 decorative patterns 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern group 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to be lit up and displayed in this order.

That is, according to the above-mentioned appearance ratio accompanying the fluctuation result of the fluctuation effect, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is: first decorative pattern group 421>second decorative pattern group 411&th 3 decorative design 412 > only the third decorative design 412 > only the second decorative design group 411 > the fourth decorative design group 413 are set in advance so as to be higher in this order.

More specifically, according to the above-mentioned appearance ratio associated with the fluctuation result of the fluctuation effect, the reliability (expectation) of each decorative design group 411, 412, 413, 421 is the fourth decorative design group 413 < the second decorative design Only the group 411<only the third decorative design 412<the second decorative design group 411 & the third decorative design 412<the first decorative design group 421 are preset to be higher in this order.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth Although it is configured to set the degree of expectation for the big win when the decorative pattern group 413 appears, instead of this, the degree of expectation for the big win of the decorative pattern may be set regardless of the appearance frequency. . For example, it is possible to provide a decorative pattern that has a low appearance ratio at the time of the big win and a low appearance ratio even at the time of the loss and has a low expectation for the big win, or a high appearance ratio at the time of the loss and a high appearance ratio even at the time of the big win and a high expectation for the big win. A decorative pattern with a high degree may be provided.

In this way, each member 430, 410, 420 of the light guide unit 400 is formed in a shape along (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 positioned on the back side in front view, and will be described later. The first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured to be lit (light guided) and displayed. Therefore, by executing the variation effect of the third pattern on the drum display device 81 and the effect on the light guide unit 400 in combination, various effects are executed, and the effect of each device 81, 400 is enhanced. , can increase the attention to the game. In addition, the light guide unit 400 is configured in a shape along the outer peripheral shape of the production device so that the production device (that is, the drum display device 81) arranged on the rear side in the front view can be arranged in the back space. , it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the effect device arranged on the back side of the light guide unit 400 in the front view.

Further, at least the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LED 414c, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are connected to the light guide unit 400. By unitizing and fixing the LEDs 414c and the like while positioning them with screws, etc., it is possible to suppress the positional deviation between the LEDs 414c and the like and the light guide plates 410 and 420, so that the light from the LEDs 414c and the like can It is possible to appropriately irradiate the light plates 410 and 420, and the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be represented accurately.

In addition, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern group 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 only, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (hereinafter referred to as , "decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421") will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, there is a board surface first decorative pattern group, which is the same pattern as the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. 60a is provided, and on the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view, the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 and the board surface first decorative pattern group. A board surface second decorative pattern group 60b, which is the same pattern as 60a, is provided. The board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b are configured to be lit and displayed in conjunction with lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. Specifically, in the case of executing an effect related to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the variable effect of the third pattern, first, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is first turned on. After that, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit up sequentially from the right side to the left side in the front view, and then the second decorative pattern group 60b on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view is lit up. By constructing in this way, in the production relating to the first decorative pattern group 421, the production on the rear light guide plate 420 and the production on the board surface of the game board 13 are integrally executed, and the entire board surface of the game board 13 is used. It is possible to provide a powerful performance and improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, in the variation effect of the third symbol, when the lighting lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing of lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 comes, first, the game board 13 and the drum The light emitting effect on the display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire game board 13 is darkened. Then, LEDs (not shown) are arranged on the back side of the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a as if the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a provided on the right side of the board surface of the game board 13 were moved from the right side to the left side in the front view. ) light up. Then, at the timing when the leftmost end of the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a in the front view is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 is provided in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 (see FIG. 8, hereinafter, simply referred to as "LED 422c, 424") By lighting , the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (front side; hereinafter the same).

At this time, the front right base of the front right LED unit 415 is arranged so that the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a does not leak toward the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410). 415a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a toward the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 is guided. It is possible to prevent the problem that the pattern group 421 emits light at an earlier stage than the light emission timing.

Next, with the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a turned on, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightmost end of the right side area The LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view are sequentially lit from the right side in the front view, and the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420, 424 is turned on, LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, thereby turning on the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. The rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, by the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420, the series of fish school patterns move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. A production such as is executed.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420, from the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the right area, the rightmost LED 422c , 424 located on the left side of the front view (that is, the center of the right area), the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the rightmost end of the LED 422c and 424 are taken over, and furthermore, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the front view are taken over. When the left side of the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side area) is lit, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view are lit so as to take over the light emission color. For example, when the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the right area are emitting red light, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 are lit in red at the same timing, and , the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right area) are lit in red at the same timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect in which the same fish patterns in the first decorative pattern group 421 are displayed in a moving manner.

Next, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the central region are sequentially lit from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422 c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the left area of the rear light guide plate 420 By lighting the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420 becomes visible from At this time, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface are turned on. ) are turned off sequentially from the right side when viewed from the front. As a result, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the first decorative pattern groups 421 in the right, central, and left regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are integrated in series and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display width of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board), as if the fish school pattern moves from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. .

Next, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 located to the left of the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the left area are positioned to the left of the front view. are sequentially lit from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422 c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, By lighting an LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost end of the board second decorative pattern group 60b, the board second decorative pattern group 60b is lit and displayed. At this time, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the right side in the front view at the timing when the LED corresponding to the leftmost end of the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board surface is turned on. Configure to turn off sequentially. As a result, the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region, the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are integrated in series and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate 420, or the combined width of the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420 and the display width of the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b). An effect is executed as if the pattern moves from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

After that, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side in front view. Then, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LED 422c corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. , 424 are turned off sequentially from the right side in front view. Furthermore, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, an LED (not shown) corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board surface is turned on from the right side in the front view. Configure to turn off ready. By constructing in this manner, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b form a series of integrated and constant width fish school patterns for pachinko. An effect is executed as if the machine 10 were to move from the right side to the left side.

At this time, the front left base of the front left LED unit 416 is arranged so that the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) side. 416a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b toward the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the board second decorative pattern group 60b is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 is guided. It is possible to prevent the problem that the pattern group 421 emits light at a later stage than the light emission timing.

In this way, in the effects of the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, the first decorative pattern group 421, and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b, the effects on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effects on the game board 13 are integrated. In addition to executing this, by solving the problem that when each LED is lit up in sequence, a pattern different from the lighting timing is lit by the light of the lighting of other LEDs, a sequence using the entire board surface of the game board 13 is solved. It is possible to provide an integrated and powerful production and improve the interest of the game.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main function described later is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed in the control device 110 (see FIG. 26). Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. executed. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the prize winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

Below the first starting port 64a, there is provided a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric motor 64c is in an open state. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main function described later is caused by turning on the second starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed in the control device 110 (see FIG. 26). Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. executed. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

As described above, above the second starting port 64b in front view, the second starting port 64b is opened and closed by opening and closing the two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. A common electric actuator 64c is provided that can be displaced to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). The normal electric terminal 64c is normally in a closed state with the blades closed (the blades stand up), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is difficult to enter. there is

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the normal electric function 64c is operated for a predetermined time. From the state in which the blades of the normal electrode 64c stand up while the normal electrode 64c is being operated. It will be in a substantially V-shaped (inverted V-shaped) movable state, and the second starting port 64b will be in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, it stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the second start port 64b is in an open state, the ball enters the second start port 64b. It is possible to make a state in which many jackpot lotteries can be performed.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, and a large prize winning port (also called a large opening port or a specific winning port) 65a in the substantially central portion thereof. is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. , the drum display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the big win to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, a predetermined number of times (10 times or 5 times) is performed until the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls win a prize). until).

When the big winning opening 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses after opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after that closing, the big winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 10 times (10 rounds) at maximum. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player can win the game by winning the ball into the big winning hole 65a. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The big winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the large winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

The variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball can enter the big winning opening 65a in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game. A large winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the large winning opening 65a is turned on, and by counting the number of times the large winning opening switch is turned on, the number of balls winning the large winning opening 65a is counted. The closure condition of 65a is determined. Also, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to turning on of the big winning hole switch. By repeating the open state and closed state of the big prize winning port 65a due to the big hit, many balls are likely to enter the big winning prize port 65a, and the player can appreciate the game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A specific winning opening and a large open opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit in the special symbol display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times triggered by a ball entering the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening is open may be formed as a special game state. .

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball shot into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the turning on, the main controller 110 hits the normal symbol. A lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of normal symbols for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, when it is determined to be a hit, the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 83, and the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed. After that, the ordinary electric terminal 64c provided above the second starting port 64b in front view is activated. As a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b for a predetermined period of time from the state in which the plate of the common electric terminal 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, closes the second starting port 64b. A state in which the ball can be played, or a state in which the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is arranged in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part in FIG. 3). It is The special symbol display device 37 displays the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second Each variable display of special symbols (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2") (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") is performed. , the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed, among the balls that have won (entered) a first start port 64a or a second start port 64b, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot and an error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors indicates various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, the "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, to separate the number of prize balls in the jackpot. One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the start of opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls win during the opening of the big winning opening 65a.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic After displaying (in the first embodiment, the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (first embodiment In , the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs is stopped and displayed with one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays dynamic display ( In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs of the lower LED group 37b2 are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed. Any one of a total of 64 kinds of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining each lighting pattern of the 6 LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a jackpot, the type (type) of the jackpot is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is a big win or not is determined (big win lottery), and if it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win. is also determined.

As the jackpot type determined here, "variable probability A" corresponding to "10 rounds (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") variable jackpot", "variable probability B" corresponding to "5R variable probability jackpot", “Time saving A” corresponding to “10R time saving jackpot” is prepared (see FIG. 24(b)).

Here, the "variable A" jackpot type corresponding to the "10R variable jackpot" means that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter " It will be in a high probability state compared to the ``normal game state'' until the occurrence of the next big win), and the probability of winning the normal pattern will be higher than the ``normal game state'' until the next big win occurs. It is a jackpot that shifts to a “probability fluctuation state”.

In addition, the jackpot type of "variable B" corresponding to "5R variable jackpot" means that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter referred to as "next time It will be in a high probability state compared to the ``normal game state'' until the occurrence of the jackpot), and the probability of winning the normal pattern will also be higher than the ``normal game state'' until the next big win occurs. It is a big hit that shifts to "probability fluctuation state".

In addition, the jackpot type of “time saving A” corresponding to “10R time saving jackpot” is a low probability that the jackpot probability of each special symbol is equivalent to “normal game state” after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. While it is in the state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. That is.

Here, each game state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal game state" refers to the time of the game state other than the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the win of the normal symbol It refers to a state in which the probability is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the normal electric circuit 64c is opened for a short period of time (a so-called non-open extended state). That is, in the ``normal game state'', the probability of winning each special pattern is lower than that in the ``probability fluctuation state'', and the probability of winning a normal pattern is lower than in the ``probability fluctuation state'' and the ``time shortening state''. Since the opening time of the normal electrode 64c is also short, the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b is This is the most unfavorable (lowest advantage) gaming state for the player, rather than the "winning assist state" in some cases.

Next, in the "time shortening state", the probability of jackpot winning each special symbol is low as in the "normal game state", but the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is increased. A state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b for a long time (hereinafter, a function in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the opening time of the normal electrode 64c is extended is referred to as a "winning auxiliary function In addition, the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased and the open time of the normal electric part 64c is long and it is easy to enter the ball into the second start port 64b is called " This state may be referred to as "a state in which the winning assist function is activated"). That is, the ``time shortening state'' is a state in which a big win by a special symbol is equivalent to that in the ``normal game state'', but a win by a normal symbol is likely to be derived, and the open state of the normal electric combination 64c is lengthened. Therefore, in the "time shortening state", since it is easy to win the launched ball to the second starting port 64b, it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2, to the second starting port 64b It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) based on the winning of the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in the player's possession.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is, as described above, after the jackpot type "time reduction A" (see FIG. 24(b)), a prescribed number of times predetermined for each jackpot. (100 times in the first embodiment) is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times (that is, after the end of the electric support), the "time shortening state" is shifted to the "normal game state". (See FIG. 10).

Next, in the ``probability fluctuation state'', as an added value after the end of the jackpot, there is a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of each subsequent special symbol is increased, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased, and the normal electric role 64c wins a prize. Auxiliary functions are activated. That is, the "variable probability state" is a state in which a big winning result by special symbols is easily derived, a winning result by normal symbols is easily derived, and the open state of the normal electric player 64c is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the winning auxiliary function is operating, and the fired ball is easy to win to the second starting port 64b, so that the dynamic display of special figure 2 can be continuously executed, It is possible to play while suppressing the decrease of the ball by obtaining a prize ball (for example, 1 / prize) based on the prize to the second start port 64b, and furthermore, a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of special figure 2 It is possible to play a game in a state in which (special game state) is likely to occur.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to the loss, and there are 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A". A total of 64 display patterns, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the type "variable probability B" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", are provided. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, it can be recognized that the stop display of the losing is stopped, while the jackpot types "variable probability A" and "variable probability B ” or “time saving A” is difficult to identify.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are grasped , it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the "probability variation A" is won, the drum display device 81 displays the jackpot result corresponding to "time saving A" as a temporary display. By displaying it, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state it is. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that makes a player guess in which game state the game is being played, to improve the interest in the game, and to perform a promotion performance during or after the big win. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the normal electric role 64c described later attached to the second start port 64b is opened, or the normal symbol is used once. It is also possible to change the number of times the normal electric terminal 64c is opened by winning. Specifically, in the "time shortening state" or the like, the time during which the normal electric terminal 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case of the "normal game state", or the normal The number of times the electric player 64c is released may be increased compared to the case of the "normal game state". In addition, in the "shortened time state", at least two of increasing the winning probability of normal symbols, lengthening the opening time of the normal electric combination 64c, and increasing the number of times of opening the normal electric combination 64c are simultaneously performed. You may do so.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It is visible through window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . A ball that has not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided through an out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Also, the balls that enter the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through the switches provided for each winning hole for detecting the entry of the ball. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and is discharged to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, referring to FIGS. 5 and 6, a base plate 60 constituting the game board 13, a board back unit 300 also constituting the game board 13 and arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base board 60, and , the light guide unit 400 assembled to the board back unit 300, and the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the light guide unit 400 behind the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the board back unit 300. As shown in FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base plate 60, a board back unit 300 and a drum display device 81, and the base plate 60 forming the game area is positioned against the back side of the pachinko machine 10. , the board back unit 300 is assembled, and the drum display device 81 is assembled to the board back unit 300 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 6, the board back unit 300 includes a board back unit base 301, a light guide unit 400, a right indicator lamp LED board 302, a right indicator lamp member 303, a left indicator lamp LED board 304, and a left indicator lamp. It is composed of a lamp member 305 , an information lamp assembly portion 306 and a confirmation lamp unit 310 . First, the light guide unit 400, the LED board 302 for the right information lamp, the LED board 304 for the left information lamp, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are fixed with screws to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the board back unit base 301. After assembly, the right notification lamp member 303 is assembled so as to correspond to the LED board 302 for the right notification lamp, and the left notification lamp member 305 is assembled so as to correspond to the LED board 304 for the left notification lamp. The back panel unit 300 is formed by fixing the lamp assembly part 306 to the back panel unit base part 301 with screws.

The right informing lamp member 303 and the left informing lamp member 305 are lamps for suggesting to the player various game situations and the like in the third symbol variation effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player various information regarding the third symbol variation effect and information regarding the game state by means of the lighting patterns and lighting colors of the right information lamp member 303 and the left information lamp member 305. is configured to

The fixed lamp unit 310 is a drive type lamp for suggesting that the big win will occur in the variable performance by lighting and driving the fixed lamp 311 . The confirmation lamp unit 310 includes a confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for lighting the confirmation lamp 311, and a rotary drive motor (not shown) for rotationally driving the confirmation lamp 311. and consists of In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big win occurs in the variation performance of the third symbols, the player is informed that a big win has occurred by turning on and rotationally driving the confirmation lamp 311 at the timing determined by lottery. is structured to clearly suggest In addition, the fixed lamp 311 is lit in a long lighting pattern with a long lighting time (for example, "10 seconds") when winning a jackpot that generates a "probability variable state". is generated, the fixed lamp 311 is lit in a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (for example, "2 seconds"). The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 and the like will be described later.

Here, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10. FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, FIG. 8 is a front exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and FIG. 9 is a rear exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX of FIG.

7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 includes a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, a rear It is composed of a light guide plate 420 , a rear upper LED unit 422 and a display area forming member 430 .

The front light guide plate 410 is constructed by continuously forming upper and lower flat plate portions extending parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . there is More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R32 is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the front side light guide plate 410, and continuously from there, the drum display device 81 (rear side Along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 420), a regular R-shaped portion with a size of about R80 and bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed, and furthermore, a regular R-shaped portion with a size of about R32 is formed continuously from there. A downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed that is bent toward the front side, and a downward flat plate portion is formed continuously from the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

As described above, the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions is guided to the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (the surface in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10), thereby forming a plurality of cherry blossom petals. A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating a cherry blossom storm, a third decorative pattern group 412 imitating a sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating a group of bubbles made up of a plurality of bubbles. The lens cut of various concave and convex shapes is applied so that various patterns can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The second decorative pattern group 411 is formed on the left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, the third decorative pattern group is formed on the central region of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the lower side. The reverse R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are formed evenly throughout.

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 extends from the front lower LEDs 414 c at the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414 b of the lower LED unit 414 to the lower part of the front light guide plate 410 . When light enters upward from the lower end face of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and becomes visible by the light that is incident upward from both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 .

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 emits only light incident upward from the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, Light incident from other directions (for example, the horizontal direction) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 . In other words, the second decorative pattern group 411 emits only the light incident from the lower end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the machine 10 and does not emit light (not visible or difficult to be seen) through the part where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed.

More specifically, the concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 is such that the light guided to the flat plate part enters from the upper direction in the front view and the lower direction in the front view. Light (light guided upward and downward when viewed from the front) is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while light incident from the lateral direction when viewed from the front (left and right when viewed from the front) The light guided in the right direction in front view) is configured so as not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 . Here, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, either the light incident from the upper direction in the front view or the lower direction in the front view (the light guided in the upper direction in the front view or the lower direction in the front view) Only, it may be a lens cut of a shape that emits the light irradiated to the concave-convex shaped lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but in that case In this case, the shape of the lens cut is required to be sophisticated, and there is a possibility that the processing cost of the lens cut increases. Therefore, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light incident from the upper direction in the front view and the lower direction in the front view (the light guided in the upper direction in the front view and the lower direction in the front view). However, by cutting the lens in a concave-convex shape so that the light irradiated to the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing cost of the lens cut.

On the other hand, as described above, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light incident from the upper direction in the front view or the lower direction in the front view (the light guided in the upper direction in the front view and the lower direction in the front view) A lens cut may be configured such that the light irradiated to the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 only by either one.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged closer to the front side (front direction side) of the pachinko machine 10 than the rear light guide plate 420, the fixed lamp 311 arranged above the front light guide plate 410 emits light. It is more susceptible than the rear light guide plate 420 to light and light emitted from indoor lighting provided on the ceiling of the game hall. Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 (the same applies to the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 does not react as much as possible to the light from above when viewed from the front (there is no erroneous lighting). However, it is preferable to cut the lens in a concave-convex shape so that it is lit (lighted) only by light from the lower side when viewed from the front (or from the lateral direction when viewed from the front). Then, the light-guiding LED is not arranged above the front light guide plate 410 in front view, but the front lower LED 414c is arranged below the front view, so that the second decorative pattern group 411 can be lit by the front lower LED 414c. , it is possible to suppress erroneous lighting of the second decorative pattern group 411 due to lighting of the confirmation lamp 311, indoor lighting of the game hall, or the like.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is lit only by the front lower LED 414c arranged below the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Instead of this, a front upper LED is arranged above the front light guide plate 410 in front view, and the second decorative pattern group 411 is lit and displayed only by the front upper LED. Alternatively, the second decorative pattern group 411 may be illuminated by the front upper LED and the front lower LED 414c. Also, the third decorative pattern 412 may be configured to be illuminated by the front upper LED and/or the front lower LED 414c.

The concave-convex shaped lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 is cut from the front lower LEDs 414c other than the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 to the lower part of the front light guide plate 410. When light enters upward from the lower end face of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the third decorative pattern 412 is emitted from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light that is incident upward from other than both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the central portion of the lower end surface). emits light and becomes visible.

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 is similar to the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411, and out of the light guided to the flat plate portion, , only the light that is incident upward is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light that is incident from other directions (for example, the lateral direction) is cut into the pachinko machine by an uneven lens cut corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412. 10 is configured so as not to be emitted to the front side. In other words, the third decorative pattern 412 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is emitted from the pachinko machine. 10 It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side and does not emit light (not visible or difficult to be seen) through the part where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed.

The concave-convex lens cut (longitudinal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is a front right LED 415c mounted on the front right LED board 415b of the front right LED unit 415 (see FIG. 19). , and/or from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416, the left end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and/or It is configured to emit the guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the light enters in the lateral direction from the right end face. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident in the lateral direction from the left end surface and/or the right end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and can be visually recognized. Become.

The concave-convex lens cut (longitudinal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits only light incident in the horizontal direction out of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the incident light from other directions (for example, from the bottom to the top) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 . In other words, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits only the light incident from the left end surface or the right end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and emits light incident from other directions. is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured so as not to emit light (invisible or difficult to see) through the portion where the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed. The details of the light emitting modes of the second decorative design group 411, the third decorative design group 412 and the fourth decorative design group 413 will be described later.

Similarly to the front light guide plate 410 , the rear light guide plate 420 has upper and lower flat plate portions extending parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 that are continuous with respect to the regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . is formed and configured. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R30 is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 (front side) is continuously formed therefrom. Along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 410), a regular R-shaped portion having a size of about R75 and bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed, and furthermore, a regular R-shaped portion having a size of about R30 is formed continuously from there. A downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed that is bent toward the front side, and a downward flat plate portion is formed continuously from the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

In addition, on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view, a plurality of rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422 A rear upper diffusion lens 423 is provided to diffuse the emitted light in a plurality of directions inside the rear light guide plate 420 . Further, on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view, light emitted from a plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414 is projected onto the rear light guide plate 420. A rear-side downward diffusion lens 425 for diffusing light in a plurality of directions inside the light guide plate 420 is provided. The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 will be described later.

As described above, the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the surface in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10) guides the light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 from above and/or below. Various uneven lens cuts are applied so that the first decorative pattern group 421 simulating a school of fish composed of a plurality of types of fish can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁The first decorative pattern group 421 is formed evenly throughout the regular R-shaped portion.

The concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is formed by the rear lower LED 424 mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414 and/or the rear upper LED unit 422. When light is incident toward the lower flat plate portion and/or the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 from the rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the side upper LED board 422b. In addition, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, the light incident from the lower end (surface) of the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 and/or the upper end (surface) of the upper flat plate portion causes the first decoration from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The pattern group 421 emits light and becomes visible.

The concave-convex shaped lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is configured to emit the light incident from various directions out of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. Details of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 cuts the light guided to the flat plate portion in the upward direction in front view, the downward direction in front view, the right direction in front view, and the front direction. It is configured such that light incident from a direction parallel to the flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as the left direction when viewed, is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. When light is incident from the non-flat portion of the rear light guide plate 420 , that is, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion, the light repeatedly reflected in the rear light guide plate 420 becomes the upward inverted R-shaped portion. When the light is reflected by the R-shaped portion of the R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower reversed R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the rear surface. For this reason, even if light is incident on the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion from the lateral direction in front view, the light is not guided in the lateral direction in front view, and is obliquely upward in front view. The light is guided in the direction or obliquely downward when viewed from the front, and the light is guided non-uniformly (inhomogeneously) to the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the back side of the rear light guide plate 420. Depending on the situation, the intensity of the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 may vary, resulting in sparse lighting. Therefore, the light can be incident on the first decorative pattern group 421 evenly by allowing the light to enter from the end surfaces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, and the first decorative pattern group. 421 lighting can be kept homogeneous.

In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light-guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end surface (portion) of the flat plate portion of one of the light guide plates 410 and 420. It is constructed so as to prevent light from entering from the R-shaped portion (that is, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the traveling direction of the incident light is changed by the R-shaped portion, and there is a possibility that the desired pattern cannot or cannot be properly lit. In addition, the LED or the like must be arranged along the shape of the end surface of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the R-shaped portion is formed along the outer shape of the production member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable accessory, and when an LED board or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the design of the production member There is a risk of restricting the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having an R-shaped portion, by allowing light to enter from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions, the above problem can be solved favorably and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased. can be done.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, an upper flat plate portion (upper flat plate portion), an upper reverse R-shaped portion, and a normal R-shaped portion, which constitute the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. , Of the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion (lower flat plate portion), the upper side in front view, the right side in front view, the left side in front view, and the lower side in front view of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion It is configured such that light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is incident from the end face (side face).

The first reason is that the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 of the light guide plates 410, 420 are appropriately lit. The non-flat portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, has an R shape on the front surface and the back surface corresponding to the thickness of each light guide plate 410, 420. They are formed with slightly different radii. Therefore, when light is incident from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the light repeatedly reflected in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 is , the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the rear surface. For this reason, the light is non-uniformly guided to each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 provided on the back side of each light guide plate 410, 420, and depending on the part, each decorative pattern There is a possibility that the lighting intensity of the groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 may vary, resulting in sparse lighting.

Therefore, by allowing light to enter from the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light repeatedly reflected in each of the light guide plates 410, 420 can be emitted from at least the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion. When the light is guided inside the section, the light is repeatedly reflected on the front or rear surface of each of the planar light guide plates 410 and 420, and the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are always equal. As a result, the light is stably guided in the upper and lower flat plate portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420, and the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412, 412 from the light guide plates 410, 420, respectively. By guiding light uniformly (homogeneously) to 413 and 421, it is possible to appropriately light each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 and 421.

The second reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424. FIG. Since the side end surfaces of the R-shaped portions (that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) of the light guide plates 410 and 420 are shaped along the R-shaped portions when viewed from the front, When light is to be incident from the side end face of the R-shaped portion, each LED on the LED substrate must also be arranged along the side end face of the R-shaped portion. In particular, when the LEDs are arranged with consideration given to the arrangement of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421, adjustment of the positions and intervals of the LEDs on the LED substrate becomes complicated, and the degree of freedom in design decreases. There is a risk.

Therefore, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 of the LED substrates 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b are arranged so that the light enters from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper and lower flat plate portions of the light guide plates 410, 420. The LED substrates and LEDs are not arranged on the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420 . With this configuration, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b can be easily arranged along the shapes of the end surfaces of the upper and lower flat plate portions. (That is, they can be arranged on a straight line and at equal intervals), and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

A third reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the performance devices (drum display device 81, movable accessories, etc.) on the back and side sides of the light guide plates 410 and 420. FIG. On the back side and side side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, there is an effect device related to the variation effect of the third symbol, which is the main game in the pachinko machine 10 (a drum display device 81 that performs the variation effect itself, Movable accessories etc.) for executing various effects in the variable effect are arranged. Here, when LED boards are arranged on the sides of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420 when viewed from the front, there is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing each production device will be restricted by the amount of installation of the LED boards. .

Therefore, in order to allow light to enter from the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the upper and lower flat plate portions of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the upper side of the upper flat plate portion in the front view, the lower side of the lower flat plate portion in the front view, and the lower side of the lower flat plate portion in the front view. The LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 of the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b are arranged on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front, and the LED boards are positioned at the sides of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420 when viewed from the front. and LEDs are not arranged. By configuring in this way, when the production device is installed on the back side and the side side of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LED substrate etc. will not be obstructed with respect to the arrangement of the production device, so each production device design freedom can be improved.

The lower LED unit 414 is provided below the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, and includes a lower base portion 414a and a lower LED substrate 414b on which front lower LEDs 414c and rear lower LEDs 424 are mounted. , and a front lower condenser lens 414d.

The lower base portion 414a is configured to be able to hold the lower LED substrate 414b with screws or the like, and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front lower condenser lens 414d are fixed by positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. By connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding each at a predetermined position, they can be positioned and fixed.

The lower base portion 414a emits light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b only to the front light guide plate 410 through the front lower light condensing lens 414d. Predetermined dividing ribs are formed so that the light emitted from the lower side LEDs 424 is emitted only to the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 . there is As a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 414c and 424 can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third The decorative pattern 412 can be accurately lit at appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as unintended lighting of the decorative pattern can be suppressed. The details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the front lower condenser lens 414d and the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

The front right LED unit 415 is provided on the right side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, and is equipped with a front right base 415a and a plurality of front right LEDs 415c (see FIG. 19). and a front right LED board 415b and a front right condenser lens 415d.

The front right base portion 415a is configured to be able to hold the front right LED board 415b with a screw or the like, and the shape of each right end surface of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper Positioning ribs are provided along the edges of the reverse R-shaped portion, regular R-shaped portion, lower reverse R-shaped portion, and lower flat plate portion. While holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front right condenser lens 415d at predetermined positions by the respective positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display are mounted. By connecting and fixing to the area forming member 430 with screws or the like, they are configured to be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the front right base portion 415a directs the light emitted from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b to the front side through the front right condenser lens 415d. Predetermined partitioning ribs are formed so that the light is emitted only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410 . As a result, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing. It is possible to suppress display abnormalities such as lighting of . The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the front right condenser lens 415d will be described later.

The front left LED unit 416 is provided on the left side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, and is equipped with a front left base 416a and a plurality of front left LEDs 416c (see FIG. 19). and a front left LED board 416b and a front left condenser lens 416d.

The front left base portion 416a is configured to be able to hold the front left LED substrate 416b with a screw or the like, and the shape of the left end surface of each of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper Positioning ribs are provided along the edges of the reverse R-shaped portion, regular R-shaped portion, lower reverse R-shaped portion, and lower flat plate portion. Then, while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front left light collecting lens 416d at predetermined positions by the respective positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display are mounted. By connecting and fixing to the area forming member 430 with screws or the like, they are configured to be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the front left base portion 416a directs the light emitted from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b to the front side through the front left condenser lens 416d. Predetermined partitioning ribs are formed so that the light is emitted only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410 . As a result, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing. It is possible to suppress display abnormalities such as lighting of . The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the front left condenser lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is provided above the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view, and is mounted on the rear upper base 422a and the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12). and an upper LED substrate 422b.

The rear upper base portion 422a is configured to be able to hold the rear upper LED board 422b with screws or the like, and the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are held at predetermined positions by positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. By connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them, they can be positioned and fixed.

The rear upper base portion 422 a also directs the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422 c (see FIG. 12 ) to the rear upper diffuser lens 423 formed on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 . Predetermined partition ribs are formed so that the light is emitted only to the . As a result, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c can be accurately emitted to the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be accurately lit at an appropriate timing. Display abnormalities such as lighting of patterns can be suppressed. The details of the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (eg, 5 mm) and are formed in a flat plate shape extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are arranged between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 to provide a predetermined space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 . By providing a space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in this manner, light incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 is less likely to enter the other light guide plate 420, 410. It is possible to prevent unintended lighting of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the drum display device 81) in a front view, and is arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81 (the front light guide plate 410 and the rear side light guide plate 410). A central opening 431 is formed so that the regular R-shaped portion of the light plate 420 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a lens cut 432 is formed on the outer edge of the central opening 431.

This lens cut 432 is provided to clarify the display area (effective line) of the display pattern in the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 positioned above the display area forming member 430 in front view is It is provided to suppress (prevent) the front side light guide plate 410 and the rear side light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) from being irradiated with the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 when it is turned on.

Here, the positional relationship among the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 shows the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp 311 and the display area forming member 430 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX in FIG. Fig. 3 shows. In FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, the distance between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 is enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, They are arranged in the order of the drum display device 81 . From the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, a total of nine pattern display areas of each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 can be visually recognized. 3 pattern) is covered by the lens cut 432, so it is invisible or difficult to see. Also, from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 of the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated. configured to be visible when Furthermore, since the lower side of the lens cut 432 on the lower side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is illuminated. It is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when it is played. Therefore, the display area forming member 430 clarifies the effective line of the variable effect in the drum display device 81, and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group. When 413 is illuminated, it can be visually recognized while avoiding the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430 .

Further, the lens cut 432 is designed so that the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 is not guided to the front side light guide plate 410 and the rear side light guide plate 420 or is hardly guided to the rear side light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on. They are positioned above the regular R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420 (lower portion, both side portions) so as to shield the light from the confirmation lamp 311 .

More specifically, the lens cut 432 is configured in a rib shape in which a plurality of ribs are continuously erected on the back side (the back side of the pachinko machine 10). It is configured to disperse light and reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 .

Note that the lens cut 432 may be formed by knurling or mirror-finishing in place of the plurality of ribs so as to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 .

Further, a lens cut 432 may also be applied to the inner surface of the upright wall (entire bulging portion) on the side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front. By configuring in this way, the display area indicating the effective line of the variable effect is clarified in a square shape, and the light that can be incident from the side of the light guide unit 400 when viewed from the front is dispersed by the lens cut 432. , the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 is reduced.

In addition, the production by the confirmation lamp 311 positioned above the light guide unit 400 in the front view is a production that suggests (informs) that a big win will occur in the variable display. Since the effect is more important in the game than the effect of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (that is, the suggestion of the degree of expectation for a big hit), the first decorative pattern group 421, the fourth It is configured such that the lighting luminance is higher than the effect of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the determination lamp 311, which has a high degree of importance, if these effects are combined.

The front side light guide plate 410 and the rear side light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R-shaped portion) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and lamps, etc. are turned on at upper and lower positions of the regular R-shaped portion. In this case, when the light of the lamp is incident on the regular R-shaped portion and the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 are abnormally lit, the lighting modes and variations of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur with the change result of the presentation.

Therefore, by arranging the lens cut 432 between the fixed lamp 311 and the position in the vertical direction of the positive R-shaped portions of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the incident light through the lens cut 432 can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to lighting of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is directed to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing incident light, abnormal lighting of each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the front side light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421 with the highest reliability (expectation) of the big hit, the light enters from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the light from entering the rear light guide plate 420 . Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 can be diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby preventing an accidental It is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, which causes a large effect inconsistency when lit up. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.例文帳に追加

Next, referring to FIGS. 11 to 25, the traveling direction of the light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "optical path"). ), and optical paths of light from the front lower light-condensing lens 414d, the front right light-condensing lens 415d, and the front left light-condensing lens 416d with respect to the front light guide plate 410. , the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421, the light emission mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, the confirmation lamp 311, and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 and the drum display device 81 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 11, the positional relationship between front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 . In FIG. 11, for convenience of explanation, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the front light guide plate 410, and the second decorative pattern group 413 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. The arrangement of the 1 decorative pattern group 421 is arranged and expressed so as to be different from that shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, a front light guide plate 410 is positioned on the front side (left side of the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10, and a rear light guide plate 420 is positioned on the rear side (right side of the drawing). As described above, the front light guide plate 410 is formed with the third decorative pattern 412 imitating a sunfish in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the third decorative pattern 412 is formed. A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating cherry blossom petals is formed on both left and right sides of the regular R-shaped portion, and a bubble pattern is formed on the entire area of the reverse R-shaped portion below the front light guide plate 410, which is continuous from the lower flat plate portion. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating is formed.

Further, as described above, the rear light guide plate 420 is formed with the first decorative pattern group 421 imitating a school of fish pattern over the entire region of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420 .

Therefore, when the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are connected to form the light guide unit 400, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 The display area of the first decorative pattern group 421 is overlapped (superimposed). In this way, in the effects of the light guide unit 400, various effects can be executed in one display area, the effect of the light guide unit 400 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

Next, referring to FIGS. 12 to 16, optical paths of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420 and the first decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420 The light emission mode (lighting mode or display mode; hereinafter the same) of the group 421 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group 421 that can be illuminated and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c of the rear upper LED unit 422, and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. It is a schematic front view shown. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. 12 , showing rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of rear light guide plate 420 and rear lower LEDs 424 of lower LED unit 414 . It is a schematic front view showing the relationship. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through the rear lower diffusion lens. 15A and 15B are diagrams showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are lit. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decoration pattern group 421 when LED422c for rear upper side and LED424 for rear lower side corresponding to the center area|region of the side light-guide plate 420 are additionally lighted. 16A and 16B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. FIG. 16B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of 420 are additionally lit. 16A schematically illustrates the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. is a diagram shown in FIG. 12, 15 and 16, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and the diffusion lenses 423, 425 are omitted or schematically shown for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 12, on the rear light guide plate 420, a first decorative pattern group 421 is formed over the entire regular R-shaped portion as a school of fish pattern, which is a pattern imitating a school of a plurality of kinds of fish. Further, rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420 form a rear upper diffusion lens 423 on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, and When light is irradiated to the rear lower diffuser lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, the diffuser lens 423, 425 of one diffuser lens 423, 425 emits light in a plurality of directions (left and right in the first embodiment). It is configured so that light is diffused in three directions (center and right).

The positions of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged so that one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are paired in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ing.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, a description will be given of how light is diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (the rear upper diffusion lens 423). FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A of FIG. 1 is a schematic front view showing the relationship of . FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion B in FIG. 13, and schematically shows the optical path of light through the rear lower diffusion lens 425. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear lower diffuser lens 425, so the description thereof is omitted.

More specifically, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are arranged so that the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view are aligned. The only difference is that they have exactly the same shape. Therefore, when molding the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 423 can be formed by the same forming process (manufacturing process, same mold, etc.). 425, and an increase in manufacturing cost of the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 have the same configuration, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the light diffused from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are the same. The optical path of the diffused light becomes the same, and it is possible to easily set (understand) the arrival point of the optical path of the diffused light and the overlapping portion of the optical path of the light at the design stage. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the optical path of the light emitted from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light emitted from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are aligned with the rear light guide plate 420. may overlap one or more in the regular R-shaped portion of the . More specifically, for example, in the optical path of the light emitted from the front diffusion portion 425b of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, all the optical path portions are directed to the front direction opposite to the rear upper diffusion lens 423. It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the diffusion part (no reference number). In addition, in the optical path of the light emitted from the left diffusion portion 425a of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the left diffusion portion (no number) of the concave portion facing the rear upper diffusion lens 423 It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the front diffusing portion (no reference number) of the concave portion on the left side of the concave portion on the opposite side. Furthermore, in the optical path of the light emitted from the right diffusion portion 425 c of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 , the right diffusion portion (no number) of the concave portion facing the rear upper diffusion lens 423 It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the concave portion on the opposite side and overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the front diffusion portion (no reference number) of the concave portion on the right side of the opposite concave portion. As a result, the arrangement of the decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420 is facilitated, the decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420 are accurately lit, and the decorative patterns to be highlighted are arranged in overlapping portions to emphasize the decorative patterns. can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13 , rear lower diffusion lenses 425 are formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to correspond to the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414 . Then, as shown in FIG. 14, the rear lower diffuser lens 425 is formed with a plurality of concavities in a row. 425b and a right diffusion portion 425c.

The front direction diffusion part 425b is formed in a planar shape so as to be perpendicular to the irradiation direction of the light from the rear lower LED 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the leftward diffusion portion 425a is formed in a planar shape inclined about 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the left with respect to the front direction diffusion portion 425b. The right diffusion portion 425c is formed in a planar shape that is inclined about 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the right with respect to the front diffusion portion 425b. Further, the concave portion constituted by the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c is continuously formed on the rear light guide plate 420 by at least the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424. It is formed on the lower end surface.

The rear light guide plate 420 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). The optical path of the light incident on 425b is emitted straight (upward in the drawing of FIG. 14) inside the rear light guide plate 420, and the light incident on the left diffusion portion 425a from the rear lower LED 424 is The light emitted from the front diffusion portion 425b is refracted in a direction inclined leftward by about 20 degrees (θ2=20°), emitted into the rear light guide plate 420, and emitted from the rear lower LED 424 toward the right. The light incident on the diffusing portion 425c is refracted in a direction inclined to the right by approximately 20 degrees (θ3=20°) with respect to the light emitted from the front-direction diffusing portion 425b, and is emitted into the rear light guide plate 420. be done.

In the rear lower diffusion lens 425, one concave portion formed by the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c is at least as wide as the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424. , are provided multiple times. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear lower LED 424 is diffused in three directions inside the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of concave portions of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (that is, the front direction and the front direction). and the direction inclined 20 degrees to the left and the direction inclined 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). In addition, since the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c have the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same. Configured. As a result, by lighting one LED, the plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to the respective optical paths to be diffused can be caused to emit light in the same color. By executing an effect, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the rear lower diffuser lens 425 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the light distribution mode of the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c in the schematic enlarged view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear lower diffuser lens 425 has a predetermined side length (for example, the side that irradiates light in the front direction is 50 micrometers, and the side that irradiates light in the left and right direction is 50 micrometers). is 62.5 micrometers. Hereinafter, micrometers may be referred to as “μm.”). Each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c is configured so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusion sections 425a to 425c are the same. Specifically, in each concave portion, the length of the side that irradiates light in the front direction is the same length (for example, 50 μm), and the length of the side that irradiates light in the left direction and the right direction is respectively. They are configured to have the same length (for example, 62.5 μm), and are configured so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusion portions 425a to 425c are all the same. A plurality of recesses are continuously formed in a row. That is, the lateral width of one concave portion is the lateral width X (cos 50°=x/62. 5. x=40.175.X=2x=80.35 μm), resulting in 130.35 μm. Therefore, for example, when the light emission surface (illumination width) of one LED 424 is 3 millimeters wide, about 23 rear-side downward diffusion lenses 425 are formed for the one LED 424 .

Here, when one rear lower LED 424 emits light and each recess is irradiated with the light, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front diffusion portion 425b in one recess is 50 μm. The irradiated light is also distributed leftward by the leftward diffusing portion 425a in one concave portion, and the width of the light is also 50 μm, and further, the light is distributed rightward by the rightward diffusing portion 425c in the one concave portion. The width of the light is also applied at 50 μm. The lights distributed in the front direction, the left direction, and the right direction by the recesses are grouped by the number of the recesses to form optical paths of at least a predetermined width (for example, 50 μm×26=1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front diffusion portion 425b that forms one recess and the front diffusion portion 425b that forms the recess on the right of the recess are divided into the right diffusion portion 425c that forms the one recess, Since it is separated from the left diffusion portion 425a forming the recess on the right side by the lateral distance, the front direction diffusion portion 425b forming the one recess and the front direction forming the recess on the right side are separated. The light paths in the front direction distributed from the diffusing portion 425b are also separated by a distance in the horizontal direction. Due to the diffusing action of the light distributed from the portion 425b itself, the light is comprehensively distributed within the front light guide plate 410. FIG.

As a result, when one rear-side lower LED 424 emits light, the light diffused by the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 configured by a plurality of recesses causes each optical path of the diffused light and the optical path of the light path. A plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed (arranged) respectively at positions corresponding to the periphery can emit light of the same color, and the first decorative pattern group 421 in a range wider than the light emitting surface of one rear lower LED 424 can be lit. As a result, even with a small number of LEDs, a wide variety of effects can be executed, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased. In addition, by configuring the side lengths of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c so that the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the diffusion sections 425a to 425c are the same, the light irradiated from the diffusion sections 425a to 425c The width of the optical path becomes the same, the optical path of the light guided into the rear side light guide plate 420 is easily set (knowed), and the pattern arrangement in which the first decorative pattern group 421 can emit light can be easily grasped in the setting stage. It becomes possible to

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine rear upper LEDs 422c and nine rear lower LEDs 424 are provided, and one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are provided. They are arranged so as to overlap vertically. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c of 1 to the front direction diffusion part (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 downward in front view (lower side in the drawing) and the rear lower lower side of 1 The LED 424 is configured to overlap (superimpose) the light emitted upward in the front view (upper side in the drawing) through the front direction diffusion portion 425b (see FIG. 14) of the diffusion lens 425 for the rear lower side. . In addition, the light irradiated (diffused) in the left or right direction from the rear upper LED 422c of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 through the left diffusion portion or the right diffusion portion (both not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is , light emitted in each direction from the other rear upper LED 422c through each diffusion part (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423, and light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 to the rear lower diffusion lens It is configured to overlap (superimpose) with the light irradiated in each direction through each diffusion part 425a, 425b, 425c of 425 at the intersection of each optical path.

Specifically, for example, the LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c are sequentially arranged from the right side to be “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”. ", "green", and the LEDs of the rear lower LED 424 are, in order from the right side, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", " When lit in a total of three colors of green, red, blue, and green, from the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 corresponding to the rightmost LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, The "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and from each diffuser lens 423, 425 corresponding to the second LED from the right (that is, the eighth LED from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 The light of "blue" is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each diffusion lens 423, 425 corresponding to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 The "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the diffuser lens 423 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (that is, the sixth LED from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From 425, "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and is emitted to each LED corresponding to the fifth LED from the right (that is, the fifth from the left, center) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the diffusion lenses 423 and 425, the "blue" light is diffused along an optical path of a predetermined width, and corresponds to the sixth LED from the right (that is, the fourth LED from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From each diffusion lens 423, 425, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, corresponding to the 7th LED from the right (that is, the 3rd from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the diffusion lenses 423 and 425, the "red" light is diffused along an optical path with a predetermined width, and is directed to the eighth LED from the right (that is, the second from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the corresponding diffusion lenses 423 and 425, the "blue" light is diffused along an optical path with a predetermined width, and corresponds to the ninth LED from the right (that is, the leftmost LED) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the diffusing lenses 423 and 425, the "green" light is diffused along an optical path with a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion (“dark red”) where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “red” light overlap. , the part displayed only by the optical path of "red" light ("light red"), the part displayed by overlapping the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light ("purple") , the portion where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “green” light overlap (“yellow”), the optical path of the “red” light, the optical path of the “blue” light and the optical path of the “green” light The portion where the optical path of the light overlaps with the displayed portion (“white”), the portion where the optical path of the “blue” light overlaps with the optical path of the “blue” light (“dark blue”), Part displayed only by the optical path of "blue" light ("light blue"), part displayed by overlapping the optical path of "blue" light and the optical path of "green" light ("blue-green") , the part where the optical path of the "green" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("dark green"), the part where the optical path of the "green" light is displayed only ("light green") ), and the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even in a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the diffused lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below diffuse the light, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap. To make different luminescent colors occurring in a non-overlapping part and an overlapping part, and to display more colors than the color arrangement. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be simplified and the control load on the light emission control of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, when a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes are arranged without adopting full-color LEDs and the above control is performed, cost reduction can be realized by adopting single-color light-emitting diodes that are less expensive than full-color LEDs. This further simplifies the light emission control of the LEDs, and reduces the control burden on the light emission control of the LEDs.

In addition, one pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged so that it overlaps the optical path of light of one color in a predetermined portion, and overlaps the optical path of light of another color in portions other than the predetermined portion. to be placed. That is, by forming one pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 so as to fit within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, the one pattern is made to have different luminescent colors in each part, and the one pattern is colorful. can be expressed in different colors.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the lighting (effect) mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. 15A and 15B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the side upper LED 422c and the rear side lower LED 424 are lit. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decoration pattern group 421 when LED422c for rear upper side and LED424 for rear lower side corresponding to the center area|region of the rear side light-guide plate 420 are additionally lighted. 16A and 16B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. FIG. 16B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the light plate 420 are additionally lit. ) schematically illustrates the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a). It is a schematic diagram.

First, as shown in FIG. 15( a ), when the rear upper LEDs 422 c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit up sequentially from the right side, the right side of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the regions travels through the interior of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the downward right direction, the downward front direction, and the downward direction) according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. leftward) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit up sequentially from the right side, the rear lower side LEDs 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the rear LED 424 is diffused in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 . The light is diffused over a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side widths of the lenses 423 and 425 .

For example, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "green". Along with lighting, the right rear lower LED 424 lights up in a total of three colors: "red", the center rear lower LED 424 "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 "green". In this case, the portion where the “red” optical path and the “red” optical path overlap (intersect, the same shall apply hereinafter) is “dark red”, and the portion where the “red” optical path and the “blue” optical path overlap is “purple”. , the portion where the “red” optical path and the “green” optical path overlap is “yellow”, the portion where the “red” optical path, the “blue” optical path and the “green” optical path overlap is “white”, The part where the "blue" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "dark blue", the part where the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "blue-green", and the "green" optical path The part where the "green" light path overlaps is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and the "green" light path only , each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors, ie, "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each of the fish designs is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", and "blue". 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue" and "green" are displayed.

The first decorative pattern group 421 includes a small pattern formed in a size within the optical path width of 1, a medium pattern formed in a size within the optical path width of 2, and 3. There is a large pattern that is formed in a size that falls within the range of the optical path width of light. With respect to one first decorative pattern group 421, the small patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of one display color are displayed by lighting in a single display color, and the light path widths of a plurality of display colors are displayed. When each part of the medium pattern or the large pattern is positioned within the range, the respective parts of the medium pattern or the large pattern are lit up in the luminescent color of the overlapping optical path. Therefore, in the first decorative pattern group 421 composed of a plurality of patterns, each pattern is expressed in a different color, or one pattern is expressed in a plurality of colors, thereby providing a colorful and varied presentation. can be done.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in a non-lighting state, and maintains a state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 15B, from the state of FIG. , when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the LEDs 422c travels through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the downward right direction, the downward front direction, and the downward left direction) according to the shape of the rear upward diffuser lens 423, with a predetermined optical path width. is diffused in Similarly, while the rear lower LED 424 provided to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 424 provided to correspond to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 When the rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially lit from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected by the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. , the light is diffused in three directions (that is, upward right direction, upward front direction, and upward left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. be.

Then, for example, in each of the right region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". When lighting with the luminescent color, the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap is "dark red", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", The part where the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". ” and “blue” optical paths overlap “dark blue”, “blue” and “green” optical paths overlap “blue-green”, “green” and “green” The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors such as green.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each of the fish designs is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", and "blue". 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue" and "green" are displayed.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided to correspond to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in a non-lighting state, and maintains a state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(a), from the state of FIG. 15(b), the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the right region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. Further, when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the left region, the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 ( That is, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the entire area) travels inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward right direction, downward direction) according to the shape of the rear upward diffusion lens 423 front direction and downward left direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, while the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the right side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the LEDs 424 are arranged to correspond to the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 . When the provided rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially lit from the right side, light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left region, the central region, and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 . The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is oriented in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) according to the shape of the diffuser lens 425 for the diffusion lens 425 , and the lens side width of each diffuser lens 423 , 425 . is diffused with an optical path width of

Then, for example, in each of the entire regions (that is, the left region, the central region, and the right region) of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red" and the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue." , the left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit. When lighting with a total of three luminescent colors of "green", the portion where the optical path of "red" and the optical path of "red" overlap is "dark red", the optical path of "red" and the optical path of "blue". The overlapping part is "purple", the overlapping part of the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path is "yellow", and the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap. The part where the "blue" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "blue-green" , the part where the "green" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", " The first decoration pattern groups 421 are lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green" only in the portion of the optical path of "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each of the fish designs is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", and "blue". 10 colors of green, dark green, red, blue, and green are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), from the state of FIG. 16(a), the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. When the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side, the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. The light emitted from the LEDs 422c travels through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the downward right direction, the downward front direction, and the downward left direction) according to the shape of the rear upward diffuser lens 423, with a predetermined optical path width. is diffused in Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the left side area and the central area of the rear side light guide plate 420 are lit, they are provided to correspond to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected by the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. , the light is diffused in three directions (that is, upward right direction, upward front direction, and upward left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. be.

Then, for example, in each of the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". When lighting with the luminescent color, the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap is "dark red", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", The part where the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". ” and “blue” optical paths overlap “dark blue”, “blue” and “green” optical paths overlap “blue-green”, “green” and “green” The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors such as green.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each of the fish designs is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", and "blue". 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue" and "green" are displayed.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided to correspond to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state and is in a state where it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

In this way, even when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are controlled to emit light with a small number of emission colors of about three colors, the overlapping of the light diffused by the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 causes the rear side The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the light guide plate 420 can be expressed in a lighting color equal to or higher than the luminescent color. Therefore, colorful expressions can be performed even with light emission control with a small number of light emission patterns, so that various effects can be performed while reducing the control burden of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, among the rear upper LEDs 422c and the rear lower LEDs 424 that are arranged three each in the right region, the central region, and the left region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightmost rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged. From the LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424, the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 located in the center, and the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 located on the left side are sequentially turned on. An effect is executed as if a school of fish, which is one decorative pattern group 421, swims from the right side to the left side.

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are turned on the right side so as to interlock with the lighting of the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By lighting sequentially from , the performance on the rear side light guide plate 420 and the performance on the board surface of the game board 13 are integrally executed to provide a powerful performance using the entire board surface of the game board 13 to improve the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 17 and 18, optical paths of light from the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is illuminated. Then, the light emitting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit. FIG. The lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 is schematically shown when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in a non-lighting state. FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the determination lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off while the LEDs 422c corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. . FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on. From the state of FIG. 17(b), the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be illuminated, and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally illuminated. Fig. 18(b) is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left region, the central region and the right region of the light plate 420 are turned off; 18A, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, and the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally turned on. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decoration pattern group 421 when LED422c for the rear side upper part and LED424 for the rear side lower part corresponding to the right side area|region of the side light-guide plate 420 are light-extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big win occurs in the variable performance, the determination lamp 311 is turned on at any timing of the variable performance to clearly suggest to the player that a big win will occur. . Also, in order to suggest to the player the reliability of the big win in the variable effect, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be illuminated.

Here, notification by lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 is an effect suggesting that a big win will occur, and is a so-called big win confirmation effect. On the other hand, the notification by lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 is an effect that suggests whether or not a big win will occur, and does not definitely suggest that a big win will occur. Therefore, regarding the importance of game effects in the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is positioned as a more important effect than the notification by the first decorative pattern group 421.例文帳に追加

However, when the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed during the execution of the effect in the first decorative pattern group 421, the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 inhibits the effect by the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important as a game (duplicate effect low visibility, low recognition, etc.). In addition, when executing notification by the confirmation lamp 311, it is possible to consider measures such as not executing the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421, or not executing notification by the confirmation lamp 311 while the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed. However, there is a risk that the performance will be restricted, the control load will increase, and the performance variation will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. It is configured so that the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is conspicuous. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect range in the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view) is turned off or dimly lit, so that the first decoration The effect of the pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

From now on, a specific presentation mode by the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit (extinguished), the rear upper LED 422c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 illuminates the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. is diffused in three directions (that is, downward right direction, downward front direction, and downward left direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit up sequentially from the right side, the rear lower side LEDs 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the rear LED 424 is diffused in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 . The light is diffused over a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side widths of the lenses 423 and 425 .

Then, for example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left LED 422c is "blue". The rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", the left rear lower LED 424 is "green", When lighting with a total of three luminescent colors, the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap (intersect, the same applies hereinafter) is "dark red", and the "red" optical path and the "blue" The part where the optical path overlaps is "purple", the part where the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "yellow", the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path The overlapping part is "white", the overlapping part of the "blue" optical path and the "blue" optical path is "dark blue", the overlapping part of the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path is " The part where the optical path of "blue-green", "green" and the optical path of "green" overlap is "dark green", the part with only the optical path of "red" is "red", and the part with only the optical path of "blue" is "blue" ", and only the portion of the optical path of "green" is "green".

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in a non-lighting state, and maintains a state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. is lit, and when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to . direction) in a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of the rear lower diffuser lens 425 . On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. The rear upper LED 422c provided to correspond to the central region of the side light guide plate 420 also does not light up (turns off).

That is, among the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged far from the confirmation lamp 311, only the rear lower LEDs 424 provided in the central area and the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, and the confirmation lamp is turned on. The rear upper LED 422c arranged near the position 311 is configured to be extinguished.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is lit and displayed. The first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that will be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the upper LED 422c emits light is not lit (lighted out).

Here, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 close to the confirmation lamp 311 is not provided at a position to be lit by the light emission of the rear lower LED 424 (provided). The number of LEDs 422c is small), and many of them are formed at positions that are lit by light emission from the rear upper LEDs 422c.

On the other hand, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the front view lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 is provided at least at a position where it is lit by the light emission of the rear lower LED 424 (provided many are listed). In addition, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the front view lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 may be provided at a position where it is lit by light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c. It may be provided at a position where it is not lit by the light emission of the side upper LED 422c.

Therefore, in the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, when the rear upper LED 422c is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view lights up. When the LED 424 for the lower rear side is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view can be displayed (easily displayed). ). On the other hand, among the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view is displayed when the rear lower LED 424 is lit. Even if there is, it is not lit (hardly lit), and when the rear upper LED 422c is off, it is not lit (difficult to be lit, thinned out and lit).

By configuring in this way, the first decorative pattern group 421 in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 in the vicinity of the confirmation lamp 311 in the front view can be turned on or off depending on whether or not the rear upper LED 422c is lit. can. Then, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, even during execution of the first decorative pattern group 421, by turning off the rear upper LED 422c, the confirmation lamp 311 emits light and the first decorative pattern group. An effect that does not interfere with the lighting of 421 can be executed.

Then, for example, in each of the right region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the central rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is When lights up with a total of three colors of "green", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", and the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path The overlapping part is "yellow", the overlapping part of the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path is "white", and the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap. The part with only the "red" optical path is "blue", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is "green". Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit and displayed in color.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed from the rear lower LEDs 424 provided corresponding to the central area and the right area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light does not reach, it remains in a non-lighting state, and maintains a state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to light from the state of FIG. When the rear lower LEDs 424 provided corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit up sequentially from the right side while the rear lower LEDs 424 are lit, the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. Light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left area, the central area, and the right area (that is, the entire area) travels through the interior of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 . The light is diffused in a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425 in the direction (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction). On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to light from the state of FIG. The side upper LED 422c does not light up (is extinguished).

That is, only the rear lower LED 424 located far from the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear upper LED 422c located near the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off.

In this case, as in FIG. 17B, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 While being lit and displayed, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that will be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light is lit. not displayed (lights off).

Then, for example, in each of the left region, the center region, and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the central rear lower LED 424 is "blue," and the left rear LED 424 is "blue." When the downward LED 424 lights up with a total of three emission colors of "green", the portion where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", and the "red" optical path and the "green". The part where the optical path overlaps is "yellow", the part where the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "white", the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path The overlapping part is "blue-green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", the part with only the "green" optical path is "green", Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of seven colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. When the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side while the upper LEDs 422c are lit, the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. The light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the . direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the left side area and the central area of the rear side light guide plate 420 are lit, they are provided to correspond to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected by the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. , the light is diffused in three directions (that is, upward right direction, upward front direction, and upward left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. be.

Then, for example, in each of the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". When lighting with the luminescent color, the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap is "dark red", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", The part where the "red" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". ” and “blue” optical paths overlap “dark blue”, “blue” and “green” optical paths overlap “blue-green”, “green” and “green” The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors such as green.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided to correspond to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state and is in a state where it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

Thus, when the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed, and the performance by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important as a game, is made conspicuous. configured as follows. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect range in the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view) is turned off or dimly lit, so that the first decoration The effect of the pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

Next, referring to FIGS. 19 to 21, a front lower condenser lens 414d, a front right condenser lens 415d, and a front left condenser lens 416d for the front light guide plate 410 (hereinafter referred to as "each condenser lens"). light paths from the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d"), and the light emission of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. Aspects will be described. FIG. 19 shows a second decorative pattern group 411, a third decorative pattern group 412 and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415 and a front left LED. 4 is a schematic front view showing the relationship with a unit 416; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing optical paths of light by the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d. FIG. 21(a) is a diagram showing the concave-convex shape forming the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group 411 can be lit and displayed, and FIG. 21(b). ) shows the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be lit and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 as a blizzard pattern simulating a plurality of cherry blossom petals is formed on the left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion excluding the central portion. A third decorative pattern 412 as a sunfish pattern imitating a fish sunfish is formed in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles is formed on the lower flat plate portion. and formed over the entire region of the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, when the lower front LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 irradiates the lower end face of the front lower condenser lens 414d provided below the front light guide plate 410, It is configured such that the light travels straight (upward) from the upper end face of the front lower condenser lens 414d without being diffused. Further, the front right LED 415c provided on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 causes the front right LED 415c to collect light for the front right side provided on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. When the right end face of the lens 415d is irradiated with light, the light travels straight (to the left) without being diffused from the left end face of the front right condenser lens 415d. Further, the front left LED 416c provided on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 causes the front left light condensing light arranged on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 to be focused. When the left end face of the lens 416d is irradiated with light, the light travels straight (rightward) from the right end face of the front left condenser lens 416d without being diffused.

The positions of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are arranged so that one front right LED 415c and one front left LED 416c are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). ing.

In the front light guide plate 410, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion. None of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the switching point (region) with the regular R-shaped portion. This is because, when a decorative pattern for light guide display is arranged at the switching point (region) between the lower reverse R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the portion arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the lower reverse R-shaped portion are arranged. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to appropriately reach these parts, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, there is a risk that the parts may look unintended. Therefore, by arranging none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 at the switching points (regions) between the lower reverse R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the expression of the pattern to be light-guided and displayed can be improved. Appropriate and consistent performance can be executed.

The arrangement of decorative patterns at the switching points (hereinafter referred to as "switching points P") of the front light guide plate 410 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 52, 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 52 is a schematic side cross-sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing the light guiding mode of the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is turned on, FIG. 52(a). 4 is a diagram schematically showing a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c; FIG. 52(b) schematically shows a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. FIG. 52(c) shows the light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 in the front direction (vertically upward direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. It is a diagram schematically showing the. 53 is a diagram showing the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 54 schematically shows a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front right LED 415c. 1 is a perspective view of FIG. For convenience of explanation, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 described in FIG. 52 includes, for convenience of explanation, light incident in the lateral direction from the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, as well as upward light from the front lower LED 414c. A case will be described where it is configured to be able to emit light by light incident on. Further, FIG. 54 illustrates a case where the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be lit by light incident leftward from the front right LED 415c, and light incident rightward from the front left LED 416c. Although the description is omitted, the light incident in the right direction from the front left LED 416c has the same function and effect as the light incident in the left direction from the front right LED 415c.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is formed continuously from a lower flat plate portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front lower flat plate portion 410a" in front view) and the front lower flat plate portion 410a. A lower inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b”) and a regular R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b (hereinafter, “ and an upper inverted R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front regular R-shaped portion 410c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “front upper inverted R-shaped portion”). ) and an upper flat plate portion formed continuously from the front upper inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “front upper flat plate portion”).

In addition, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back side (lower side in FIG. 52) of the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, and the second decoration is formed on the back side of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c. A pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed. When the front lower LED 414c is turned on, the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 becomes visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in FIG. 52), and the front right LED 415c. And when the front left LED 416c is turned on, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c), the angle from the front lower LED 414c to the front light guide plate 410 is 45 degrees upward (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 52(a) ), a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 52(b).), and a frontal direction (the vertically upper side of the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 52(c).) Each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 is repeatedly reflected while guided in the front lower flat plate portion 410a. As described above, 413 is configured so that the light from the front lower LED 414c does not or is difficult to reflect in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the upper side in FIG. 52). The fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be difficult or impossible to be visually recognized from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the irradiated (guided) light.

Then, each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees, a downward angle of 45 degrees, and in a straight forward direction is repeatedly reflected in the front lower flat plate portion 410a, or is directly reflected in the front lower reverse R It reaches the shape portion 410b. In this case, the light colliding with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected at an angle smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when colliding with the front lower flat plate portion 410a (for example, 40 degrees). ) into the front light guide plate 410 . On the other hand, the light colliding with the surface of the front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has an angle (for example, 50 degrees) that is larger than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when colliding with the front side lower flat plate portion 410a. is reflected into the front light guide plate 410 at .

The light guided through the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b then reaches the front regular R-shaped portion 410c having an R shape opposite to that of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front side regular R-shaped portion 410c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 has an angle (for example, 50 degree) into the front light guide plate 410 . On the other hand, the light that collides with the surface of the front side regular R-shaped portion 410c on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected at an angle (for example, 40 degrees) smaller than the angle of reflection (for example, 50 degrees) when colliding with the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b. ) into the front light guide plate 410 .

That is, the light guided to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c through the front lower flat plate portion 410a is the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c. (Part. Hereinafter, the switching point between the front-side lower reverse-R-shaped portion 410b and the front-side regular-R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as a "switching point P.") While the amount of incident light becomes dense, the amount of light impinging on the rear surface of the front light guide plate 410 becomes sparse (coarse).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c) and FIG. 53, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is arranged, none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 is arranged at the switching point P between the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c.

This is because, as described above, the amount of light impinging on the back side surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the switching point P between the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c becomes sparse (rough). Even if the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the point P, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 do not emit light properly, and the decorative pattern group 411 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. , 412 and 413 may not be visible at appropriate timing. Further, each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 is configured to be lit (visible) only by light from a predetermined direction. , there is a possibility that each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the irradiation of light in the direction in which it should not be lit. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur in the content of the presentation. Therefore, by not arranging any of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 at the switching point P between the front side lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front side normal R-shaped portion 410c, each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 is arranged appropriately. The pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at appropriate timing, and discrepancies in performance contents can be made difficult to occur, and appropriate games can be provided.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, light emitted from the front right LED 415c passes through the front right condenser lens 415d and passes upward from the front right end surface of the front lower flat plate portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410. When the light is incident at an angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10; see FIG. 54), the front side surface and the back side surface of the front light guide plate 410 are guided while the light is guided in the front lower flat plate portion 410a. , the light is guided straight to the left when viewed from the front, and reaches the left side of the front light guide plate 410 . Then, as described above, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the back side surface of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect light in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light from the front right LED 415c. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be accurately visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, it is assumed that an LED and a condenser lens are provided on the right side of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and an upward angle of 45 degrees ( 54), the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b, Depending on the R shape, the light is not reflected straight to the left when viewed from the front, but is reflected to the upper side of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Then, when the reflected light collides with the rear side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left in the front view according to the R shape, and the light is reflected further upward from the front light guide plate 410. reflected to Then, the light is guided to the front-view left side of the front light guide plate while repeating the above-described reflection a plurality of times. In such a case, if the decorative pattern is arranged near the switching point P between the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, there may be a portion where the light is not guided. Therefore, the light cannot be accurately guided to the decorative pattern, making it difficult to achieve a desired light emission mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the LED and the condenser lens are not arranged from the front view lateral direction of the front lower reverse R shape part 410b, and the light from the front view lateral direction of the front lower reverse R shape part 410b , and by not arranging the decorative patterns near the switching point P, each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 can be properly lit and displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 may not be arranged at the switching point (portion) between the front side regular R shape portion and the front side upper reverse R shape portion. good. By configuring in this way, an effect equivalent to the above effect can be obtained.

In addition, each decorative pattern group 411 is also provided at the switching point (portion) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or the switching point (portion) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat plate portion. , 412 and 413 may be omitted. At the switching point (portion) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or at the switching point (portion) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat plate portion, the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 Since the amount of light impinging on the side surface may be sparse (rough), each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 is also applied to the switching point (portion) between the front upper reverse R-shaped portion and the front upper flat plate portion. The same effect as the above effect can be obtained by configuring so that the

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the manner in which light is collected by the front lower condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, and the front left condenser lens 416d will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d has one first end surface (lower end surface in FIG. The other second end face (the upper end face in FIG. 20) formed on the opposite side of the one end face is formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes that are continuous semicircular shapes.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). The light incident from the first end surfaces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end surfaces in a straight (or substantially straight, upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is condensed without being diffusely emitted from the second end faces formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Therefore, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be lit are lit, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are not lit, and the decorations to be lit are not lit. Only the patterns 411, 412, and 413 can be properly illuminated. In particular, when attempting to light the fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest jackpot reliability, the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and having a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Alternatively, if the third decorative pattern 412 lights up, there is a possibility that the content of the effect will be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed at appropriate timing by constructing so that at least the light for the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a low degree of expectation for big win is not diffused by the condensing lenses 415d and 416d. It is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies in the contents of the production to occur.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are provided for the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and condensed light is emitted. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, for the decorative pattern group with high expectation for big hit, that is, the third decorative pattern 412, etc., a diffuser lens used for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 is adopted instead of the condensing lens. It may be configured to The third decorative pattern 412 is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and is positioned in front of the drum display device 81 that the player pays attention to during the game. It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the third decorative pattern 412 by irradiating light comprehensively on the three decorative patterns 412 by means of a diffuser lens. Further, when lighting the fourth decorative pattern group 413, if the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, is lit, the effect will be inconsistent. 412, even if a fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a lower degree of expectation for big win than the third decorative pattern 412 is lit, the player should still prefer to execute the third decorative pattern 412 with a higher degree of expectation for big win. , and not so much attention is paid to the execution of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 having a low degree of expectation for a big hit, so that the production discrepancies are less likely to occur. Therefore, by adopting condensing lenses 415d and 416d for the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, and by adopting a diffusion lens for the third decorative pattern 412 with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the front side The performance effect of the light guide plate 410 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 21, decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that are lit and displayed in the direction of light guided into front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to light up for light in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 are configured to light up with respect to light in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Note that the third decorative pattern 412 that can be lit and displayed with light in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is lit and displayed with light in the same direction as the second decorative pattern group 411, so for convenience of explanation, the third decorative pattern 412 Description is omitted, and only the second decorative pattern group 411 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 21( a ), one bubble pattern forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed by forming vertical grooves (unevennesses) in the front view vertical direction on the front light guide plate 410 . By continuously forming a plurality of bubbles along the , one bubble pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) in a front view (for example, light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the longitudinal grooves. By reflecting (emitting) to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the bubble pattern is visibly displayed from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the front view vertical direction (vertical direction) in the front light guide plate 410 (for example, the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) collides with the longitudinal groove, The bubble pattern is not or hardly reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410 and is configured to be invisible or difficult to be seen from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 21(b), one cherry blossom pattern forming the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed by forming lateral grooves (unevennesses) in the front view lateral direction with respect to the front light guide plate 410 in the pattern of the cherry blossom pattern. By continuously forming a plurality of patterns along the line, one cherry blossom pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, light guided in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 (for example, light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) collides with the lateral groove, By reflecting (emitting) to the front side of the light guide plate 410, the cherry blossom pattern is visually recognizably displayed from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the front view lateral direction (horizontal direction) in the front light guide plate 410 (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the lateral groove, even if it collides with the lateral groove. The bubble pattern is not or hardly reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410 and is configured to be invisible or difficult to be seen from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 .

Thus, in one front light guide plate 410, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that can be lit and displayed are configured to be different with respect to the direction of light guided into the front light guide plate 410 (incident direction). As a result, a plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 can be individually lit and displayed on one front light guide plate 410, and the power of expression on one light guide plate can be improved, thereby increasing attention to the game. can.

In addition, by using the entire front side light guide plate 410 of one to execute the effects by the respective decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 on the front side and the periphery of the drum display device 81, the arrangement portion of the drum display device 81 is expanded. You can perform the production within the specified range. Therefore, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 can perform a powerful performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the front light guide plate 410, two decorative patterns (for example, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth The decorative pattern group 413) is formed so as to be expressible, and one decorative pattern (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) is lit for light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the lateral direction, and the front light guide plate is illuminated. The other decorative pattern (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) may be illuminated with respect to the light incident on 410 from the vertical direction. However, in order to light up different decorative designs in response to light from a plurality of directions at one site, the unevenness at that site must be configured in a complicated shape. It should be noted that the design becomes more difficult than when one decorative pattern is expressed on the part.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the lighting (effect) mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. 22A and 22B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 which are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. FIG. FIG. 22B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are turned on with respect to the front light guide plate 410. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative design group 411 when LED414c for the right end side and the left end side front side lower direction lights with respect to the light-guide plate 410. FIG. 23A and 23B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 which are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. FIG. FIG. 23B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern 412 when the front lower LEDs 414c in the central portion excluding the right end and the left end of the front light guide plate 410 are lit. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative pattern group 411 and the 3rd decorative pattern 412 when all LED414c for front side downwards lights with respect to the light-guide plate 410. FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 22(a), when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 lights up in "light blue", the front right LED 415c emits light. The collected light is condensed by the front right condenser lens 415d, and passes straight leftward through the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in a range equivalent to the vertical width of the front right condenser lens 415d. is irradiated to In addition, when the front left LED 416c positioned on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in "light blue", the light emitted from the front left LED 416c The light is condensed by the optical lens 416d, and the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is irradiated straight to the right with an optical path width in the same range as the vertical width of the front left condensing lens 416d.

In this case, the light projected straight leftward and rightward on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 by the front right light collecting lens 415d and the front left light collecting lens 416d is projected onto the lower part of the front light guide plate 410. The horizontal light collides with the longitudinal grooves of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the light in the horizontal direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, causing the front light guide plate 410 The fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visibly lit and displayed in "light blue" on the front side of . At this time, the lights condensed by the condensing lenses 415d and 416d do not reach the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. , the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 are invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 .

More specifically, the light incident from the side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d passes straight through the lower flat plate portion in the horizontal direction. As the light is guided, it diffuses slightly upward in front view at the lower flat plate portion and reaches the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, while the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the The upper plate portion is not reached or is difficult to reach. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d allows the player's line of sight (for example, drum display) on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to be displayed. Only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 arranged on the lower flat plate portion and the lower reverse R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the horizontal position where the device 81 is arranged) is visibly lit and displayed, and the regular R shape is displayed. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the part become invisible or difficult to see from the eyes of the player on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

By lighting up the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c sequentially from the lower side to the upper side, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits light in such a manner as to float from the lower side to the upper side of the front light guide plate 410. may be controlled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(b), among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, when the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end are illuminated in "pink", The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by one semicircular portion at the right end and the left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d. The lower flat portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with the optical path width within the range.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated straight upward by the front lower condenser lens 414d. The light collides with the lateral grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, thereby leading to the front side. On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative pattern group 411 is visibly illuminated in “pink”. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end is condensed by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the condensed light does not reach the third decorative pattern 412. First, the third decorative pattern 412 on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 is invisible or difficult to see.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surfaces of the right side portion and the left side portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower light collecting lens 414d is directed to the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the normal The light is guided straight upward through the R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. Although the flat plate portion slightly diffuses in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the position of the third decorative pattern group 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are separated by a predetermined distance. , does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R-shaped portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d causes only the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged on the right and left sides of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. is visibly lit and displayed, and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, the lower flat plate portion, which is the optical path of the light emitted straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 A fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed in the lower reverse R-shaped portion. It is configured to have a shape that does not or does not easily emit the light emitted in the direction to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 . Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state of being invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23( a ), among the front lower LEDs 414 c provided below the front light guide plate 410 , the front lower LEDs 414 c positioned other than the right end and the left end are illuminated in “green”. , the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by the semicircular portions other than the right end and the left end of the front lower light condensing lens 414d, and the half corresponding to the emitting front lower LED 414c is condensed. The lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with the optical path width in the range equivalent to the width of the circular portion. be done.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated straight upward by the front lower condenser lens 414d. The light collides with the horizontal groove of the third decorative pattern 412 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the front light guide plate On the front side of 410, the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed in "green" so as to be visible. At this time, when the light emitted from the lower front LED 414c located at a place other than the right end and the left end is condensed by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the light is condensed on the second decorative pattern group 411. Light does not reach, and the second decorative pattern group 411 on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 is in a state of being invisible or difficult to be seen.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the center portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d is directed to the lower flat plate portion, the lower reverse R-shaped portion, and the regular R-shaped portion. , the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 arranged in the positive R-shaped portion are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. It does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative pattern group 411 in the shape portion. As a result, only the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d. The second decorative pattern group 411 that is illuminated and arranged on the right side and the left side of the regular R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, the lower flat plate portion, which is the optical path of the light emitted straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 And in the lower reverse R-shaped portion, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed. It is configured in such a shape that it does not or is difficult to emit the light emitted in the vertical direction to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 . Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state of being invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(b), among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, when the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end are illuminated in "pink", The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by one semicircular portion at the right end and the left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d. The lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with the optical path width within the range. Further, when the front lower LEDs 414c located at positions other than the right end and the left end of the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in green, the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c The light is condensed by the semicircular portions other than the right end and the left end of the front lower light condensing lens 414d, and has a range equivalent to the width of the semicircular portion corresponding to the emitting front lower LED 414c. The lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward over the optical path width.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated straight upward by the front lower condenser lens 414d. The light collides with the lateral grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, thereby leading to the front side. On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative pattern group 411 is visibly illuminated in "pink" and the third decorative pattern group 412 is visibly lit in "green".

More specifically, the “green” light incident from the lower side surface of the center portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d is projected onto the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, The light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. However, the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the position of the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative pattern 411 in the regular R-shaped portion. In addition, the “pink” light incident from the lower side surface of the lower flat plate portion right portion and left portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower light collecting lens 414d is projected onto the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, The light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. However, the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the position of the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R-shaped portion. As a result, when the different decorative patterns 411 and 412 arranged in the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are lit by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d, different Even if the light is guided to each of the decorative patterns 411 and 412 in each lighting color, each light can be lit in an individual display color without being mixed with each other.

On the other hand, the lower flat plate portion, which is the optical path of the light emitted straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 And the lower reverse R-shaped portion is formed with a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves. It is formed in a shape that does not or makes it difficult to emit the light from the front side light guide plate 410 to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 . Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state of being invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

Thus, when a plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed on one front light guide plate 410, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is condensed and irradiated, and the decorative patterns 411, It is configured to vary whether or not it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the incident direction of light for each of 412 and 413 . By configuring in this manner, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 desired to be lit and displayed according to the game result are lit at an appropriate timing, and the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that should not be lit and displayed are reliably not lit. , the performance utilizing the whole (entire surface) of the front side light guide plate 410 can be executed while avoiding the occurrence of performance inconsistency, the variation of the performance can be enriched, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation is formed in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower reverse R shape portion). , so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be visually recognized only by lateral light. In addition, in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R shape portion and the upper reverse R shape portion), the second A decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed, and are configured so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 can be visually recognized only with vertical light. Here, even if the light in the vertical direction makes the fourth decorative pattern group 413 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the light in the vertical direction hits more than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is lit when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 with a high degree of expectation is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed. Even when the 4 decorative pattern group 413 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit in the portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction overlap, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may appear at an unintended timing. Even if it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the inconsistency in performance and provide a game without discomfort to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, an effect mode by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 and the drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. 24A and 24B are diagrams showing effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81. FIG. 24B schematically shows the non-lighted state of the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of the design group 421, the 2nd decorative design group 411, and the 3rd decorative design 412. 25A and 25B are diagrams showing effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81. FIG. 25(b) is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of the first decorative design group 421 and the fourth decorative design group 413 while the first decorative design group 421 is in the lighting state. FIG. On the other hand, it is the figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of the 2nd decorative design group 411, the 3rd decorative design group 412, and the 4th decorative design group 413. FIG. 24 and 25, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c and 424 and the condensing lenses 414d, 415d and 416d are omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group of the rear light guide plate 420. Each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to 421 is in a non-lighting (extinguishing) state. Therefore, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are invisible or difficult to visually recognize from the front side of the pachinko machine .

In addition, in the state of FIG. 24( a ), the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the rear side of the position where they are formed. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 is in a state where it can be visually recognized. Specifically, the left reel LR displays "7" in the upper stage, "blank symbol" in the middle stage, and "8" in the lower stage, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR each display "7" in the upper stage. , ``blank pattern'' in the middle row, and ``8'' in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the first embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is lowest in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) in the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed, and is configured to be visible only with lateral light. Further, in the front light guide plate 410, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 has a big hit expectation in a portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are formed so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with light in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a rear light guide plate 420 is provided on the rear side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A first decorative pattern group 421 is formed, and a drum display device 81 for executing a third pattern variation effect, which is the main effect of the game, is arranged. In this way, in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap in the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), the main effect of the game is provided. By arranging a drum display device 81 for executing a three-pattern variation performance and configuring it so as to be able to display a first decorative pattern group 421, which is a performance with the highest degree of expectation for a big win in the variation performance, the variation performance important as a game is achieved. While not inhibiting the display result and the performance with high expectation of big win, the performance effects of the front side light guide plate 410, the rear side light guide plate 420 and the drum display device 81 are respectively enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(b), while both the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "light blue", The LEDs 414c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off (turned off). ing. Therefore, while the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 are visible from the pachinko machine 10 It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 24(b), as in FIG. 24(a), the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display contents (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the drum are in a state in which they can be visually recognized. Specifically, the left reel LR displays "7" in the upper stage, "blank symbol" in the middle stage, and "8" in the lower stage, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR each display "7" in the upper stage. , ``blank pattern'' in the middle row, and ``8'' in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Therefore, when the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 executes the variation effect of the third symbol, the lower flat plate portion and the lower reverse R shape portion of the front light guide plate 410 By executing the production by the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed in the drum display device 81 and the front side light guide plate 410, the production of each device 81, 410 is performed by performing an integral and three-dimensional powerful production. It is possible to increase the effect and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25( a ), the right and left front lower LEDs 414 c corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in “pink”, and the front light guide plate 410 While the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right end and the left end corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412 are lit in "green", the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 Each of the LEDs 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 is in a non-lighting (extinction) state. Therefore, while the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative pattern group 421 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are visible from the pachinko machine 10. It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the.

25A, similar to FIGS. 24A and 24B, the third decorative pattern 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the position where is formed is visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays "7" in the upper stage, "blank symbol" in the middle stage, and "8" in the lower stage, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR each display "7" in the upper stage. , ``blank pattern'' in the middle row, and ``8'' in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Therefore, when the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 executes the variation effect of the third symbol, the second pattern formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 By executing the performance by the decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, the drum display device 81 and the front side light guide plate 410 perform an integral and three-dimensional powerful performance, thereby achieving the performance of each device 81, 410. It is possible to increase the effect and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are set to "red", "blue" and "green". , while the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are in a non-lighting (extinguishing) state. It's becoming Therefore, while the first decorative pattern group 421 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the.

25(b), similar to FIGS. 24(a), 24(b) and 25(a), the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 The display contents (stop state) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the position where the first decorative pattern group 421 is formed are visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays "7" in the upper stage, "blank symbol" in the middle stage, and "8" in the lower stage, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR each display "7" in the upper stage. , ``blank pattern'' in the middle row, and ``8'' in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Therefore, when the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 executes the variation effect of the third pattern, the third symbol formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420 By executing the performance by the 1 decorative pattern group 421, the performance effects of the respective devices 81 and 420 are heightened by performing the integrated and three-dimensional powerful performance by the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420.例文帳に追加, can increase the attention to the game.

In this way, by performing the variable effect of the third pattern in the drum display device 81 and the effect in the light guide unit 400 having the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in a composite manner, various effects can be realized. By executing this, the performance effects of the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be enhanced.

More specifically, in the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the third pattern variation effect (pachinko machine 10 front side) and its peripheral area (front view top, bottom, left, and right areas of the display area of the drum display device 81), the By executing a performance related to the variable performance (for example, the degree of expectation of a big win), the performance area of the variable performance of the third pattern is two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally expanded, and the powerful variation of the third pattern is performed. can perform the performance.

In addition, when a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable effect are configured to be executable, a direction with a low degree of expectation for the big win (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413). are collectively provided on one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while the production with high expectations for a big hit (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on another light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420) By setting it to , when executing an effect with a low expectation of a big win, it is possible to suppress the lighting display of the effect with a high expectation of a big win due to noise and the viewing angle of the player, etc. can be executed.

More specifically, assuming that an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) and an effect with a low degree of expectation for a big hit (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decoration If the pattern group 413) is provided on the same light guide plate, when trying to light up an effect with a low expectation of a big win, if the viewing position with respect to the light guide plate differs depending on the height and posture of the player, the viewing position is different. Depending on the angle, it may appear as if the effect with high expectation for big win is lit by the light for lighting the effect with low expectation for big win. When such an event occurs, the player expects that the performance with high expectation for big win will be executed even though the degree of expectation for big win for the variable performance of the third pattern is low, but on the other hand, Since a big win does not occur in the variable performance, there is a possibility that a performance with a high expectation for a big win may be misunderstood as a low expectation for a big win.

Therefore, when a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable effect are configured to be executable, a direction with a low degree of expectation for the big win (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413). are collectively provided on one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while the production with high expectations for a big hit (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on another light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420) By providing it at , when executing an effect with a low expectation of a big hit, it is possible to prevent misrecognition due to differences in the viewing position due to noise and the height or posture of the player, and to provide the player with the effect as designed. can.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to enable execution of a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big win in a variable effect, one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410) has a condensing lens 414d, By utilizing 415d and 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be individually executed, and other guidance By adopting diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the light plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in various expressions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute more effects than the number of the plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420, increase the variation of effects, and increase attention to the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Then, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol reservation lamp 84, and a front side centering on the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big winning opening 65a. Various solenoids 209 are connected, such as a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing and a normal electric solenoid for driving the normal electric 64c. Sends various commands and control signals to

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, each special pattern jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display in the special pattern display device 37, setting of variable effect in the drum display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal pattern display device 83, Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of the jackpot probability of each special pattern is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Also, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the first embodiment will be described. These counters, etc., set the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect of the drum display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, etc. It is used in MPU 201 of main controller 110 . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 32. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the drum display device 81 are performed by the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the effect mode of the variable effect, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, A variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection is used.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. In the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 64a. be done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is set in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b. stored respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28(a), details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 28(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment is for a low probability state used in the case of a special symbol low probability state where the game state is a "normal game state" or a "time reduction state" for each set value. and a high probability state used in the case of a ``probability variation state'' which is a high probability state of special symbols in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that of the low probability state of special symbols.

For each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot The number of random numbers) is 50, and the values "0 to 49" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5/100 (that is, 0.5 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the values "0 to 499" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "1" is 500/10000=5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that a 10-fold jackpot is likely to occur from a low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9950 random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "50". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9500 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "500 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing each special symbol with a set value of "1" in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9950/10000 = 99.5/100 (that is, 99.5 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9500/10000 = 95/100 (that is, 95%). there is

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the values "0 to 51" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52/100 (that is, 0.52 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and the values "0 to 519" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 520/10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "52". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9480 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "520 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 9948/10000 = 99.48/100 (that is, 99.48 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in a high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (that is, 94.8%) is set to

Therefore, the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5%→5.2%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the values "0 to 53" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54/100 (that is, 0.54 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and the values "0 to 539" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9946 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "54". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9460 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "540 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 9946/10000 = 99.46/100 (that is, 99.46 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in a high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (that is, 94.6%) is set to

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2%→5.4%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the values "0 to 55" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56/100 (that is, 0.56 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and the values "0 to 559" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 560/10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "56". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9440 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "560 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 9944/10000 = 99.44/100 (that is, 99.44 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 9440/10000 = 94.4/100 (that is, 94.4%) is set to

Therefore, the set value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4%→5.6%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "3".

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the values "0 to 57" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58/100 (that is, 0.58 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and the values "0 to 579" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "5" is 580/10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "58". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9420 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "580 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing each special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") with the set value "5" is 9942/10000 = 99.42/100 (that is, 99.42 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 9420/10000 = 94.2/100 (that is, 94.2%) is set to

Therefore, the set value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6%→5.8%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "4".

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values "0 to 59" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6/100 (that is, 0.6 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and the values "0 to 599" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that a 10-fold jackpot is likely to occur from a low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9940 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "60". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9400 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "600 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "6" is 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (that is, 99.4 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%). there is

Therefore, the set value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8%→6%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than when the set value is "5".

In this way, by changing the odds of winning a big win for each probability set value and changing the likelihood of winning a big win, it is possible to change the ball payout rate for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of game characteristics of the game played in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot is selected from the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b is commonly referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG.28(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG. 28(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in the ROM202.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which jackpot types and values of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10, until the next jackpot, both the jackpot probability of special symbols and the hit probability of normal symbols are in a high probability state. "10R probability variable jackpot" corresponding to "fluctuation state" and "probability fluctuation" in which both the special pattern jackpot probability and the normal pattern hit probability are high probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds until the next jackpot. "5R probability variable jackpot" corresponding to "state", and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special pattern jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but the special pattern dynamic display is performed 100 times. , There is a "10R normal jackpot" corresponding to a "time reduction state" in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 28(b), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the "10R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type counter is associated with the "5R probability variable jackpot". The value "40-59" of C2 is associated, and the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "10R normal jackpot".

That is, in the winning lottery of each special symbol, either the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation area of the first reservation ball storage area 203d or the first reservation area of the second reservation ball storage area 203e When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2 of the same first reservation area. The jackpot type associated with the value of is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "10R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the jackpot type counter C2 is "45", "5R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78", "10R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of each special symbol, the jackpot type of "10R probability variable jackpot" is 40%, the "5R probability variable jackpot" is 20%, and the "10R normal jackpot" jackpot type is You will be elected at a rate of 40%.

The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description of various counters is continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, the rough performance mode of the variable performances displayed on the drum display device 81 at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss is selected according to the number of suspended variable performances and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. be. Specifically, a "non-reach (long)" production mode or a "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and only the variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" is executed " "Normal Reach" effect mode, "Super Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed and the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, and similarly, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed into "Special Reach". , and the "Special Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of " is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode) (Sometimes referred to as a "non-reach" production mode) is a drum display device 81 in which the three reels LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. 4) fluctuate as a variable production of special symbols. After the "high-speed variation" variation element that rotates (shuffles) the reels LR, CR, and RR at high speed, whichever of the two reels (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR) that stop first is effective This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop even on the line and the "ready-to-win display" does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" is, for example, in the third symbol variation effect performed by the drum display device 81, the third symbol displayed on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR is displayed vertically downward on the display screen. A variable element that is rotated and scrolled at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed except for a specific production mode ("non-reach (short)" production mode). It is configured to be

The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element means that, in the variable performance of the third pattern performed on the drum display device 81, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third pattern is scrolled at a speed that is visible to the player. It refers to the variable element that is In this "low-speed variation" variation element, the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR) that are stopped and displayed first, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into a variable element of the "normal reach". , when different third symbols stop on the two reels LR and RR to be stop-displayed first, the remaining reel CR is stop-displayed and the variable effect is finished. Details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is performed after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, and the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in turn. , different third symbols are stopped on the two reels LR and RR that are stopped first, the remaining one reel CR is stopped, and one variable effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the "high-speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is not performed, and after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is completed, each reel LR, CR , RR are stopped at the same time, different third symbols are stopped on two reels LR, CR, RR (for example, two reels LR, RR that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and other reels are stopped. The reel CR of 1 is also stopped, and the variable effect of 1 is completed.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that, in the variation production of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, " This is one of the production modes of the "ready-to-reach display" in which the variable elements of "normal reach" are executed and other "ready-to-reach display" does not develop into the variable elements of "super reach" and "special reach".

More specifically, in the variable element of "normal reach", the middle reel CR is scroll-displayed at a low speed, and at the time of starting the variation, it is varied by the low-speed scroll to a predetermined stop symbol, and when the stop symbol is reached, This is a stop display effect.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

More specifically, the "super reach" variable element is scrolled at a slower speed than the "normal reach" variable element (for example, ultra-low speed scroll, frame-by-frame scroll, etc.), and is predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. It is an effect that the symbols change at the low speed until the stop symbol is reached, and stop display is performed when the stop symbol is reached.

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64a It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 64b It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second storage area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c on hold provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state" or "normal game state". and (3) how many balls of the suspended variable effect are on hold, the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode that makes it easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed in the variable performance, and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case that the variable performance is on, a big win is hardly generated by the variable performance, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible useless balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on balls entering the second start port 64b in the state of reaching .

Specifically, the number of standby times of the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times and the upper limit is set, and the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b in the "fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is easily reached. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the second start port The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained even though the ball is entered into 64b. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64a, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the ball. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the demonstration screen or the like must be displayed on the drum display device 81. - 特許庁If the drum display device 81 does not perform a variable performance even though the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player cannot obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. I'm excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b because the drum display device 81 does not perform the variable performance, and the game value is increased. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged to be an unobtainable platform, and the player will stop playing the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the drum display device 81 to be in a state where the variable performance is not performed, and to maintain the execution state of the variable performance in the drum display device 81 for a long time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variation performance based on the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, whether the variation performance is appropriate, Based on the game state at that time and the total number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at that time, the number of reservations table 202c is referred to, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. is configured to Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the reservation number table 202c in FIG. 29, when the total number of reservation balls is "1 to 3" at the time of extracting a loss in the "normal game state", or the "probability fluctuation state ' or 'time reduction state' and the total number of held balls is '1', the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 30(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "4 to 8", or when extracting a lost ball in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" If the number is "2 to 8", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when the jackpot is won, any game state (that is, "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and any number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 8) Even if there is, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 30(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, when any one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no (that is, at the time of loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of held balls and the game state at that time.

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.).

In this case, in each performance mode in which 'ready-to-reach display' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the variable element part of 'high-speed fluctuation' is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds ends (when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 30(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 30(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 30(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, on the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a comparatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (short)" effect mode with a short variable effect time is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode A "non-reach (long)" presentation mode with a long variable presentation time is selected. As a result, since the "non-reach (long)" effect mode with a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b can be performed. By making it easier to secure the ball entry time to the drum display device 81 and increasing the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the execution time of the variable performance on the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is being executed is maintained. can do.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of holding balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64a Alternatively, the determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry are performed so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. is configured to

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is the same, and the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the other effect mode is the same. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if the pre-reading notice is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, the effect that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice in the variable performance that is the target of the pre-reading notice. can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" rendering mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, each "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player according to the type of performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing the pre-reading notice, the number of pending balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading notice and the pre-reading notice It may differ from the number of held balls at the time of execution of the variable production. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a, the first reserve first to fourth areas provided in the first reserve ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start port 64a It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 64b, the second reserve first to fourth areas provided in the second reserve ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second start port 64b It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The sound ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the drum display device 81 and the fine pattern variation mode based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. is determined, and whether or not to execute the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as a variation pattern table 202e, a variation pattern table 202e1 for losing, which is commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and A large winning variation pattern table 202e2 that is commonly used in all game states at the time of the second special symbol big winning is prepared.

FIG. 31 schematically shows an example of a losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 32 schematically shows an example of a big winning variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram. As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e2 are grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (short)" are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined. "E1: non-reach (short)" referred to when the mode is determined, "E2: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and "super reach" performance mode are divided into "E3: Super reach" which is referred to when is determined, and "E4: Special reach" which is referred to when the "Special reach" effect mode is determined. In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E5: Normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: Super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined It is divided into "E7: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), or If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value (jackpot random value) that will be a jackpot, that is, in any case, it is lost. If the value is equal to , the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that point and the number of held balls at that point by referring to the reserved number table 202c and stored in the same reserved area. An effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. determined as a variation pattern.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" Variables and "Revary" variables are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is, as described above, a variable element that scrolls (rotates) at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (short)" production mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). ), and when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, "10 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (long)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds" is executed, and the third pattern is scrolled to make it visible and "ready-to-win display" is generated. It is a variable element that shows whether or not to do it. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode (for example, "non-reach (long) )” presentation mode) is selected, it is performed for “5 seconds” after the variable element of “high-speed variation”.

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed, so that the final stop reel of the drum display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see FIG. 4)) stops while decelerating, while in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed, the reels LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 are changed to "low speed variation". It is configured so as to stop rapidly (so-called "bitter stop") without going through a variable element. In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect is completed as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "5 seconds".

The "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that executes the "high speed fluctuation" variable element again when a predetermined stop point is temporarily displayed in the above "low speed fluctuation" variable element. Say. That is, in the variable elements of the "low-speed fluctuation", when the right reel RR is stopped, a third symbol having a number larger by "+1" than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is displayed stopped on any of the activated lines. (For example, the third symbol "7" is stopped on the left reel LR and "8" is displayed on the right reel RR). is stopped (for example, "7" on the left reel LR and middle reel CR, and "8" on the right reel RR). Hereinafter, the combination is referred to as a "chance pattern".), the variable element of the "low-speed knitting" becomes the variable element of the "pseudo-variation", and the execution pattern ( The reserved pattern) is not digested, and the variable production continues.

This "pseudo-variation" variation element is performed for "5 seconds" like the "slow variation" variation element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" is executed, a pattern (for example, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and the right reel RR) always generates a "ready-to-win display" are the same, and the middle reel CR continues to fluctuate (hereinafter referred to as "reach formation pattern") is displayed, and is configured to develop into a variable element of "normal reach" to be described later. there is In addition, in the variable element of this "pseudo-variation", the "reach formation pattern" may not be displayed, and the "loss display" may be displayed to end the variation effect.

Therefore, as the fluctuation element of this "pseudo fluctuation", the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is equivalent to the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation". After starting, an effect is executed as if the variable effect was started once more.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one “pseudo-continuous” effect is executable in the variable effect. In addition, in one variation performance, the variation element of "pseudo variation" may be configured to be executed a plurality of times.

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") on one of the effective lines of the two reels LR, RR that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". ) is stopped and displayed, it is a variable element that indicates whether or not a big win will occur depending on the result of the variation of the remaining reels CR. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variable element of ``super reach'' is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining reel CR continues without stopping the ``loss display'' in the variable element of ``normal reach'', and a predetermined effect is performed on the drum display device 81. (For example, "battle production") is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur. This "super reach" variable is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The "special reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the remaining reel CR continues to fluctuate, and the drum display device 81 displays the predetermined It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect different from the effect (for example, “competition effect”). This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" suddenly develops without going through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go to , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, this "re-variation" variation element is configured to be selected only in the big win variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 32) and not selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 31, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, "E0: non-reach (long)" has an overall variation time of "15 seconds." One variation pattern (fluctuation time) of ""Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor". Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time". Yes.) are available.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation "element" is set to "0 to 9", and only "variation element of 'high speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low speed variation'" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when executing the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in any gaming state, the fluctuation type counter All possible values (“0 to 9”) of CS1 are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation of "low speed fluctuation" element is selected.

Next, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach (short)" has one variation pattern of "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9", and only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" are set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss referred to when executing the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in any gaming state, the fluctuation type counter All possible values (“0 to 9”) of CS1 are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" "variation element" and ""fast variation (long)" variation element + "pseudo variation" + "fast variation (short)" + "slow variation" variation element + "Normal Reach" fluctuation element" and two fluctuation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach "Variation element of "" is "0 to 6", ""Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" "7 to 9" for "Variable element + "Normal reach" variable element".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when executing the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long) ” fluctuation element + “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element + “normal reach” fluctuation element” fluctuation pattern is 70%, ““ high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (Short)" variation element + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected when losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is easily selected (overall 70%). In addition, fluctuation of "variation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" By being configured so that the pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide a game property in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Next, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Super Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " Fluctuation element of "super reach" and fluctuation of "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" Two variation patterns of "element + variation element of "super reach"" are selectably prepared, and the value of variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " "0 to 7" for "super reach" fluctuation element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "variable element + variable element of "super reach"" is "8, 9".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "super reach" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when executing the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long )” fluctuation element + “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element” fluctuation pattern is 80%, ““high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “ It is set so that the variation pattern of "high-speed variation (short)" + "low-speed variation" variation + "super-reach" variation is selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element" is likely to be selected. (80% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element By being configured so that the variation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide a game property in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Next, in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Special Reach" includes "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + " Variation element of "Special reach" and "Variation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation with an overall fluctuation time of "50 seconds" Two variation patterns of "element + variation element of "special reach"" are selectably prepared, and the value of variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " "0 to 8" for "special reach" variable element, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" "variable element + variable element of "special reach"" is "9".

That is, in any game state, when the "special reach" production mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing which is referred to when executing the fluctuation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long )” fluctuation element + “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element + “special reach” fluctuation element” fluctuation pattern is 90%, ““high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “ It is set so that the variation pattern of "high-speed variation (short)" + "low-speed variation" variation + "special reach" variation is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element" is likely to be selected. (90% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element By being configured so that the variation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide a game property in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

It should be noted that a predetermined variation pattern (for example, "non-reach (long)" effect mode and "non-reach (short)" effect mode) at the time of losing is determined as a variation pattern as it is, so the variation type counter CS1 may be configured to determine the variation pattern without using In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are big winning will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, and in the second special symbol When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the corresponding second reserve ball storage area 203e is a value for the jackpot, referring to the reserve number table 202c, the game state at that time, A stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of balls held at that time, and an effect mode is selected based on the value of a stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. determined as a variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" "Variation element" and ""High speed variation (long)" variation element + "Low speed variation" variation element + "Normal reach" variation element + "Revariation" variation element" with an overall variation time of "25 seconds" , "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + “Normal reach” variable element” and “High-speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Pseudo fluctuation” variable element + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” variable element with an overall fluctuation time of “35 seconds” + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. are mapped.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach "0" for "Variation element of", "Variation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed fluctuation" + Variation element of "Normal reach" + Variation element of "Re-variation"" "1, 2", ""Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation "3 to 5" for "element", ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + “Normal Reach” variation factor + “Revariation” variation factor” is “6 to 9”.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" Variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element" variation pattern is 10%, ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation Fluctuation pattern of “element + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation element” is 20%, ““high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element + “slow Fluctuation pattern + Fluctuation element of "Normal reach" fluctuation pattern is 30%, Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + Fluctuation element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variation factor + “normal reach” variation factor + “revariation” variation factor” is likely to be selected (40% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" variable element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" ” variable element+variable element of “normal reach”” is also selected, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any of the variable patterns.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super Reach" includes ""Fast Variation (Long)" variation element + "Slow Variation" variation element + "Super Reach" with a total variation time of "30 seconds" "variation element" and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" with a total variation time of "35 seconds" "Variable element" and ""Fast variation (long)" variation element + "Pseudo variation" variation element + "Fast variation (short)" variation element + "Slow variation" with a total variation time of "40 seconds" Fluctuation factor + Fluctuation element of "Super Reach"" and "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + Fluctuation element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" with total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" "variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are prepared for selection, and the variation type for each variation pattern A value of the counter CS1 is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " "0, 1" for "super reach" fluctuation element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation "2 to 4" for "element", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "5, 6" for "super reach" fluctuation element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed" "7 to 9" for the variable element of "fluctuation" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-fluctuation".

That is, in any game state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" is selected. fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 20%, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach " fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element "variation pattern is 30%, "" high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + " high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 20%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) + variable element of "low speed variation" + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-fluctuation"" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "super reach" variable element + "revariation" variable element ], or ["Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (both 30% of the total). In addition, "Variable element of 'High speed fluctuation (long)' + Variable element of 'Low speed fluctuation' + Variable element of 'Super reach'" or "Variable element of 'High speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' Fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element" are configured to be selected respectively, so that any fluctuation It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected even from a pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special Reach" includes ""Fast Variation (Long)" variation element + "Slow Variation" variation element + "Special Reach" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds". "variation element" and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" with a total variation time of "45 seconds" "Variable element" and ""Fast variation (long)" variation element + "Pseudo variation" variation element + "Fast variation (short)" variation element + "Slow variation" with an overall variation time of "50 seconds" Variation element + Variation element of "Special reach"" and "Variation element of "Fast variation (long)" with total variation time of "55 seconds" + Variation element of "Pseudo variation" + "Fast variation (short) 'variation element + 'low speed variation' variation element + 'special reach' variation element + 're-variation' variation element' A value of the counter CS1 is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " "0 to 2" for "Special Reach" variable element, ""High-speed variation (long)" variable element + "Low-speed variation" variable element + "Special reach" variable element + "Re-variation" variation "3, 4" for "element", "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo-fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "5 to 7" for "special reach" variable element, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low speed" "8, 9" for the variable element of "fluctuation" + the variable element of "special reach" + the variable element of "re-fluctuation".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "high speed variation (long)" is selected. variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "special reach" variation element" variation pattern is 30%, ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "special reach " fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element "variation pattern is 20%, "" high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + " high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 30%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) ' variable element + variable element of 'low speed variation' + variable element of 'special reach' + variable element of 're-variation'' is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "special reach" variable element" or ""high speed fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element (both 30% of the total). In addition, "Variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low-speed fluctuation' + variable element of 'special reach' + variable element of 're-fluctuation'" or "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' Fluctuation elements + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation elements + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation elements + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements + "Special reach" fluctuation elements + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements are selected respectively, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description is continued. The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Also, when the random number counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) It is updated once and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in one of the general map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the general map holding ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area, and the normal pattern per random number counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area. Hit judgment is performed on the value.

The value of the random number that is the winning pattern is set by a random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in the low probability state, high probability 50/100 etc. in the state), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 will be the hit set by the random number table per normal pattern. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a hit. Then, a normal pattern variation table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, 30 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is not activated, 3 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is activated) etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, an electric role opening table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is not activated, 0.1 second when the winning auxiliary function is activated) 5 seconds, etc.), and during the opening time, the normal electric motor 64c operates to open, and during that time, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the counter C4 per general pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number that is set by the random number table per general pattern (not shown), it is determined to be lost. be done. Then, according to the game state, a variable display time is set by referring to a normal pattern fluctuation table (not shown), and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal pattern display device 83, the stop pattern (normal pattern) is set to "X". ” is illuminated.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 37) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, and a reserved ball execution area 203f.

The first holding ball number counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first The entry of the ball into the opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b may be referred to as "starting winning"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (the drum display device 81 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol to be performed).

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64a is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 41 (see S303 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 42).

The second reserved ball number counter 203b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, is the second starting port 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the start winning prize, the number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation performance of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the drum display device 81) It is a counter that counts up to four times (the number of standby times).

As with the first reserved ball counter 203a, the second reserved ball counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, every time the start winning to the second starting port 64b is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 41 (see S307 of ). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (variation effect) is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the number of reserved balls command is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 (see S310 in FIG. 41). This pending ball count command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the first pending ball counter 203a or the second pending ball counter 203b is incremented by 1 after the start winning is detected. It is a command to be executed, and includes data regarding the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the reserved ball number command. can. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, each time a starting winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, dynamic display (variation) of each special symbol managed by the voice ramp control device 113 Even if the number of pending balls in the production) deviates from the number of pending balls in the actual dynamic display (variable production) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The number of balls command can correct the deviation.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, in the pending ball number command, 1 is added to the first pending ball number counter 203a or the In addition to the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27) is generated in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is A number command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command are used to execute fluctuation effects based on the respective values. Before execution of the variable performance, it is determined what will happen to the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Then, based on the result of judgment by the look-ahead, the execution of various effects is determined, and the performance contents of "suspension change notice" for changing the pending pattern (execution pattern) displayed on the pending display section Db of the drum display device 81. and execution time (timing), etc. can be determined.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the A command similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command (advance variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the incoming ball may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64a. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64a (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the second start port 64b. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 and a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 In order to execute processing such as dynamic display and setting of variable effect, data (counter C1 to C3, CS1), if the data corresponding to the starting winning prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to one starting winning prize of the data is stored. , to this holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start winning with respect to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning with respect to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol is the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not suspended. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27 again, details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. And it is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the variable effect.

As described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect are performed with the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery. , a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters one of the first starting ports 64a (start winning) is stored. Up to 4 times can be stored, but in that case, among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) data is stored in That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 64a that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (2nd reservation 1st to 4th areas). be. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 64b that is older in terms of time is stored, and the second reserve first area stores the data to the second starting port 64b that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. there is

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. , the data stored in the second reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when the execution start timing of the variable effect comes, the MPU 201 stores no data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first reserved area, the data stored in the first reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 43), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the first reserved ball storage area 203e It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is changed to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. shift to Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The input/output port 205 includes, on the input side, switches for detecting balls that have won prizes in the prize winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a and balls guided to the ball discharge path through the out opening 66, respectively. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors, etc., a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting for updating the probability setting value when pressed in the "setting change mode". A change switch 502 and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected with various solenoids 209 such as a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, and a normal symbol holding lamp 84 as an output side. ing. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 , 502 and 503 and the state of the setting key 501 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 at intervals of about 0.6 seconds.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, confirmation lamp 311, each notification lamp 303a, 305a, front lower front LED 414c, front right LED 415c, front left LED 416c, rear upper LED 422c, rear lower LED 424, etc.) 227 output of lighting and extinguishing, fluctuation effect and continuous notice effect performed by the drum display device 81 It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect to be displayed.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like. Details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the drum display device 81 is changed, or the "super In addition to controlling the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the rear image such as the "reach" effect mode, the content based on the depression of the frame button 22 is sent to the display control device 114 by the drum display device 81. instruct it to run.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the drum display device 81 performs a variation effect of the third symbol and a continuous advance notice effect. control.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a light guide plate lighting At least a pattern table 222e, a fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and a reel control table 222g are stored.

Of these tables 222a to 222g, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable production, and the execution of various productions is determined, and the production content (and the execution time (timing)) and execute control.

In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110, the probability set value, etc., and suggests the probability set value of the jackpot to the player. and the content (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion effect".

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e includes the first decorative pattern group 421 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 based on the propriety of the variable effect, the variation pattern, etc., and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, which will be described later. , second decorative design group 411, third decorative design group 412 and fourth decorative design group 413. Details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

Further, the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f is referred to for determining the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 during execution of the variable production based on the propriety of the variable production and the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, which will be described later. It is a table where Details of the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Further, the reel control table 222g is referred to for determining the driving pattern of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81 according to the variation pattern of the variation effect of the third symbol and the stop symbol. It is a table where

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c, a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, a fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, a first reservation information storage area 223f, a 2. At least a pending information storage area 223g and an execution information storage area 223h are provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 47). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect is set in the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 48).

The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is triggered by the turn-on of the fluctuation start flag 223a, and when there is a variable performance during standby, a variable performance setting process for executing the variable performance during standby. (See S1402 to S1415 in FIG. 48).

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, is a first special symbol fluctuation effect (dynamic display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of 4 times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command (holding ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first pending ball number counter 223b It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first starting port 64a, and the main controller 110 changes the number of the first reserved balls counter 203a. When the pending ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the value ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main controller 110. And when receiving the stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the drum display device 81 along with the reception thereof, subtract 1 (update) from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1406 in FIG. 48). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol fluctuation effect (dynamic display), which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c. It's becoming

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls for the second special symbol variation effect by entering the second starting port 64b, and the main controller 110 counts the second pending ball number counter 203b. When the pending ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the value ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted in the main controller 110. And when receiving the stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the drum display device 81 along with the reception of them, subtract 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (update) (see S1409 in FIG. 48). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the drum display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (FIG. 47), at the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command (S1406 of FIG. 48 or S1409), in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c after being stored or updated, the display control device 114 issues a display reserved ball number command. Send to

When the display control device 114 receives this display-purpose reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the suspended symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and the execution symbols indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed on the suspended display portion Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display section Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d lights up the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. This is a counter used to draw a lottery as to whether or not.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. (for example, "0 to 99") is incremented by 1 in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), it returns to "0" It has become. The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is updated once (for example, 1 is added) each time the main process loops.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving a command (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the third symbol variation effect, the content of the variation effect (for example, success or failure, effect mode, variable element, etc. ), with reference to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third A lottery is drawn as to whether or not the decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 should be illuminated (see FIG. 50).

Details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. When receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time, The lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 or the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the fluctuation effect of each special symbol is divided into the case of "losing" and the case of "big win". Then, the divided groups are further divided according to the production mode, and among them, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front side light guide plate 410, or the rear side A value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d corresponding to the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the light guide plate 420 is assigned respectively.

Specifically, at the time of "losing" of the variable production, for "non-reach" production mode, for "normal reach" production mode, for "super reach" production mode, which can be selected at the time of "loss", " Special Reach" is divided into groups for production modes. In addition, at the time of the big win, they are divided into groups for a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special reach" effect mode. Then, in the divided groups, "foam" indicating the fourth decorative pattern group 413, "cherry blossom" indicating the second decorative pattern group 411, "sunfish" indicating the third decorative pattern group 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 and Possible values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with each lighting design of "cherry blossom & sunfish" indicating the third decorative design 412 and "school of fish" indicating the first decorative design group 421, respectively.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, any of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are used in the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "losing". (Hereinafter, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may be collectively referred to as "decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421." The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated only with "None", which does not light up, and "bubbles", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish", and "fish school" are associated with the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d. No value is assigned to the pattern lottery counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "non-reach" rendering mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 99" for "none". ing. Since no values are assigned to "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "school of fish", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "losing" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" in which none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 are lit and displayed is 100%. The lighting modes of "bubbles", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" are set to be selected at a percentage of 0%. .

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "losing", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is selected without exception (100%). , and other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 are set not to light up.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossom", and "sunfish" in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of "losing". No value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is assigned to "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "normal reach" rendering mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 39" for "none" and "bubbles". "40-69" for "Sakura", "70-89" for "Sunfish", and "90-99" for "Sunfish". Since no values are assigned to "Sakura & sunfish" and "school of fish", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "losing" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is 40%, the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "cherry blossoms" is 40%. 20%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the lighting mode of "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. there is

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "losing", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is likely to be selected (40%). , “foam”, “cherry blossom” or “sunfish” can also be selected.

It should be noted that the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "losing" and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "losing" described later are guided so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. The value of the light pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "cherry tree & sunfish" or "school of fish" is lit, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode (hereinafter referred to as " This is to confirm that the “super reach or higher” effect mode” is executed. Therefore, in the "non-reach" presentation mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode in which "super reach or more" does not appear, the lighting modes of "cherry tree & sunfish" and "fish school" are set so as not to be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set for "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "school of fish" for the "super reach" presentation mode when "losing". , and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "super ready-to-win" rendering mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 39" for "bubbles" and "cherry blossoms". "40 to 69", "Sunfish" to "70 to 89", "Sakura & Sunfish" to "90 to 97", and "Fish school" to "98,99". there is Since no value is assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "losing" is selected, the lighting mode of "foam" is 40%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is 30%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 20%, The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 8%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is set to be selected at a rate of 2%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 selected in the "super reach" production mode when "losing", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubbles" is likely to be selected (40%). However, "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" or "school of fish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set for "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "fish school" in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of "losing". , and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 49" for "bubbles" and "cherry blossoms". "50-79", "Sunfish" "80-94", "Sakura & Sunfish" "95-98", and "Fish school" "99". Since no value is assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "losing" is selected, the lighting mode of "foam" is 50%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is 30%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 15%, The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 4%, the lighting mode of "Fish School" is set to be selected at a rate of 1%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 selected in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of "losing", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubbles" is likely to be selected (50%). However, "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" or "school of fish" can also be selected.

Note that the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode so that the "none" lighting mode is not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, it is determined that some effect will be executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. be. As a result, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, some effect is always executed in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the effect of the "reach display" and the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate is executed. By combination with the production of 420, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable production can be compounded and suggested to the player.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossoms" and "sunfish" for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot", as in the case of "losing". , and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 to 9" for "none" and "bubbles". "10-29" for "Sakura", "30-59" for "Sunfish", and "60-99" for "Sunfish". Since no values are assigned to "Sakura & sunfish" and "school of fish", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "jackpot" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is 10%, the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 20%, and the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is 10%. 30%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. there is

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of the "jackpot", the lighting mode of the "sunfish" is likely to be selected (40%), but the lighting mode is "none". , “foam”, “cherry blossom” or “sunfish” can also be selected.

Note that the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" rendering mode at the time of "big win" so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "cherry tree & sunfish" or "school of fish" is lit, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode (hereinafter referred to as " This is to confirm that the “super reach or higher” effect mode” is executed. Therefore, even if a big win occurs, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "big win" when "super reach or more" does not appear, the lighting mode of "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "fish school" is set not to be selected. ing.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "super reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot" includes "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "fish school" in the same manner as at the time of "loss". is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and "none" is not assigned the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "super ready-to-win" effect mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0, 1" for "bubbles" and "cherry blossoms". "2 to 9", "Sunfish" to "10 to 19", "Sakura & Sunfish" to "20 to 49", and "Fish school" to "50 to 99". there is Since no value is assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "jackpot" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 2%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is 8%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 10%, It is set so that the lighting mode of "Sakura & sunfish" is selected at a rate of 30%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 50%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the "jackpot", the lighting mode of the "school of fish" is likely to be selected (50%), but the "bubbles" , ``Sakura'', ``Sunfish'', or ``Sakura&Sunfish'' can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot" includes "bubbles", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" as in the case of "loss". is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and "none" is not assigned the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 to 4" for "bubbles" and "cherry blossoms". "5 to 19", "Sunfish" to "20 to 39", "Sakura & Sunfish" to "40 to 59", and "Fish school" to "60 to 99". there is Since no value is assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 5%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is 15%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 20%, It is set so that the lighting mode of "Sakura & sunfish" is selected at a rate of 20%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the "jackpot", the lighting mode of the "school of fish" is likely to be selected (40%), but the lighting mode of the "bubbles" , ``Sakura'', ``Sunfish'', or ``Sakura&Sunfish'' can also be selected.

In this way, by combining the "ready-to-win display" effect and the effect of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable effect can be suggested to the player in a complex manner, and a plurality of By executing the variable performance in the performance device, it is possible to enrich the variation of the performance and improve the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is a counter used for lottery of lighting presence/absence and lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 in the variation effect of the third symbol.

The value of the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. (for example, "0 to 99") is incremented by 1 in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), it returns to "0" It has become. The value of the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, 1 is added) each time the main process loops.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving a command (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the third symbol variation effect, the content of the variation effect (for example, success or failure, effect mode, variable element, etc. ), the determination lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the determination lamp lighting pattern table 222f are referenced to draw lots for lighting presence/absence and lighting timing of the determination lamp 311 in the variable effect (see FIG. 49).

Details of the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. When the sound ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, when a "jackpot" occurs in the variation effect, the value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e at that time Based on this, the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 is determined by referring to the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f. In the first embodiment, when the variable performance is lost, the fixed lamp 311 is configured not to light at any timing, while when winning the jackpot in the variable performance, any timing in the variable performance. , the confirmation lamp 311 is always turned on. It should be noted that there may be a pattern in which the decision lamp 311 is not lit even when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the fluctuation effect of each special symbol is divided into the case of "losing" and the case of "big win". Then, the divided groups are further divided according to the performance mode, and among them, the timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation" during the execution of the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", "pseudo fluctuation" The timing of "reach formation to before development" during execution of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" to the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" The value of the determined ramp timing lottery counter 223e corresponding to the timing of "after development to before re-fluctuation" during execution, the timing of "re-fluctuation to finalization" during the execution of the variable element of "re-fluctuation" and the timing of "re-fluctuation to finalization" when the pattern is determined. are allocated to each.

Specifically, at the time of the big hit, the game is divided into groups for "normal reach" effect mode, "super reach" effect mode, and "special reach" effect mode. Then, in the divided groups, for each lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-fluctuation", and "re-fluctuation to confirmation" Possible values of the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other. In addition, since it is configured so that the confirmation lamp 311 cannot be lit at the time of "failure" of the variable production, for all the production modes that can be selected at the time of "failure", the lighting timing "no" are associated with all possible values of the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e.

In the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated only with "re-fluctuation ~ fixed" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big win", and the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "from start of fluctuation to end of high speed fluctuation". , ``from reach formation to before development'', and ``after development to before re-fluctuation'' are not assigned values of the determined ramp timing lottery counter 223e.

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to fixed", It has become. Since no values are assigned to "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-fluctuation", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the ``normal reach'' production mode at the time of ``jackpot'' is selected, the lighting timing of ``re-fluctuation ~ fixed'' just before the end of the variable presentation is set to be selected at a rate of 100%. , The lighting timing of ``from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation'', ``from reach formation to before development'', and ``after development to before re-fluctuation'', which is in the middle of the fluctuation production, is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. It is

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "jackpot", the lighting timing of "revariation ~ fixed" is selected without omission (100%), and in other lighting timings The confirmation lamp 311 is set so as not to light up.

In the definite lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "jackpot" includes "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end", "reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-fluctuation", and The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "re-variation to fixed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "super ready-to-win" effect mode at the time of "big win" is "0" for "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation". ~ 9", "10 ~ 29" for "reach formation ~ before development", "30 ~ 59" for "after development ~ before re-fluctuation", "60 ~ for "re-fluctuation ~ finalization" 99”.

That is, when the ``super reach'' effect mode at the time of ``jackpot'' is selected, the lighting timing of ``from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation'' is 10%, and the lighting timing of ``from reach formation to before development'' is 20%. , 30% of the lighting timing of "after development to before re-fluctuation" and 40% of the lighting timing of "re-fluctuation to fixed".

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 selected in the "super ready-to-win" production mode at the time of "jackpot", the lighting timing of "revariation ~ fixed", which is the last part of the variable production, is likely to be selected (40%). is configured so that "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", or "after development to before re-fluctuation" can also be selected.

In the definite lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of "jackpot" includes "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-fluctuation", and The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "re-variation to fixed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "special ready-to-win" effect mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 ~19", "20 ~ 39" for "Reach Formation ~ Before Development", "40 ~ 69" for "After Development ~ Before Re-Change", "70 ~ for "Re-Change ~ Confirmation" 99”.

That is, when the ``special reach'' effect mode at the time of ``jackpot'' is selected, the lighting timing of ``from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation'' is 20%, and the lighting timing of ``from reach formation to before development'' is 20%. , 30% of the lighting timing of "after development to before re-fluctuation" and 30% of the lighting timing of "re-fluctuation to fixed".

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of "jackpot", the lighting timing of "after development ~ before re-variation" or "re-variation ~ confirmation" which is the second half of the variable performance is likely to be selected (30%), but the first half of the variable performance, ``from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed variation'' or ``from reach formation to before development'', is configured to be more likely to be selected than the ``super reach'' production mode. be done.

In this way, when a big win is won in the variable performance, the determination lamp 311 is turned on at various timings to suggest to the player that a big win will occur, thereby creating a game with unexpectedness and improving the performance of the game. Interest can be improved.

A lottery for lighting the confirmation lamp 311 and a lottery for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are performed separately. For this reason, according to each lottery result, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the pattern in which the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit, the fixed lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are lit together; There is a pattern in which the second decorative design group 411, the third decorative design group 412 or the fourth decorative design group 413 are lit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily calculate the degree of expectation for a big win for each performance, and to facilitate the design of game specifications.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The first reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing the variable effect of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by.

Voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, the first special symbol variation configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223g is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second different symbol transmitted by.

Voice lamp control device 113 uses the value of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223g, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, the variation of the second special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223h is the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed on the drum display device 81, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning in the main controller 110 and reserved. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation production, in order to execute the setting of the variation production of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc., the above-described first reservation information storage Information (counters C1 to C3, CS1 etc. ) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223h.

Details of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storing area 223g, and the execution information storing area 223h will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing configurations of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storing area 223g, and the execution information storing area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223f has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223g has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223f. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223h, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 and a jackpot type counter store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. A jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. 223h4 are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol variation performance in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation performances, and is the first suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the first suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the first retention information is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol held. Further, the first area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation performance that is temporally first suspended among the suspended second special symbol variation performances, and is the second suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the second suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the second retention information is reserved. It is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol held.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the corresponding special symbol is extracted from the pending ball number command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 puts the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first hold information storage first to fourth areas or second hold information storage first to fourth areas. Jackpot random number counter storage areas 223f1 and 223g1, jackpot type counter storage areas 223f2 and 223g2, stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223f3 and 223g3, and variation type counter storage area 223f4 corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command. , 223g4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special The number of symbol fluctuation effects is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are retained at the X-th time of the suspended variable effects of the first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation performance of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the first reserved 1st area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, it is stored in the first suspension information storage area 223f or the second suspension information storage area 223g. The information obtained is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. to each of the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4. On the other hand, when there is no reserved information about the second special symbol, and only reserved information about the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the first storage area for storing the first reserved information corresponding to the variable effect of the first special symbol that is reserved for the first time are currently It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable effect being executed.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, and the second The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third pending information storage area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area 223h are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing 1 pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. 223h, the first pending information storage area 223f, and the second pending information storage area 223g.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol and the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of holding balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended among the first to fourth areas storing the first suspension information and the first to fourth areas storing the second suspension information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223f and the second reservation information storage area 223g, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223f and the second suspension information storage area 223g , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

In addition, the above-described shift processing in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g and the execution information storage area 223h is the number of pending balls (variation pattern Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c before being updated based on the reception of the command and the stop type command), the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas And the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223f (first reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas) are stored. In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, the data in the second pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage area, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage first area is transferred to the execution information storage area. 223h, the data in the second area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the first area for storing the first pending information, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas for storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information are stored in the area with the area number 1 smaller (execution information storage area 223h or It may be configured to shift to the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, controls the special pattern fluctuation effect and the continuous advance notice effect in the drum display device 81. Also, during execution of the variable performance, lighting control of various lamps 311 and the like in the lamp display device 227 is executed, and furthermore, voice output control from the voice output device 226 is executed in accordance with the progress of the variable performance. .

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 37 to 44. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 26) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raise mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device (not shown) starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off. (S111), the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. . In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 39), which will be described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to, upon receiving this setting value command, store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a memory provided in the RAM 223 for storing the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S104 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the start-up mode is the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 in order to start up in the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of RAM203 is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116, S117).

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first ball count counter 203a "0" clear, etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 38, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability set value on the probability display device (not shown) is set (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. By this setting to start displaying the probability set value, the probability display device starts to display the probability set value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device may always start displaying with a specific probability set value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or " It may be "4" or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability set values. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting values that were set before the power was turned off. Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is "3" or higher, the probability setting value is changed to "3". ”, and if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than “3”, the display starts with the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. You may do so. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, such as "5" or "6," there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to repeat turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 so as to make the probability setting value approximately one cycle. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "3", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "6", which is the maximum probability setting value. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In updating the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value so far is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value so far is "6". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is set (S130), and this setting change process is performed. (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 37), the process proceeds to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). . In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting the RAM erase switch 503 being turned on, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting the setting key 501 being turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt processing to be described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the general figure random number counter C4 that use these as the initial values for updating, It can be random.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt process described later in FIG. 44 has been executed, the power-off process from S154 onward is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processing. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203).

After S203, a normal electric power control process for executing a drive control process for the normal electric power 64c is next executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯ symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 64c is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per normal pattern are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per normal figure are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (first implementation In the form, when reaching "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". Also, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number It is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, a starting prize winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is executed (S208). The details of the starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area (not shown), and the reserved number of variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reserved lamp 84 .

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamic display of special symbols by the special symbol display device 37 and a third display by the drum display device 81 are performed based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208). A special figure variation process for setting a symbol variation pattern is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the normal pattern hit probability is either high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10). Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 .

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) executes the processing to be periodically executed, and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing to read processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

In the start winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the first start opening 64a read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40) , the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number N1 of active balls in dynamic display (variation effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize to the first starting port 64a, if the number of balls to be activated is not N1<4 (S302: No), the start prize processing (S208) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S303). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S304), and processing is performed. to S309.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S305). Here, as with the first start port 64a, the special figure 2 entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the second start port 64b, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40) ), the ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of active balls in dynamic display (variation effect) of 2 special symbols is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S306). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 64b (S305: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 64b, if the number of balls to be activated is not N2<4 (S306: No), this The starting winning process (S208) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of activated balls <4 (S306: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second retained ball number counter 203b (number of activated retained balls N2) (S307). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S308), and processing is performed. to S309.

In the process of S309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27), and are set as storage destinations in S304 or S308. Among the first holding first to fourth areas or second holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e, the first holding ball storage area 203d is If specified as a storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S309). Also, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b is the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and the stop They are reserved (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S309).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S304 based on the winning to the first starting port 64a, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S303 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S308 based on the winning to the second starting port 64b, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S307 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first retained ball number counter 203a or the second retained ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S303 or S307 (the number of activated retained balls N1 or the number of activated retained balls N2), and the first A hold ball number command containing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball count command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S310 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command in the process of S310 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S309. A read value stored (retained) in the ball storage area 203d or the second retained ball storage area 203e may be used.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S305, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b at the same time, the winning process of the ball to the first starting port 64a is preferentially executed, and the second starting port Waiting for the winning process of the ball to the opening 64b, and in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), the waiting process of winning the ball to the second starting opening 64b is executed. can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special figure variation processing (S210) is to perform dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control on variation performance performed by the drum display device 81. FIG.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S401). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the drum display device 81 and the special pattern display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening), and during the jackpot game. and during a predetermined time after the end (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S401, if any special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot (S401: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is returned to.

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S401: No), next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S402), and the special symbol is determined. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not dynamic display (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S403, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (second special It is determined whether or not the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) operation suspension ball number N2) for the symbol is greater than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated ball N2) (S405). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S410) described later, and the second This is because the number of reserved balls related to special symbols is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the second ball number counter 203b (the number of balls held in operation N2) is "0" (S404: No), then the first ball number counter 203a (actuation suspension ball number N1 of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol suspended in main controller 110) is greater than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) (S408). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the reserved first special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S410) to be described later. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S406 or S409, based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, the fluctuation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 is executed ( S410), returning to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Note that the fluctuation start processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S407, if it is determined that the value of the first ball number counter 203a (the number of balls in operation and ball N1) is "0" (S407: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the drum display device 81 or the like. It is determined whether or not the player is in the state of being in a demonstration (S411). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a or the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N1 or The period until it is determined that any value of the number of held balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S411: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114, based on the reception of the display demo command, displays a demonstration effect on the drum display device 81 and the like. is displayed.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable performance is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the drum display device 81 displays the demonstration performance.

If it is determined in the process of S411 that the demonstration is not being performed (S411: No), then a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S412 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S413 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If the (fluctuation time) has not passed (S413: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the special LED group 37b ( That is, a display mode is set in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is lit or extinguished in a predetermined lighting pattern.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S413: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S415). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S410), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S410), it is determined whether or not a big win is made according to the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409. The value of C2 determines the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, each lighting pattern corresponds to the type (type) of the jackpot. The LED group is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the drum display device 81 is synchronized with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S416), and the process proceeds to S417. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the drum display device 81 .

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and to confirm and display the stop symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

In the process of S417, it is determined whether or not the value of a time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" in order to determine whether or not it is in the "time shortening state" (S417).

In the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), it is a "time shortening state", and in that state, dynamic display (variation effect) of any special symbol is performed once. Since it ended, the value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (S418), this special figure fluctuation processing (S210) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S417: No), it is not the "time reduction state" but the "normal game state" or the "probability fluctuation state", so the processing of S418 , to end this special figure variation process (S210) and return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation start process (S410), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S410). In this fluctuation start process (S410), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, a lottery (jackpot lottery) for a big hit or a loss is performed according to the game state, and special symbols are drawn. A dynamic display and a dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the drum display device 81 are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the "probability fluctuation state" (S501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is not the "probability fluctuation state" (S501: No), the game state is the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 28(a)) for the low probability state is set (S502), and the process proceeds to S504. On the other hand, if it is determined to be in the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503), The process proceeds to S504.

In the process of S504, a jackpot lottery (whether judgment ) processing is performed (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the set probability value. and the occasional game state (mode). As described above, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low-probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number is defined so that a value of "1" is 50/10000 and a set value of "6" is 60/10000. Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to 500/10000 with the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "6" is 600/10000.

In the process of S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that As a result of the process of S504, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S504: Yes), then the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 28(b)) and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f The display mode at the time of the big win is set based on the value of (S505).

In this process, after the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot "10R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" where the pattern becomes a high probability state and the winning auxiliary function continues, or after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot. ``5R probability variable jackpot'' in which the winning assistance function continues with the ``10R normal It is determined whether it is a big hit. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e is determined by the held ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) of , and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, A jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot A jackpot type is determined based on the type table 202b.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S506), and the process proceeds to S509. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, the effect is produced based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A mode is selected, and a dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from among the selected performance modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Specifically, in the process of S457, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big hit, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f to select. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S504 that it is not a big hit (S504: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S507). In the processing of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. 203a or (and) the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the drum display device 81 include a "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal )” effect mode, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time reduction state", a stop pattern corresponding to each effect mode The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value ranges of the selection counter C3 are different.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S508), and the process proceeds to S509. In the process of S508, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S507, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the number of man-hours required for development can be reduced.

In the processing of S509, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S506 and S508, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S509). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is a "10R probability variable jackpot", and the "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot " A variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "10R probability variable jackpot" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the variation pattern of ``25 seconds'' and ``super reach'' is selected, a variation pattern command indicating loss and ``25 seconds'' of ``super reach'' is set. .

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in more detail based on the information.

In addition, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S505 or S507 is set (S510), and special figure variation processing (see FIG. 42 ).

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "10R probability variable jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol etc.) is not specified, A stop type command indicating "10R probability variable jackpot" is set. In addition, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "10R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot" is specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol, etc.). Set a stop type command that indicates that

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is in the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ” Set a stop type command indicating that the mode is the rendering mode. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode.

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the result of stopping the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these A command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 .

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 45) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 45, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 46) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Further, in the process of S1002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S1002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after a momentary power failure and during execution of the power-off process of S1116. Then, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . It should be noted that the sound output device 226 may output sound to inform the RAM 223 of an abnormality, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the drum display device 81 or the like to display an error message. may

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 46). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a set value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the RAM 223, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp controller 113, the main processing (see FIG. 46) is started until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 37) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

In the process of S1012, a process of waiting until a set value command is received from the main controller 110 is performed. is powered off and the main controller 110 continues to be powered on, the audio lamp controller 113 may repeatedly execute the processing of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, if no set value command is received from the main controller 110 for a predetermined period of time, the sound lamp control device 113 does not execute control related to the set value and starts other controls in a safe mode. may be configured to launch

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , S1102 to S1109 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1110. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable effect processing of S1110 This is because the command determination processing in step S1111 is preferable to be executed in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the process of S1111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short period, the command determination process Based on the command received by, the setting regarding the variable effect can be performed without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 45, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81 . It should be noted that if it is not at the time of power-on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing a jackpot-related effect set by the command determination process of S1111, which will be described later, is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the period of the "high-speed change" variable element, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set a stage change command for the device 114 . By including information about the presentation mode corresponding to the stage after the change in the stage change command, the display control device 114 performs processing for changing the presentation mode according to the stage executed by the drum display device 81.例文帳に追加In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable production, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display", the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be changed to a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the decorative parts 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, or the lighting process of the confirmation lamp 311 are changed so as to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81. etc. is set. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the drum display device 81 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also performed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed on the drum display device 81. executed.

In the process of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the drum display device 81, a variable effect process, which is a process for starting a variable effect based on the change pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, is executed. do. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation effect process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters such as the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are each incremented by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (in this embodiment, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are 223e are both cleared to "0" when they reach "99").

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d updated here is used to select whether or not to execute the effect (lighting) on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 during the variable effect, and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e It is used to select whether or not the fixed lamp 311 is lit (lighting timing) during the variable effect.

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is broken and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the drum display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later, a display variation pattern for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type to the display control device 114. Used to set commands. After that, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when setting a display stop type command for notifying the stop type of the variable effect to the display control device 114 in the variable effect process (see FIG. 48) to be described later. used for After that, the variable start flag 223a indicating the start of the variable effect is set to ON (S1206), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1206, in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 48) to be executed later, extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance received matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the variable effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command matches the variable effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation production, if the variation pattern based on the number of pending balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of pending balls command If it does not match the stop type based on the above, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

As a result of the process of S1204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the drum display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), the display confirmation command is set (S1208), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). .

The display fixed pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 46). be. The display control device 114 performs display control so that the variable display of the third pattern is definitely displayed on the drum display device 81 at the fixed timing indicated by the display fixed pattern command.

As a result of the process of S1207, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received (S1209). Then, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the first pending ball number counter 203a and/or the second pending ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command ( (See FIG. 26) value (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol fluctuation effect reserved in the main controller 110) is extracted, and this is the sub-th of the voice lamp control device 113. Stored in the 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (S1210). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are also included in the reserved ball number command, are updated in S1210 to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. Or the first pending information storage first to fourth areas of the first pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub-second pending ball number counter 223c, or the second pending information storage first of the second pending information storage area 223g to the fourth area (S1211), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), so every time there is a starting winning , S1212, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 or the second It can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the sub-first ball counter 223b and/or the second ball counter 223c Or even if it deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. , the values of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a and/or the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. there is That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various effects can be determined.

As a result of the process of S1209, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S1209: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1212), and this command determination process (S1111) ends. and return to the main process (see FIG. 46). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1212, and after being temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, is output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110). This variable effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46), and various processes for causing the drum display device 81 to execute the variable effect are executed.

In the fluctuation effect process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect The process (S1110) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation production. (S1402), then, it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed this time relates to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of determination, if it is a variable effect related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data contained in the first reserved information storage first area provided in the first reserved information storage area 223f is transferred to the execution information storage area 223h. (S1404), and further, the data contained in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223f are shifted to the first pending information storage first to third areas. (S1405), 1 is subtracted from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information first area corresponding to the variable effect that has been executed are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable effect being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. The to fourth areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the first to fourth areas in the first to fourth area 203d of the main controller 110. become.

On the other hand, in the process of S1403, if it is determined that it is not a variation effect related to the first special symbol, that is, if it is determined that it is a variation effect related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second reservation information storage area 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407). -The data contained in the fourth area is shifted to the second reserved information storage first to third areas (S1408), the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. Transition.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable performance being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. In the ~4th area, the same values as those of the counters C1~C3, CS1 stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 are stored. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired (S1410). After that, in order to display the variation effect on the drum display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 47). be. The display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation effect so that the drum display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the variable performance to be executed from now on is obtained (S1412). After that, based on the acquired stop type of the variable effect, a stop type command for display is set (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 47). be. The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1411 is to be displayed. do.

In the process of S1414, whether or not to light the fixed lamp 311 and the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 is set in the variable effect executed this time is performed (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415. The determination lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1415, in the variable effect executed this time, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern of the rear light guide plate 420 A light guide pattern setting process for setting whether or not to light the group 421 is performed (S1415), after which the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the fixed lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414). This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable effect to be executed from now on. It is determined whether or not the decision lamp 311 should be turned on at any timing of the variable effect.

In the determination lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit will occur based on the variable effect stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot does not occur (S1501: No), the determination lamp 311 is not lit, the determination lamp lighting setting processing (S1414) is terminated, and the variable effect processing (see FIG. 48) is entered. return.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that a big win will occur (S1501: Yes), the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see FIG. 35) is referred to according to the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, and the The lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 in the variable effect to be executed is set (S1502), and the process proceeds to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" occurs based on the jackpot won this time (S1503). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" occurs (S1503: Yes), the lighting time of the determination lamp 311 is long at the lighting timing of the determination lamp 311 set in the processing of S1502 (for example, " 10 seconds") Set to be performed in a long lighting pattern (S1504), terminate this fixed lamp lighting setting process (S1414), and return to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur based on the jackpot won this time, that is, if the jackpot that causes the "time reduction state" is won (S1503: No ), in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502, a short lighting pattern in which the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 is short (for example, “2 seconds”) is set (S1505), and this confirmation lamp is lit. The setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

In addition, if the lighting time of the fixed lamp 311 set in the process of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the variable time of the variable effect being executed, for example, when the variable effect is confirmed, the long lighting pattern is started to be executed. In such a case, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the variable effect is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be advanced from the originally set timing (for example, "10 seconds" from the confirmation) It may be configured to start from the "previous" timing). Furthermore, even when winning the "probability fluctuation state", the short lighting pattern may be lit.

In this way, when a big win is won in a variable performance, a game with unexpectedness is provided by being able to suggest to the player that a big win will occur by the confirmation lamp 311 at various timings of the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by changing the lighting time of the decision lamp 311 according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations and favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48), and determines whether or not each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. Various processing for determination is executed, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, processing for changing the lighting region of the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed.

In the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), first, in the variation effect to be executed from now on, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the It is determined whether or not the lottery for execution of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 has been won (S1601). This determination is made by referring to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d. lottery.

In the process of S1601, the execution lottery for the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is not won. (S1601: No), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if the execution lottery for the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is won ( S1601: Yes), next, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be lit are determined (S1602).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the bubble group pattern that is the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "bubble"), "reach display" is formed in the variable effect. (that is, at the end of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" and at the start of the variable element of "normal reach"; the same applies hereinafter), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are set to "blue" (S1603), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the falling cherry blossom pattern, which is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected for lighting (S1602: "cherry blossom"), "reach display" is formed in the variable effect. At the timing, the front lower LEDs 414c at the right end and the left end of the front lower LEDs 414c are set to light up in "pink" (S1604), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variation effect process (See FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the sunfish pattern, which is the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected for lighting (S1602: "sunfish"), the timing at which the "ready-to-win display" is formed in the variable effect. Then, among the lower front LEDs 414c, the lower front LEDs 414c other than the right end and the left end are set to light up in "green" (S1605), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variation effect process ( 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the falling cherry blossom pattern that is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the sunfish pattern that is the third decorative pattern group 412 of the front light guide plate 410 are selected for lighting (S1602: "Sunfish & "Sakura"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect, the front lower LEDs 414c at the right end and the left end of the front lower LEDs 414c are lit in "pink", and the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right end and the left end are lit. The LED 414c is set to be lit in "green" (S1606), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if a school of fish pattern that is the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is selected for lighting (S1602: "school of fish"), first, at the start of the "reach display", That is, it is determined whether or not the determination lamp 311 is turned on during reach formation (S1607). This determination is made during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the lighting timing and lighting time of the fixed lamp 311 set in S1502, S1504 and S1505 of the fixed lamp lighting setting process (see FIG. 49) have arrived (overlapping). This is done by determining whether or not As a result of determination, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 does not light up during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 at the time of ready-to-win formation (S1607: No), at the timing when "read-to-win display" is formed in the variable effect, The rear upper LEDs 422c and the rear lower LEDs 424 are arranged in the order of the right area→center area→left area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each area are arranged from the right side. The light is set to be lit in red, blue, and green (S1608), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of formation of ready-to-win (S1607: Yes), the timing at which "read-to-win display" is formed in the variable effect In the state where the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, only the rear lower LEDs 424 are arranged in the order of the right area → the central area → the left area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 424 provided for each area are set to light up in "red", "blue", and "green" from the right side, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are respectively set to the rear The three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each area are set to light up in the order of right area→central area→left area of the side light guide plate 420 in order of "red", "blue", and "green" from the right side. Then (S1609), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation rendering process (see FIG. 48).

In this way, during the execution of the variable performance executed by the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81 are used to perform the variable performance. By executing the jackpot expectation degree suggesting performance, a variety of performances can be executed, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased. In addition, in the drum display device 81, which is different from the liquid crystal display device capable of easily performing additional notice effects, etc., the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 perform the notice display on the front side thereof. Even in the case of using the drum display device 81 in which it is difficult to display such an advance notice, it is possible to increase the attention of the game by enriching the performance contents of the variable performance. Furthermore, during the execution of the fixed lamp 311 having the highest importance in the variable performance, the scale of the production by the first decorative pattern group 421 having a lower game importance than the fixed lamp 311 is reduced and executed, and the important fixed as the game is executed. It is configured so that the performance by the lamp 311 is conspicuous. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compartmentalize the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

<A: Multiple display parts are displayed by lighting one LED with a diffuser lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (the same applies to the rear upper diffusion lens 423) includes the left diffusion portion 425a and the front diffusion portion 425b. and one concave portion formed by the right diffusion portion 425c is provided in a plurality corresponding to the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424 at least. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear lower LED 424 is diffused in three directions inside the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of concave portions of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (that is, the front direction and the front direction). and the direction inclined 20 degrees to the left and the direction inclined 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). In addition, since the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c have the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same. Configured. As a result, by lighting one LED, the plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to the respective optical paths to be diffused can be caused to emit light in the same color. By executing an effect, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

<B: Arrangement of patterns on the optical path, arrangement of patterns in areas where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes a portion (“dark red”) where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “red” light overlap and are displayed, ” light path (“pale red”), ”red” light path and “blue” light path overlap (“purple”), ”red ” and “green” light paths overlap (“yellow”), “red” light paths, “blue” light paths, and “green” light paths The portion where the optical path overlaps (“white”), the portion where the optical path of “blue” light and the optical path of “blue” overlap (“dark blue”), and “blue” The part displayed only by the optical path of light ("light blue"), the part displayed by overlapping the optical path of "blue" light and the optical path of "green" light ("blue-green"), "green ” and the optical path of the “green” light overlap (“dark green”), and the portion is displayed only by the optical path of the “green” light (“light green”). Each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even in a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the diffused lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below diffuse the light, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap. To make different luminescent colors occurring in a non-overlapping part and an overlapping part, and to display more colors than the color arrangement. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be simplified and the control load on the light emission control of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, when a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes are arranged without adopting full-color LEDs and the above control is performed, cost reduction can be realized by adopting single-color light-emitting diodes that are less expensive than full-color LEDs. This further simplifies the light emission control of the LEDs, and reduces the control burden on the light emission control of the LEDs.

In addition, one pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged so that it overlaps the optical path of light of one color in a predetermined portion, and overlaps the optical path of light of another color in portions other than the predetermined portion. to be placed. That is, by forming one pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 so as to fit within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, the one pattern is made to have different luminescent colors in each part, and the one pattern is colorful. can be expressed in different colors.

<C: Sequential lighting of different LEDs for each horizontal division area, moving display & colorful display>
Of the rear upper LEDs 422c and the rear lower LEDs 424 that are arranged three each in the right region, the central region, and the left region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and From the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, and the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located on the left side are sequentially turned on in this order to form the first decoration. An effect is executed as if the school of fish, which is the symbol group 421, swims from the right side to the left side.

In addition, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are turned on the right side so as to interlock with the lighting of the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By lighting sequentially from , the performance on the rear side light guide plate 420 and the performance on the board surface of the game board 13 are integrally executed to provide a powerful performance using the entire board surface of the game board 13 to improve the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is expressed with priority over the other (reduction lighting method of the fish school display area when the confirmation lamp is lit)>
When the performance by the fixed lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed, and the performance by the fixed lamp 311, which is important as a game, is conspicuous. . Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view) is turned off or dimly lit, so that the first decoration The effect of the pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important as a game. Moreover, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

<E: One light guide plate for low and medium notices, another light guide plate for high notices>
When a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable performance are configured to be executable, the effect with a low degree of expectation for the big win (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) is set to 1. (i.e., the front side light guide plate 410) are collectively provided, while the production with high expectation for the big win (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on another light guide plate (i.e., the rear side light guide plate 420). Thus, when the performance with low expectation for big win is executed, lighting display of the performance with high expectation for big win is suppressed due to noise, viewing angle, etc. to the player, and performance without discrepancy is executed. be able to.

<F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multidirectional area ( Two directions, bubble group), strong effect in few directions (weak effect in places where the light paths overlap)>
In the front light guide plate 410, the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) is the fourth decorative pattern group with the lowest expected big hit. 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only with lateral light. In addition, in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R shape portion and the upper reverse R shape portion), the second A decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed, and are configured so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 can be visually recognized only with vertical light. Here, even if the light in the vertical direction makes the fourth decorative pattern group 413 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the light in the vertical direction hits more than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is lit when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 with high expectation is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed. Even if the 4 decorative pattern group 413 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit in the portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction overlap, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may appear at an unintended timing. Even if it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the inconsistency in presentation and provide a game without discomfort to the player.

<G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multidirectional area ( 2 directions, bubble group), small direction in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
In the first embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is lowest in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) in the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed, and is configured to be visible only with lateral light. Further, in the front light guide plate 410, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 has a big hit expectation in a portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are formed so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with light in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a rear light guide plate 420 is provided on the rear side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A first decorative pattern group 421 is formed, and a drum display device 81 for executing a third pattern variable effect, which is the main effect of the game, is arranged. In this way, in the portion where the optical path of light in the vertical direction and the optical path of light in the horizontal direction do not overlap in the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), the main effect of the game is provided. By arranging a drum display device 81 for executing a three-pattern variation performance and configuring it so as to be able to display a first decorative pattern group 421, which is a performance with the highest degree of expectation for a big win in the variation performance, the variation performance important as a game is achieved. While not inhibiting the display result and the performance with high expectation of big win, the performance effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 and the drum display device 81 are respectively enhanced, thereby increasing the attention to the game. can.

<H: One light guide plate with a planar shape and an R shape, light is guided from the planar portion in both shapes (light is not guided from the R-shaped portion)>
In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light-guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end surface (portion) of the flat plate portion of one of the light guide plates 410 and 420. It is constructed so as to prevent light from entering from the R-shaped portion (that is, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the R-shaped portion, and there is a risk that the desired pattern cannot or cannot be lit appropriately. In addition, the LED or the like must be arranged along the shape of the end surface of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the R-shaped portion is formed along the external shape of the production member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable accessory, and when an LED board or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the design of the production member There is a risk of restricting the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having an R-shaped portion, by allowing light to enter from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions, the above problem can be solved favorably and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased. can be done.

<I: R shape / reverse R shape, display 1 advance notice until the switching point (design display area determination part), do not place a pattern at the part where the R shape switches>
In the front light guide plate 410, decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion. None of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the switching point (region) with the shape portion. This is because, when a decorative design for light guide display is arranged at a switching point (region) between the downward reverse R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion, the portion arranged in the regular R-shaped portion and the downward reverse R-shaped portion are arranged. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to appropriately reach these parts, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, there is a risk that the parts may look unintended. Therefore, by arranging none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 at the switching points (regions) between the lower reverse R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the expression of the pattern to be light-guided and displayed can be improved. Appropriate and consistent performance can be executed.

<J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong warning light guide plate (Sunfish/bubble light guide plate, slit portion of display area forming member)>
By arranging the lens cut 432 between the fixed lamp 311 and the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in the vertical direction, the incident light is diffused by the lens cut 432. can cause (weaken) Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to lighting of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is directed to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing incident light, abnormal lighting of each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the front side light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421 with the highest reliability (expectation) of the big hit, the light enters from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the light from entering the rear light guide plate 420 . Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 can be diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby preventing an accidental It is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, which causes a large effect inconsistency when lit up. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.例文帳に追加

<K: 1 light guide plate with strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for weak areas is highly anisotropic (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). The light incident from the first end surfaces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end surfaces in a straight (or substantially straight, upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is condensed without being diffusely emitted from the second end faces formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Therefore, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be lit are lit, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are not lit, and the decorations to be lit are not lit. Only the patterns 411, 412, and 413 can be properly illuminated. In particular, when attempting to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest reliability for big wins, the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and having higher reliability for big wins than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Alternatively, if the third decorative pattern 412 lights up, there is a possibility that the content of the effect will be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed at appropriate timing by constructing so that at least the light for the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a low degree of expectation for big win is not diffused by the condensing lenses 415d and 416d. It is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies in the contents of the production to occur.

<L: 1 light guide plate with intensity effect, at least for strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, 3-direction lens)>
For the decorative pattern group with high expectation for big hit, that is, the third decorative pattern 412, etc., a diffusing lens used for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 is adopted instead of the condensing lens. You may The third decorative pattern 412 is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and is positioned in front of the drum display device 81 that the player pays attention to during the game. It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the third decorative pattern 412 by irradiating light comprehensively on the three decorative patterns 412 by means of a diffuser lens. Further, when lighting the fourth decorative pattern group 413, if the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, is lit, the effect will be inconsistent. 412, even if a fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a lower degree of expectation for big win than the third decorative pattern 412 is lit, the player should still prefer to execute the third decorative pattern 412 with a higher degree of expectation for big win. , and not much attention is paid to the execution of the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, by adopting condensing lenses 415d and 416d for the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, and by adopting a diffusion lens for the third decorative pattern 412 with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the front side The performance effect of the light guide plate 410 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be enhanced.

<M: Multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusion means>
In the case where a plurality of light guide plates 410, 420 are used to enable a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big win in a variable effect, one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410) is provided with condensing lenses 414d, 415d, By utilizing 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be individually executed, and other light guide plates ( That is, by adopting diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in various expressions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect equal to or greater than the number of the plurality of light guide plates 410, 420, and by executing a flashy effect in the light guide plate adopting the diffuser lenses 423, 425, variation of the effect is obtained. can be enriched and attention to the game can be increased.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 are formed into a plurality of R-shaped portions (that is, a downward reverse R shape) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. from the side (upper, lower, right or left) end face of the flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 It is configured to irradiate light to display the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 and 421 by lighting.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440 , the second rear light guide plate 450 and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . Further, from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower portion of the second front light guide plate 440, the second front lower LED 441 emits light toward the second front light guide plate 440. light. Further, from the lower end surface of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower portion of the second rear light guide plate 450, the second rear lower LEDs are used to guide the second rear side guide plate 450a. It is configured to irradiate the light plate 450 with light.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. 55, for convenience of explanation, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, the second display area forming member 460, and the drum display device 81 that constitute the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment are shown. It is expressed by enlarging the interval.

As shown in FIG. 55, the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the second display area forming member 460, the second It is composed of two front light guide plates 440 and a second rear light guide plate 450 .

Like the display area forming member 430, the second display area forming member 460 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate), and is arranged on the rear side of the light guide unit 400 on the pachinko machine 10 side of the drum display device 81. It is formed in a flat plate shape different from (irrelevant to) the outer peripheral shape. The second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 assembled to the light guide unit 400 are also formed in a different shape. In addition, the second display area forming member 460 is arranged so that three symbols can be visually recognized on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. 4) of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Two central openings 461 are formed. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is applied to the periphery of the second central opening 461, and it is configured to make the rear side of the second lens cut 462 invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. there is Therefore, the pattern display area and the effective line on the drum display device 81 are clearly indicated to the player by the second lens cut 462 on the periphery of the second central opening 461 . Also, from the second central opening 461, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 It is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Furthermore, from the lower part of the second lens cut 462 on the lower side, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear side provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 A lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Like the front light guide plate 410 , the second front light guide plate 440 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . A second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a having a shape opposite to the shape (that is, an R shape opposite to the R shape that is the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and a continuous portion from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. and a second front-side upper flat plate portion 440b that is shaped like the second display area forming member 460. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the second front light guide plate 440 includes the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the second front light guide plate 440 and part of the second rear light guide plate 450 as the second display area forming member. It is configured to be visible from the second central opening 461 of 460 .

Further, on the back side of the second front light guide plate 440 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), lens cuts of various uneven shapes corresponding to the second front upper decorative pattern 442 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 are applied. By turning on the second front lower LED 441 arranged below the second front light guide plate 440 in front view, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is turned on. is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a second front upper LED (not shown) arranged on the side of the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front is turned on. As a result, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 formed on the back side of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, a condensing lens is arranged to condense the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiate the end surface of the second front light guide plate 440. good too.

Here, the lens cut (concavo-convex shape) forming the second front upper decorative pattern 442 directs the light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second front upper LED (not shown) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It has a shape that can reflect, and is configured in a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the upper direction in front view from the second front lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second front lower decorative pattern 443 reflects the light incident from the front view upper direction (vertical up and down direction) by the second front lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It is a shape (for example, a lateral groove) that does not or is difficult to reflect light incident from the side direction of the front view from the second front upper LED (not shown) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It is With this configuration, when the decorative patterns 442 and 443 of the second front light guide plate 440 are to be appropriately lit, the direction of the light guided into the second front light guide plate 440 (incident direction) is On the other hand, by configuring the decorative patterns 442 and 443 that can be lit and displayed to be different, a plurality of decorative patterns 442 and 443 can be individually lit and displayed on one second front light guide plate 440, and one light guide plate 440 can be lit and displayed. The power of expression on the light plate 440 can be improved, and attention to the game can be increased.

A second front lower decorative pattern 443 is arranged on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is lit and displayed. The light emitting surface of the LED 441 is arranged to face the lower end face of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Since the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is formed in an R shape, when the light guided through the second front light guide plate 440 is weak, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is properly lit. It may not be done. Therefore, in order to appropriately light up and display the second front lower decorative pattern 443 arranged on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, the end face far from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (that is, , the upper end surface of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b), but the end surface near the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, that is, from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a to the second front side Light is guided to the second front lower decorative pattern 443 by the lower LED 441 . By configuring in this way, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 can be accurately lit and displayed, and attention to the game can be increased.

Like the rear light guide plate 420 , the second rear light guide plate 450 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and has a shape different from the peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . from the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a having a shape corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of (that is, an R shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a A second rear upper flat plate portion 450b is continuously formed and has a shape along the second display area forming member 460 (second front upper flat plate portion 440b).

In addition, the second rear light guide plate 450 allows a part of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to the second central opening of the second display area forming member 460 . 461 is configured to be visible.

Further, on the back side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (that is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10), various concave-convex shaped lenses corresponding to the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are provided. By turning on the second rear lower LED 451 which is cut and arranged below the second rear light guide plate 450 in front view, the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a formed on the back side of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a is turned on. 2 The rear lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is arranged on the side of the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front. By turning on an LED (not shown), the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 formed on the back side of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Configured. In addition, a condensing lens for condensing the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiating the end face of the second rear light guide plate 450 is arranged. may be configured.

Here, the lens cut (concavo-convex shape) that forms the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 cuts light from the second rear upper LED (not shown), which is incident from the horizontal direction in front view, to the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is a shape that can be reflected to the side, and is configured with a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not or is difficult to reflect the light incident from the upper direction in the front view of the second rear lower LED 451 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 ing. In addition, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 cuts the light incident from the front view upper direction (vertical up and down direction) by the second rear lower LED 451 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It is a shape that can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, or a shape that is difficult to reflect light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second rear upper LED (not shown) (for example, a lateral groove ). With this configuration, when the decorative patterns 452 and 453 of the second rear light guide plate 450 are desired to be lit appropriately, the direction of light guided into the second rear light guide plate 450 (incident direction) ) so that the decorative patterns 452 and 453 that can be lit and displayed are different, the plurality of decorative patterns 452 and 453 can be individually lit and displayed on one second rear light guide plate 450, The power of expression in the light guide plate 450 of 1 can be improved, and attention to the game can be increased.

A second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is arranged on the back side of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is lit and displayed. The light emitting surface of the second rear lower LED 451 is arranged to face the lower end surface of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Since the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a is formed in an R shape, when the light guided through the second rear light guide plate 450 is weak, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 lights up. may not be performed properly. Therefore, in order to appropriately light up and display the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 arranged on the back side of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a should be placed far away from the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Instead of the end face (that is, the upper end face of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b), the end face near the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, that is, the lower part of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Light is guided to the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 from the side end face by the second rear lower LED 451 . By configuring in this way, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed accurately, and attention to the game can be increased.

Further, the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are bent in directions away from each other. A predetermined space is formed. By configuring in this way, even when the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are lit at the same time, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 by the predetermined space can be illuminated at the same time. By forming a predetermined gap between the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed so as to be mutually recognizable. A performance with a three-dimensional effect can be executed by the second front side lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear side lower decorative pattern 453. - 特許庁

In addition, in order to light the second front lower decorative pattern 443 on the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter, the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is extended with a second By arranging the two front lower LEDs 441, it is not necessary to arrange the lighting LEDs on the extension of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b of the second front light guide plate 440, so the restrictions on the arrangement of the LEDs are relaxed. , and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Third Embodiment> Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is guided (irradiated) into the front light guide plate 410 through the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d. ), the light from each of the LEDs 422c and 424 is guided (irradiated) into the rear light guide plate 420 via the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 to the rear light guide plate 420, and the light guide plates 410 and 420 of the one light guide plate 410 and 420 The same type of lens was used for On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a diffuser lens 473 and condensing lenses 475b and 476b are used together for one third light guide plate 470 formed in a shape along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. .

Specifically, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 equivalent (or identical) to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470. At the same time, on the back side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower reverse R-shaped portion 470b of the third light guide plate 470, a third lower portion equivalent (or identical) to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the first embodiment A decorative pattern group 474 is formed. In order to light up and display the third upper decorative pattern group 471 , the light from the third upper LED 472 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 via the third upper diffusion lens 473 . In order to light up and display the third lower decorative pattern group 474, the light from the third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is emitted through the third right condenser lens 475b. While irradiating the third light guide plate 470, the light from the third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 through the third left condenser lens 476b. configured to The relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group 471 and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 in the third embodiment is better when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is illuminated, as in the first embodiment. It is set as an effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is lit and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 shows the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third upper LED 472, and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment. Schematic showing the positional relationship between the right LED unit 475 and the third right LED 475a, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third left LED 476a of the third left LED unit 476. It is a front view. In FIG. 56, the third upper LED 472, the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a, the third upper diffuser lens 473, the third right condensing lens 465b and the third left For convenience of explanation, the condenser lens 476b is represented schematically.

As shown in FIG. 56, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 is formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 as a school of fish pattern which is a pattern imitating a school of fish of a plurality of types. The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471 cuts the light, which is guided to the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and enters the pachinko machine in the vertical direction and the oblique direction. 10. Light emitted or easily emitted forward and incident from other directions (for example, lateral direction) is cut to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by an uneven lens cut corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. It is configured so that it is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted. Therefore, the light diffused downward or obliquely from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third upper decoration pattern group 471 to emit light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and become visible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of recesses are formed on the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 in front view by the plurality of third upper LEDs 472 provided above the third light guide plate 470 in front view. When the third upward diffusion lens 473 is irradiated with light, the light is diffused from each diffusion lens 473 in a plurality of directions (three directions of left, center, and right in the third embodiment). It is configured. The third upper diffuser lens 473 has the same configuration as the rear lower diffuser lens 425 in the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, nine third upper LEDs 472 are provided, and one of the third upper diffusion lenses 473 is provided so as to correspond to one third upper LED 472. recesses are arranged. In addition, in the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470, the rightward diffusion portion or the leftward diffusion portion is not formed, and the frontward diffusion portion and the leftward diffusion portion, or , the front-direction diffusion portion and the right-direction diffusion portion form the third upward diffusion lens 473 . By configuring in this way, the light is not diffused in the direction in which the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is not arranged, and the light emitted by the third upper LED 472 is emitted to the third light guide plate 470 without waste. be able to.

Then, the light emitted from the third upper LED 472 to the front direction diffusion portion (not shown) of the concave portion of the third upper diffuser lens 473 downward (lower side in the drawing) is emitted by 1 Light is emitted leftward or rightward from the adjacent third upper LED 472 through a leftward diffuser (not shown) or a rightward diffuser (not shown) of one recess in the third upper diffuser lens 473 . It is configured to overlap with the (diffused) light at the intersections of the respective optical paths. In addition, the light emitted from one third upward LED 472 to the downward direction in front view through the leftward diffusion portion or the rightward diffusion portion of one concave portion in the third upward diffusion lens 473 is emitted from the third upward LED 472 to the adjacent third LED 472 . A portion where the light irradiated (diffused) rightward or leftward from the upward LED 472 via the rightward or leftward diffusion portion of the concave portion of the third upward diffusion lens 473 intersects with each optical path. configured to overlap with

Specifically, for example, the LEDs of the third upper LED 472 are sequentially arranged from the right side to be “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”. , and green, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upward LED 472 diffuses the red light along an optical path of a predetermined width, From the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right (that is, the eighth LED from the left) of the third upper LED 472, the “blue” light is diffused along an optical path of a predetermined width, From the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the LED 3rd from the right of the LED 472 (that is, the 7th from the left), the "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and is diffused from the right of the third upper LED 472. From the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth (i.e., sixth from the left) LED, the "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and is diffused into the third upward LED 472 (i.e., the fifth from the right) (i.e., , fifth from the left, center) diffuses the “blue” light through an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the LED 472, and the sixth from the right of the third upper LED 472 (that is, From the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the LED 472 (fourth from the left), the "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upper LED 472 is the seventh from the right (that is, the third from the left). ), the “red” light is diffused along an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the LED of ), and is emitted to the eighth LED from the right (that is, the second from the left) of the third upper LED 472 From the corresponding third upper diffuser lens 473, the "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upper LED 472 corresponding to the ninth from the right (that is, the leftmost) LED The diffusing lens 473 diffuses the “green” light along an optical path with a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 includes at least a portion (“red”) displayed only by the optical path of “red” light, The portion where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “blue” light overlap (“purple”), and the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “green” light overlap. The part that is displayed ("yellow"), the part that is displayed only by the optical path of "blue" light ("blue"), and the optical path of "blue" light and the optical path of "green" light overlap and are displayed. Each fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is displayed in a total of 6 different display colors, including a portion ("blue-green") that is displayed and a portion ("green") that is displayed only by the optical path of "green" light. displayed respectively. Then, one fish pattern of the third upper decoration pattern group 471 is arranged on each optical path or each overlapping portion.

As a result, even in a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the third upper diffuser lens 473, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap with each other. The luminescence colors occurring in overlapping portions are made different, and more colors than the color scheme can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be simplified and the control load on the light emission control of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, when a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes are arranged without adopting full-color LEDs and the above control is performed, cost reduction can be realized by adopting single-color light-emitting diodes that are less expensive than full-color LEDs. This further simplifies the light emission control of the LEDs, and reduces the control burden on the light emission control of the LEDs.

Further, for one fish pattern of the third upper decoration pattern group 471, the predetermined portion is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of one color, and the portion other than the predetermined portion overlaps the optical path of the light of the other color. Place them so that they overlap. That is, by forming one fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 so as to fit within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, each part of the one fish pattern is made to emit light in a different color, thereby forming the third upper decorative pattern group 471. One fish pattern in the upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in various colors.

Note that, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, among the third upper LEDs 472 arranged three each in the right region, the central region, and the left region of the third light guide plate 470, the rightmost LED 472 The third upper LED 472 located in the center, the third upper LED 472 located in the center, and the third upper LED 472 located in the left side are sequentially turned on in this order, so that the school of fish that is the third upper decorative pattern group 471 appears as if An effect as if swimming from the right side to the left side is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, on the third light guide plate 470, a third lower decorative pattern group 474 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles is formed on the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower reverse R shape. It is formed over the entire area of the portion 470b. The third lower decorative pattern group 474 is arranged at least in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b at a position (avoided position) that does not overlap the optical path of the light diffused from the above-described third upper diffuser lens 473. Therefore, even when the third upper LED 472 is illuminated, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is difficult to be illuminated.

In addition, by the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470, the light is arranged on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 in front view. When the right end surface of the third right condensing lens 475b provided is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the left end surface of the third right condensing lens 475b and is straight (leftward direction). ) is configured to proceed. Furthermore, a third left LED 476a provided on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 in front view turns on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 in front view. When the left end face of the third left light collecting lens 476b disposed in the direction of light is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused and is straight from the right end face of the third left light collecting lens 476b ( to the right).

The positions of the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are such that one third right LED 475a and one third left LED 476a are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). are arranged as

The concave-convex lens cut (longitudinal groove) corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474 makes it possible for the light guided to the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower reverse R-shaped portion 470b to enter in the horizontal direction. The emitted light is emitted or easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the incident light from other directions (for example, the vertical direction or the oblique direction) is cut by a concave-convex shaped lens cut corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474. It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 or is hardly emitted. Therefore, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident in the horizontal direction from the left end surface and/or the right end surface of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470. visible.

Here, as described above, in the third light guide plate 470, the decorative pattern groups 471 and 474 are provided in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, or the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower reverse R-shaped portion 470b. are arranged, but at the switching point P between the third lower reverse R-shaped portion 470b and the third positive R-shaped portion 470c, any of the decorative pattern groups 471, 474 is also configured not to be arranged. This is because, when a decorative pattern for light guide display is arranged at the switching point P between the third downward reverse R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, the part arranged in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and the third 3 It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 to appropriately reach the portion arranged in the downward reverse R-shaped portion 470b, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, There is a risk that it will look like it does not. Therefore, at the switching point P between the third downward reverse R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, as in the first embodiment, none of the decorative pattern groups 471 and 74 are arranged. , the representation of the pattern to be light-guided and displayed can be made appropriate, and a performance without any discrepancy can be executed.

The third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the acrylic resin has a refractive index of 1.49 to 1.53, the first The light incident from the end face is emitted from the second end face in a straight (or almost straight direction; leftward or rightward direction in FIG. 56) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each of the condensing lenses 475b and 476b is condensed in one direction without being diffusely emitted from the second end faces formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Therefore, when it is desired to light the third lower decorative pattern group 474, other decorative patterns (that is, the third upper decorative pattern group 471) are not lit when the corresponding LEDs 475a and 476a are turned on. , and only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 can be appropriately illuminated. In particular, since the third lower decorative pattern group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative pattern group 471, when the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is to be lit, the same light guide plate 470 is formed. If the third upper decorative symbol group 471 having a higher expectation for big win than the third lower decorative symbol group 474 lights up, the contents of the performance are inconsistent, and there is a possibility that the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 can be displayed at an appropriate timing by configuring so that the light for the third lower decorative pattern group 474 with a low expectation of big win is not diffused by the condensing lenses 475b and 476b. It is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies in the contents of the production to occur.

On the other hand, the light that enters the third light guide plate 470 from the third upper LEDs 472 via the third upper diffuser lens 473 is guided downward and obliquely downward, so that the third upper decorative pattern group There is a risk that the position of the third lower decorative symbol group 474 arranged below 471 in the front view will be reached, and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 will be illuminated. However, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is an effect with a lower expectation for a big hit than the third upper decorative pattern group 471, and if the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is turned on, the third upper decorative pattern group 474 Even if the third lower decorative pattern group 474 having a lower degree of expectation for big win than 471 lights up, the player pays attention to the execution of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 having a higher degree of expectation for big win, and the degree of expectation for big win is low. Since the execution of the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is not focused so much, it is difficult for production discrepancies to occur. Therefore, condensing lenses 475b and 476b are adopted for the third lower decorative pattern group 474 with a low degree of expectation for big win, and a diffusing lens 473 is adopted for the third upper decorative pattern group 471 with a high degree of expectation for big win. As a result, it is possible to increase the performance effect of the third light guide plate 470 and increase the attention to the game while making it difficult for the production discrepancies to occur.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same effects as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the first to third embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the pseudo stop symbol pattern that can be employed in the variable elements of the "pseudo variation" performed in the third symbol variation effect will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, in the drum display device 81, the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR have different pattern arrangements. . More specifically, roughly speaking, (1) the third symbols are arranged in descending order (that is, "8"→"7"→"6"→...) in the variation direction (downward direction) on the left reel LR. are arranged, the third symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1"→"2"→"3"→...) in the variation direction (downward direction) on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. ing. In addition, (2) the third symbol of "345" symbol in which a plurality of symbols are integrated is arranged on the middle reel CR which is the final stop symbol row. Further, (3) the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not have the third symbols corresponding to the "4" symbols (a part of the "345" symbols) arranged on the middle reel CR. (4) On the left reel LR, the "chance" symbol is arranged at a position where it becomes visible next to the "1" symbol. ” is arranged at a position where it becomes visible next to the design.

The configuration of (1) above is mainly used in the variation effect of the third symbol, so-called single reach, which is "reach display" on one effective line on each effective line, and "reach display" on two effective lines. This is to enrich variations of the so-called double reach, which is "display". Suppose that in the drum display device 81 configured such that each of the reels LR, CR, and RR can visually recognize three third symbols, all the reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged in the same order (for example, in ascending order). In this case, the so-called single reach occurs only on the middle effective line, and the so-called double reach occurs only on the upper effective line and the lower effective line. In such a case, there is a risk that the variation of the "ready-to-reach display" becomes obsolete and the player loses interest in the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, at least the pattern arrangements of the left reel LR and the right reel RR that can form the "ready-to-win display" are reversed (i.e., descending order and ascending order). , so-called single reach can be generated on each effective line, and so-called double reach can be generated on the downward-sloping effective line and the upward-sloping effective line. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of possible occurrences of the "ready-to-win display" and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the configuration of (2) above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether or not the "ready-to-win display" is formed, when the "345" symbol stops on the middle reel CR, it can change to a big win result. With this configuration, the "345" symbol is set as a so-called chance symbol, and even in the case where the "ready-to-win display" does not appear due to the different stop symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Even if there is, it is constructed so that the expectation for the big win can be left until the final stop symbol row finishes stopping. More specifically, when the driving of the middle reel CR is stopped (temporarily stopped), if the above "345" symbol is stopped, all the reels LR, CR, RR are changed again. Configure so that it can develop into Since this ``re-fluctuation'' variable element can be selected only when the lottery result of the jackpot is derived, the ``345'' symbol is stopped in the variable presentation and the ``re-fluctuation'' variable element is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the so-called one-shot reversal effect executable, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration (3), only the "345" symbols arranged only on the middle reel CR include "4", while the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not arrange "4" symbols. Although the "ready-to-win display" itself by the "4" symbol cannot occur, the "345" symbol on the middle reel CR is made conspicuous and its particularity is emphasized, and the "345" symbol stops on the middle reel CR. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the game property such as whether or not to be remarkable.

In addition, in the configuration of (4) above, the number patterns (that is, "8" pattern → "7" pattern → ... → "1" pattern) are arranged in descending order, and the number patterns are switched. ``Chance'' symbols (hereinafter, ``Chance'' symbols may be abbreviated as ``C'' symbols) are arranged in the part, that is, the part between the ``1'' symbol and the ``8'' symbol. Also, a switching portion of the number symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in which the number symbols (that is, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → ... → "8" symbol) are arranged in ascending order, that is, " A "chance" design is arranged in a portion between the "8" design and the "1" design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the "chance" pattern, which is not the number pattern, is stopped and displayed, the "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element or the "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element, or the "special It is constructed so that a variable element of "reach" is performed, and by stopping and displaying the "chance" pattern, the variable performance is continuously executed and a big hit can be expected in the variable performance. In this way, in the variable effect, by arranging a "chance" pattern different in nature from the number patterns in the middle of the number patterns arranged in descending or ascending order on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR that fluctuate downward. In addition to facilitating the recognition of the numerical patterns varying on each reel LR, CR, RR, ``chance'' patterns, which are different in nature from the numerical patterns, are arranged to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. can be planned.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the (5) variation effect, when the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" pattern occurs, the "probability variation state" can occur as a jackpot result (that is, "777 ”) is configured to appear easily. In other words, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern can be selected. is difficult to be selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big win at the stage when the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol appears, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, an effect is provided in which the "ready-to-win pattern" changes step by step in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation". More specifically, in the variable elements of the "pseudo variation" of the fourth embodiment, a pattern change effect is provided in which the "reach formation pattern" changes in stages (in ascending order) in three stages. , the pseudo "1" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel LR, and the pseudo "1" symbol stops on the middle row of the right reel RR. In a situation where "reach display" is occurring on the active line (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"), when the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, a pseudo stop symbol The "ready-to-reach display" of a certain "1" symbol changes to the "ready-to-reach display" of the "2" symbol, which is also a pseudo stop symbol, and temporarily stops (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 2"). ), and then change to "3" pattern "reach display" (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "reach formation"), and various "reach display" are executed from the variable elements of "normal reach" be done. By configuring in this way, whether or not "reach display" occurs in any number pattern in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", that is, "reach display" that can generate "probability fluctuation state" is generated It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing the effect of whether or not to enrich the variation of the game. In addition, the number of steps that can be changed in stages in the variable element of "pseudo-variation" may be any number of times that can be executed within the variable element of "pseudo-variation", even two stages or less (including once) It is good, and four or more stages are also good.

However, in performing the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the left reel LR, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are configured as in (1) to (4) above, and furthermore, the game as in (5) above In the pachinko machine 10 configured to perform a variable effect according to the specifications, in the pattern change effect executed with the variable element of the "pseudo-variable", "pseudo stop 1" at the time of the variable element of the "pseudo-variable", Certain restrictions are imposed on the stop pattern of each pseudo stop symbol of "pseudo stop 2" and "reach formation".

Here, with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, a pseudo stop symbol pattern that can be executed with the variation element of "pseudo variation" will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Also, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed by the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 58(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which stop symbols are stopped, and FIG. 58(b) shows a state in which a pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(a). FIG. 58(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach formation pattern" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(b), and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state in which the "ready-to-reach display" is performed from the state of (c). In FIG. 57, "●" indicates the middle reel CR during fluctuation, and numbers on the left and right of it indicate stop symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Also, in FIG. 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third pattern are omitted (schematically).

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 1" is "1" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "2" symbol, and "reach formation" is "3" symbol. Since the variable elements of "variation" (that is, "1 1" → "2 2" → "3 3") are not restricted by the configurations of (1) to (5) above, they can be executed It is configured.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", at the time when the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" ends, the left reel of the drum display device 81 is stopped as "pseudo stop 1". The "1" symbol is quasi-stopped in the middle portion of the LR and the right reel RR, and it is as if the "ready-to-win display" by the "1" symbol has occurred. Then, the variable effect progresses in a state in which the "ready-to-win display" by the "1" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, the left reel LR and the right reel RR are rotated downward from the state of FIG. The symbols are quasi-stopped, and the state is as if the "ready-to-win display" by the "1" symbol was changed to the "ready-to-win display" by the "2" symbol (see FIG. 58(b)). Then, while the "ready-to-win display" with the "2" symbols is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds"), the variable effect progresses.

Then, the left reel LR and the right reel RR are rotated downward from the state of FIG. is stopped, and the "ready-to-win display" by the "2" pattern is changed to the "ready-to-win display" by the "3" pattern (see FIG. 58(c)). Then, from this state, the "ready-to-win display" (for example, variable elements of "normal reach") shown in FIG. is executed.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 2" is "2" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "3" pattern, and "reach formation" is "4" pattern. , "2 2"→"3 3"→"4 4") is a restriction due to the configuration of (3) above, that is, the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not include the "4" symbol. is configured so that it cannot be executed from

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 3" is "3" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "4" pattern, and "reach formation" is "5" pattern. , "3 3"→"4 4"→"5 5") is the same as the above "Pattern 2", is restricted by the configuration of (3) above, that is, "4 ” is configured so that it cannot be executed because it does not contain any symbols.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 4" is "3" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "5" pattern, and "reach formation" is "6" pattern. , "3*3"→"5*5"→"6*6") does not include the "4" symbol, so although the restriction due to the configuration in (3) above does not affect it, it is "pseudo stop 1". Although it was a "reach display" that could cause a "probability fluctuation state" (that is, a reach with "3" symbols), a "reach display" that does not generate a "probability fluctuation state" in "reach formation" ( In other words, the reach is changed to "6" symbol), and it is a so-called downfall production that looks like the profit that can be given has decreased. is configured to

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 5" is "4" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "5" pattern, and "reach formation" is "6" pattern. , "4 4" → "5 5" → "6 6") is, like the above "pattern 2" and "pattern 3", the restriction due to the configuration of (3) above, that is, the left reel LR and the right reel Since the reel RR does not include the "4" symbol, it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 6" is "5" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "6" pattern, and "reach formation" is "7" pattern. , “5●5”→“6●6”→“7●7”) are not subject to the constraints of the above configurations (1) to (5), and are configured to be executed.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 7" is "6" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "7" pattern, and "reach formation" is "8" pattern. , "6 6" → "7 7" → "8 8") is a "reach display" (i.e., "7 Despite the fact that it was reach by symbol), "reach formation" has changed to normal "reach display" (that is, reach by "8" symbol), and the profit that can be given seems to have decreased Since it is an effect of the decline, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so that the player will not lose interest in the game.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 8" is "7" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "8" pattern, and "reach formation" is "C" pattern. , "7 7" → "8 8" → "C C") is a "reach display" (that is, "7 In spite of the fact that the "pseudo stop 2" has changed to a normal "reach display" (i.e., the reach by the "8" pattern), it is a so-called downfall that discourages the player. Since it is a production, it is configured so that it cannot be executed. Also, when the "C" symbol stops, the variable element of "re-variation" can be executed. The "pseudo-variation" variable element is configured to be executed, and the "pseudo-variation" variable element is executed again from the "pseudo-variation" variable element, so the "pattern 8" can be executed. configured to prevent

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 9" is "8" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "C" pattern, and "reach formation" is "1" pattern. , "8 8" → "C C" → "1 1") is a "reach display" (that is, Reach by "C" pattern), but "reach formation" does not generate "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation elements (that is, reach by "1" pattern) Since this is a so-called dropout effect in which the profit that can be given seems to have decreased, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so as not to discourage the player from playing the game.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 10" is "8" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is "1" pattern, and "reach formation" is "2" pattern. , "8 8" → "1 1" → "2 2") skips the "reach display" by the "C" symbol in "pseudo stop 1" to "pseudo stop 2", and "8 ' symbol to '1' symbol, and is not subject to the restrictions of the above configurations (1) to (5), so it is configured to be executed. In the case of this "pattern 10", in order to omit (skip) the "C" symbol and execute the variable element of "pseudo variation", the symbol control (each reel Acceleration/deceleration patterns of LR, CR, and RR, change of time scale of constant speed variation, fine adjustment of slip return, etc.) are configured to be different.

It should be noted that, like this "pattern 10", it is also possible to skip any of the consecutive symbols and not to execute the pattern of executing the variable element of the "pseudo-variation". By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the control pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR regarding the variable element of the "pseudo-variation", and reduce the control load related to symbol control.

Next, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 11" is a "C" pattern, "pseudo stop 2" is a "1" pattern, and "reach formation" is a "2" pattern. , “C C” → “1 1” → “2 2”) is a “reach display” (that is, Reach with "C" pattern), but "reach formation" does not generate "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation elements (that is, reach with "2" pattern) Since it is changing and it is a so-called rebellious effect that makes the player lose interest, it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is selected from "pattern 1", "pattern 6", and "pattern 10". A pseudo stop symbol at is selected, and other patterns (i.e., "Pattern 2", "Pattern 3", "Pattern 4", "Pattern 5", "Pattern 7", "Pattern 8", "Pattern 9" and " Pattern 11”) is configured not to be executed with the variable element of “pseudo-variation”. By constructing in this way, it is possible to carry out variable performances while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies in performances, thereby making players feel uncomfortable and lose interest. can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the variable elements of the "pseudo-fluctuation", the execution of the so-called downgrade performance that changes from the temporarily stopped third symbol with a large profit to the third symbol with a small profit is suppressed, By suppressing the loss of interest, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to third embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a big hit result by a predetermined number pattern appears in the variable performance, the number pattern changes while the big win result is maintained in the variable performance, so-called "full rotation" performance. Symbol control and voice output control in .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the first to fourth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 59, the configurations of the left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, middle reel unit 81a2 and right reel unit 81a3 that constitute the drum display device 81 will be described. Since the configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, middle reel unit 81a2 and right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) will be described as an example in FIG.

The left reel unit 81a1 includes a cylindrical member 610, which is a cylindrical base, and a left reel LR endlessly wound around the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical member 610. As shown in FIG. A pair of seal portions (not shown) formed along both sides of the long side of the left reel LR are interposed between the cylindrical member 610 and the left reel LR so as to maintain the wound state of the left reel LR around the cylindrical member 610 . The left reel LR is attached to 610 .

On the outer peripheral surface of the left reel LR, as described above, number patterns and "chance" patterns as identification information are printed at regular intervals (see FIG. 4). A mounting recess 610a is formed in the center of the cylindrical member 610, and the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is mounted to the mounting recess 610a via a disk-shaped connecting plate 611. As shown in FIG. As a result, the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 rotates, which causes the cylindrical member 610 to rotate about the drive shaft. The symbols and "chance" symbols are configured to change.

The stepping motor 600 is fixed by a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw to the side surface of a fixing plate (not shown) arranged in an upright state inside the drum display device 81 . A reel position detection sensor 620 in which a light emitting element 621 and a light receiving element 622 are held at a predetermined interval is fixed to the fixing plate.

A base end portion 632 of an initial position member 630 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the connecting plate 611 integrated with the cylindrical member 610 with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

A distal end portion 631 of the initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from a proximal end portion 632 and aligned so as to pass between the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620 . Each time the left reel LR rotates once, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passage of the tip portion 631 of the initial position member 630, and each time the detection is made, a detection signal is sent to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 33). output. The display control device 114 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel LR for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set, for example, so that the left reel LR is rotated once by applying an excitation signal of 400 pulses. is driven and controlled by the display control device 114 .

More specifically, the left reel LR has a plurality of symbols and areas (in the fifth embodiment, a total of 16 symbols including number symbols, “chance” symbols, and blank areas) in its long side direction (circumferential direction). is depicted. Therefore, 25 pulses (=400/16 patterns=16 frames) are required to switch from a pattern (area) at a predetermined position to the next area (design), that is, to change the pattern by one frame. Then, which pattern and area are visible from the central opening 431 (see FIG. 6) of the display area forming member 430 is determined by the number of pulses after the detection signal of the reel position detection sensor 620 is output. In addition, pattern control can be performed to make an arbitrary pattern and area visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 .

Therefore, as described above, among the symbols and areas attached to the left reel LR, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the number of symbols and areas visible through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is It is determined by the size of the pattern (area) and the vertical length of the central opening 431. In the fifth embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR is configured to have three reels. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols and areas are visible to the player.

Next, a more detailed configuration of stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. FIG.

First, the principle of operation of stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing the principle of operation of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment employs a stepping motor of a hybrid type two-phase excitation drive system that employs a one-two phase excitation drive system. The stepping motor 600 is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase stepping motor, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase excitation drive type stepping motor, a five-phase excitation drive type stepping motor, and a one-phase excitation type stepping motor can be used. may

As shown in FIG. 60, a hybrid stepping motor 600 includes a rotating portion 602 arranged in the center, and a first shaft portion 603, a second shaft portion 604 and a third shaft portion arranged around the rotating portion 602. 605 and a fixed portion 601 having a fourth shaft portion 606 .

The rotating portion 602 is composed of a near side rotating portion 602a magnetized to the N pole and a far side rotating portion 602b magnetized to the S pole. It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided on the periphery (periphery) of the back side rotating portion 602b are positioned between the teeth. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the near side rotating portion 602a and the far side rotating portion 602b.

As shown in FIG. 61, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound around the first shaft portion 603 and the third shaft portion 605, and the winding end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound. is connected, and a predetermined DC power source +B (for example, 24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L2 and the excitation coil L4 are also bifilar-wound around the second shaft portion 604 and the fourth shaft portion 606, and the winding end of the excitation coil L2 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L4 are connected. , is also applied with the DC power source +B described above.

Here, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the first shaft portion 603 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the S pole and excite the third shaft portion 605 to the N pole is called "A phase". . In addition, contrary to the "A phase", an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third shaft portion 605 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the N pole and excite the third shaft portion to the S pole. is called "reverse A phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is written above "A").

Similarly, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the second shaft portion 604 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the S pole and excite the fourth shaft portion 606 to the N pole is referred to as "B phase". . Contrary to the "B phase", an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth shaft portion 606 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the N pole and excite the fourth shaft portion 606 to the S pole. The phase is called "reverse B phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is written above "B").

In the fifth embodiment, in the stepping motor 600 of the 1-2 phase excitation drive system, in the case of the 1-phase excitation drive system, "A phase", "B phase", "reverse A phase" and "reverse B phase" By sequentially applying an excitation signal to , the rotating portion 602 can be rotationally driven clockwise or counterclockwise.

That is, for example, when the "A phase" is first applied (energized), the projection of the first shaft portion 603 and the teeth of the front side rotating portion 602a, which are S poles, and the third shaft portion 605, which is N poles. The protrusion and the teeth of the back side rotating portion 602b face each other due to the suction force. Next, when the "B phase" is applied (energized), the projection of the second shaft portion 604 and the teeth of the front side rotating portion 602a, which have become the S pole, and the projection of the fourth shaft portion 606, which has become the N pole. and the teeth of the back side rotating portion 602b face each other due to the suction force. Furthermore, next, when the "reverse A phase" is applied (energized), the projection of the first shaft portion 603 having the N pole, the tooth of the back side rotating portion 602b, and the third shaft portion 605 having the S pole The protrusions and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other due to the suction force. Next, when the "reverse B phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604 having the N pole, the tooth of the back side rotating portion 602b, and the fourth shaft portion 606 having the S pole are connected. The protrusions and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other due to the suction force. By energizing in this order, rotating part 602 rotates clockwise in FIG.

Here, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation order pointer in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a 1-2 phase excitation drive system is adopted in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed. In one-phase excitation, only one set of the first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 is excited, and in two-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of the first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 are excited. . In this 1-2 phase excitation drive system, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequence (excitation order) from (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method firstly (a) energizes only "A phase" (1 phase excitation), and then (b) both "A phase" and "B phase" (2 phase excitation), then (c) energize only "B phase" (1 phase excitation), then (d) energize both "B phase" and "reverse A phase" (2 phase excitation), then (e) energize only the “reverse A phase” (1-phase excitation), and then (f) energize both the “reverse A phase” and “reverse B phase” (2-phase excitation) Then, (g) energize only the "reverse B phase" (one-phase excitation), then (h) energize both the "reverse B phase" and "A phase" (two-phase excitation), and then ( This is a driving method that returns to a).

In the fifth embodiment, the left reel LR is rotated once by 400 pulses of the excitation signal, so the angle change based on the excitation signal of 1 pulse, that is, the angle change per step is 9 degrees.

An excitation signal for stepping motor 600 is applied to motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as excitation data shown in FIG. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114 performs periodic processing (S1102 in FIG. to S1109), appropriate excitation data is output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 by timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the equal interval. This excitation data determines an excitation phase for the stepping motor 600, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase. The timer interrupt processing interval of the display control device 114 may be configured to be performed every 1 millisecond, which is the same interval as the regular processing in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 .

The excitation phase at the time of initial excitation of the stepping motor 600 is configured to perform two-phase excitation. In the case of one-phase excitation, a sufficient initial speed may not be obtained because the rotational torque generated is smaller than that in two-phase excitation. If a sufficient initial velocity is not obtained, the possibility of stepping out increases, so two-phase excitation is preferable for the initial excitation.

Further, when the stepping motor 600 is stopped, the four-phase excitation is performed immediately after the two-phase excitation. When braking is performed only by two-phase excitation, there is concern that the rotation speed will drop rapidly due to the strong braking force, and the player will feel uncomfortable with the movement of the reels LR, CR, and RR during braking. be done. On the other hand, by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation, each reel LR, CR, RR can be stopped smoothly.

When using the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment, driving characteristics such as shown in FIG. 63 or FIG. 64 are required. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of variable effects in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed during the "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment.

The example shown in FIG. 63 shows the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. a high speed constant speed period Tb during which the high speed constant speed rotation (for example, one frame changes in 100 ms) is performed; A first deceleration period Tc in which the speed is decelerated until it reaches a constant speed rotation at a low speed that is visible, a low speed constant speed period Td in which the low speed constant speed rotation is performed, and from the low speed constant speed rotation to a stop and a second deceleration period Te.

That is, the period composed of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant-speed period Tb matches the execution time of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element in the variable effect, and is set so that Ta+Tb=10 seconds. It is Further, the period composed of the first deceleration period Tc, the low-speed constant-speed period Td, and the second deceleration period Te continues until the left reel LR is stopped during the execution time of the variable elements of the "low-speed variation" in the variable effect. , and is set so that Tc+Td+Te≦5 seconds.

The example shown in FIG. 64 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 during the "full rotation" presentation, which is one of the "re-fluctuation" presentation modes. In the "full rotation" effect, in a state in which a big win pattern (for example, a "5" pattern results in a big win) appears on any of the effective lines, the big win pattern changes again, and the reels LR, CR, RR rotates about once, and an effect is executed in which another jackpot pattern (for example, the jackpot result of "6" pattern) changes. Then, the re-fluctuation and temporary suspension are executed a plurality of times, and finally the big winning pattern corresponding to the big winning result of winning the big winning lottery (for example, the big winning result of "7" pattern) is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the stepping motor 600 starts to rotate after the symbol temporarily stopped in various variable elements starts the effect of "full rotation", and the symbol is hard to be visually recognized by the player. A first acceleration period T1 until reaching a high speed rotation, a first high speed constant speed period T2 in which the high speed constant speed rotation is performed, and all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at the high speed constant speed are stopped simultaneously (so-called A first temporary stop period T3, which is a temporary stop period until the rotation is restarted after being beaten (bitter stop), a second acceleration period T4 until the high speed constant speed rotation is reached again, and a second high speed rotation at the high speed constant speed. It is divided into a constant speed period T5.

That is, in the period composed of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "1" symbol that appeared before the start of the "full rotation" effect) ) changes to the next second temporarily stopped symbol (for example, a jackpot of “2” symbol), the second temporarily stopped symbol is shown to the player in the first temporary stopped period T3, and the second accelerated period T4 and the second During the period including the high speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol is set to change to the next permanent stop symbol (for example, "3" symbol jackpot).

In the fifth embodiment, the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant-speed period T2 for all the reels LR, CR, and RR are set to 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds. Hereafter, milliseconds are referred to as milliseconds). , sometimes referred to as “ms”), and the first temporary stop period T3 during which the second temporary stop symbols are displayed on all the reels LR, CR, RR is 0.5 seconds (500 ms). Further, the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant speed period T5 in all reels LR, CR, RR are configured to be executed in 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, when the effect of "full rotation" is executed in the variable element of "re-variation", the execution time from the first temporary stop symbol to the appearance of the final stop symbol is 4.5 seconds (4500ms). After that, when the final stop symbol is displayed for 0.5 seconds (500 ms), the variable element of "re-variation" ends.

Here, as described above, the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are arranged in the opposite pattern arrangement. Drive LR, CR, RR around one rotation (that is, around 16 symbols = around 16 frames (about ±2 frames). Hereinafter, rotating all reels LR, CR, RR 14 frames to 18 frames is referred to as "about When the symbol is changed to the second temporary stop symbol by rotating the reel one rotation, the amount of symbol change on the left reel LR is different from the amount of symbol change on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. It is

Specifically, for example, as a result of the "ready-to-win display", the "1" symbol is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR, and "full rotation" is performed. When the effect of is executed, in order to stop the jackpot symbol of "2" symbol as the second temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each of the reels LR, CR, RR, the left reel LR, whose symbols are arranged in descending order, 16 frames for 1 rotation - 2 frames = 14 frames, while it is necessary to change the symbols, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, whose symbols are arranged in ascending order, are 16 frames for 1 rotation + 2 frames = 18 frames. , it is necessary to change the pattern. That is, when changing from one temporary stop symbol to the next temporary stop symbol in the "full spin" effect, the left reel LR is the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, and the left reel LR is the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. It is configured such that the amount of variation is reduced by four frames from the right reel RR.

In this case, in order to simultaneously stop the reels LR, CR, and RR fluctuating at high speed during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant-speed period T2 and change to the second temporary stop symbol, the first During the acceleration period T1 or the first high speed constant speed period T2, it is necessary to rotate all the reels LR, CR, RR with the second temporary stop symbols aligned. In order to align all the reels LR, CR, RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the "1" symbol is a big winning symbol) is stopped and displayed. While all the reels LR, CR, and RR are simultaneously started to rotate, only the left reel LR has a variation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed speed, etc.) to change the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. Pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed speed, etc.) is made different, and after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, RR, a second temporary stop symbol (for example, a "2" symbol jackpot symbol) ) are simultaneously stopped, or (2) among all the reels LR, CR, and RR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR having a large amount of change up to the second temporary stop symbol are selected. Numeric symbols (for example, "2" symbols on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) corresponding to the second temporary stop symbols on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are started to rotate first are the second temporary stop symbols on the left reel LR. (for example, "2" symbol on the left reel LR), the rotation of the left reel LR is started, and all the reels LR are at least during any period of the first high speed constant speed period T2. , CR, RR, all the reels LR, CR, RR are simultaneously stopped at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2 with the second temporary stop symbols aligned and the rotation speeds matched. drive control patterns are conceivable.

However, in the case of the drive control pattern (1), although the rotation start timings of all the reels LR, CR, and RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns for each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the first acceleration period T1. Or, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of the rotation speed of each reel LR, CR, RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, or it is necessary to control the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed. As a result, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR for adjusting the acceleration pattern and rotational speed becomes complicated. Further, since each reel LR, CR, RR has a blank area between the number symbols, each reel LR, CR, RR rotates at a constant speed for a relatively long period of the first high speed constant speed period T2. In the RR, due to different (shifted) rotation speeds and the like, and because the number patterns are not aligned, blank areas are lined up in the horizontal direction of the number patterns. There is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and lose interest in the game in the "full rotation" effect.

On the other hand, in the case of the drive control pattern (2), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns for each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the first acceleration period T1, and the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed is determined. Although control for adjustment is necessary, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of rotation speed of each reel LR, CR, RR during the first high speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although the difference between the rotation start timing of the left reel LR and the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR causes a sense of discomfort, it is relatively early in the first high-speed constant speed period T2 of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. , all the reels LR, CR, and RR can be aligned and varied at a constant speed. As a result, the drive control of the reels LR, CR, and RR can be simplified from the drive control pattern (1), the control load can be reduced, and a relatively early stage of the first high speed constant speed period T2 can be achieved. In (at least the second half), it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without making the player feel uncomfortable, thereby improving the interest in the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive and control the respective reels LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" effect according to the drive control pattern (2).

Further, as described above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to a state of constant-speed rotation after a predetermined acceleration period. Since it is the transition time to the state in which the variable effect is clearly executed (that is, high-speed constant-speed rotation in the variable element of "high-speed variation"), the stepping motor 600 changes from the acceleration state to the constant-speed rotation state as quickly as possible. It is desirable to make a transition. To this end, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600 should be switched quickly, but this may lead to loss of synchronism or unstable rotation.

In particular, in the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating part 602 are attracted to the projections of the shaft parts 603 to 606 at the time of initial excitation, the initial rotational shaking of the rotating part 602 (microscopic vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) ) occurs. The rotational shaking differs depending on each specification, but for example, there are cases where about 5 to 6 round trips of shaking occur in one reciprocation at 30 ms. Therefore, it is necessary to set the mode of switching the excitation phases during the acceleration period while taking into account such initial rotational fluctuation.

Each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the fifth embodiment suppresses the influence of the above-described initial rotation fluctuation, and the acceleration pattern during the "full rotation" effect is the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR. and are set differently. Specifically, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating in a normal acceleration pattern (see S2015 in FIGS. 65 and 70) similar to that at the start of the normal fluctuation, while the left reel LR is accelerated in the normal acceleration pattern. Rotation is started with a special acceleration pattern different from the pattern.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, each excitation pattern at the time of acceleration of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of the "full spin" presentation will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the normal acceleration process in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an explanation for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the special acceleration process in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of the reels LR, CR, and RR and the music output mode during the "full spin" effect in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the effect of "full rotation" performed by the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. is stopped, and FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the center reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating from the state of FIG. 68(a) by normal acceleration processing. FIG. 68C is a schematic diagram showing that the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state of FIG. FIG. 68(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which rotation has started, and FIG. 68(d) shows the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR rotating at high speed and constant speed from the state shown in FIG. 68(c). FIG. 68(e) shows a state in which the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, as in the state of FIG. 68(d). FIG. 68(f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result of the "2" symbol has stopped from the state of FIG. 68(e). In FIG. 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third pattern are omitted (schematically).

First, in the example of the normal acceleration process shown in FIG. 65, the acceleration process is the same as when the reels LR, CR, and RR start to fluctuate in the fluctuating effect. , the state set to two-phase excitation is maintained for 67 interrupts (that is, 67 times of timer interrupt processing=134 ms). After that, as "acceleration order 2", it is switched to 1-phase excitation, and the state is maintained for 8 interrupts (ie, 16 ms). After that, as "acceleration order 3", it is switched to two-phase excitation, and the state is maintained for 7 interrupts (ie, 14 ms). After that, the excitation phases are alternately switched, and the switching intervals of the excitation phases are gradually shortened. As a result, 150 interrupts = 2 ms x 150 = 300 ms is set as the excitation period for the normal acceleration process up to "acceleration order 1 to 25", that is, the period during which 25 pulses corresponding to one symbol change are output. It is possible to eliminate the above-described initial rotational shaking. Further, by using the acceleration pattern used at the start of fluctuation, the number of types of acceleration patterns can be reduced, and the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the example of the special acceleration process shown in FIG. 66, the initial excitation "acceleration order 1" (one pulse) is set to 2-phase excitation with 17 interrupts (that is, 17 timer interrupts = 34 ms). is retained over Thereafter, as in "acceleration sequence 2", the excitation is switched to 1-phase excitation as in the normal acceleration process, and this state is maintained for 8 interrupts (that is, 16 ms). After that, as "acceleration order 3", it is switched to two-phase excitation, and the state is maintained for 7 interrupts (ie, 14 ms). After that, the excitation phases are alternately switched, and the switching intervals of the excitation phases are gradually shortened. As a result, 100 interrupts = 2 ms x 100 = 200 ms is set as an excitation period for up to "acceleration order 1 to 25" of the special acceleration process, that is, the period during which 25 pulses corresponding to one symbol change are output. The initial rotational shaking can be eliminated.

That is, the special acceleration process drives and controls the left reel LR so as to accelerate to high-speed constant rotation in a period 100 ms shorter than the normal acceleration process. Therefore, in the "full spin" effect, the left reel LR can be rotated at a high speed and constant speed in a relatively short period of time.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, at the time of the "full spin" effect, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel CR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) are displayed. The reels RR are simultaneously started to rotate by normal acceleration processing (at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 67, and see FIGS. 68(a) and (b)). Then, when reaching a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at a high constant speed, corresponds to the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 67 and see FIG. 68(c)), the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) is stopped and displayed. The rotation of the left reel LR is started by special acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 67, and see FIGS. 68(d) and (e)), the left reel LR The second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are maintained in a horizontal row while maintaining a high speed constant. It is set to rotate quickly. After that, all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high constant speed are simultaneously stopped at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) reaches the active line in the middle stage. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row (the timing at which all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 67, and the timing in FIG. 68 ( f) see).

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the driving control of the reels LR, CR, and RR, thereby reducing the control burden, and at least in the latter half of the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, the number patterns are displayed. Since it is possible to rotate while aligning the number patterns in a state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without making the player feel uncomfortable, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the difference in the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do so, by synchronizing the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the sense of discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) at the time of the "full rotation" effect, until it appears It is configured to output predetermined music synchronized with the period during the period. The rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR are adjusted in accordance with beats (rhythms) that are output (struck) at equal intervals in the song.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the second reel during the "full spin" effect. The change time of the 2 temporary stop pattern (that is, the “2” pattern) is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during the change time is set to beats per minute (Beats), which indicates the number of beats per minute. Per Minute, hereinafter sometimes referred to as "BPM") is 120, that is, a piece of music with a tempo of one beat every 0.5 seconds, and one bar of the piece of music is output in 4/4 time signature. configured as follows. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the first beat in the above one bar, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the second beat in the above one bar. configured to start rotation at the timing of

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" pattern to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that accelerates and fluctuates at 300 ms. At the same time, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" pattern) are rotated at a high speed constant speed in 100 ms. It changes to a temporary stop pattern. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to synchronize with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of one bar in the music of BPM 120 and 4/4 time.

On the other hand, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, rotates the first frame (that is, from the "1" pattern to the blank area one above) with a special acceleration process of 200 ms, and the remaining 13 frames (that is, , from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped symbol changes to the second temporarily stopped symbol in a total of 1500 ms. . That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronism with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of one bar in the music of 120 BPM and 4/4 beat.

Then, while all the reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed at a constant speed, the third beat (weak beat) and fourth beat (weak beat) of one bar are output, and then at the end of the one bar. (After the end of the fourth beat, 2000 ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR), the rotation of all the reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped simultaneously, and a second provisional reel is displayed on the middle active line. A stop symbol (that is, a "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

By constructing in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the deviation of the rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized by the player's sense of hearing. By combining the above, the visual deviation is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the "full rotation" production, and the highest expectation for the big hit in the game " It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" presentation and improve the interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, each control process executed by the MPU (not shown) within the display control device 114 will be described. As such MPU processing, mainly a motor control process (see FIG. 69) for driving and controlling the stepping motor 600 and a reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) executed in the motor control process are executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing motor control processing executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. The motor control process may be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114 , for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 .

The motor control processing shown in FIG. 69 is executed within the main processing that is periodically executed after the predetermined start-up processing in the display control device 114 is completed, and mainly controls the driving of the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81. Run.

In this motor control process, first, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 600 corresponding to one of the reels LR, CR, RR needs to be controlled (S2001). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to one of the reels LR, CR, RR is unnecessary (S2001: No), that is, even when all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped If so, the motor control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, if it is determined that the stepping motor 600 corresponding to one of the reels LR, CR, RR needs to be controlled (S2001: Yes), the detection result of the reel position detection sensor 620 and the excitation Based on the number of data outputs, a process of grasping the rotational positions of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed is executed (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is time to start braking the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the timing to start braking the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed has arrived (S2003: Yes), the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed are started to rotate. Therefore, the reel rotation process (S2004) is performed, and after the reel rotation process (S2004) is executed, the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the braking start timing for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed has not come (S2003: No), the process of S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2005.

Here, the reel rotation start process (S2004) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing reel rotation start processing (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In this reel rotation start processing (S2004), first, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is the start timing of the variable effect (S2011). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is time to start the variable effect (S2011: Yes), all the reels LR, CR, and RR are started to rotate by normal acceleration processing (S2012), and this reel rotation start processing (S2004). and return to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). In addition, when it is determined that it is time to start the variable effect, it is further determined whether it is a normal variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls is small or a shortened variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls is large. , the rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR is started by the normal acceleration process, while the rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR is started by the special acceleration process in the case of the shortened variation. good.

On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that it is not the start time of the variable effect (S2011: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the time of the "full rotation" effect (S2013). As a result of the determination, if it is not during the "full spin" effect (S2013: No), the reel rotation start process (S2004) is ended and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during the "full spin" effect (S2013: Yes), then all the reels LR, CR, RR are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop time has elapsed. It is determined whether it is the timing, ie, the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (S2014).

As a result of the determination in S2014, when it is determined that all the reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and the time has elapsed for the temporary stop (S2014: Yes), the middle reel CR and The rotation of the right reel RR is started by normal acceleration processing (see FIG. 65) (S2015). The beat is output from the audio output device 226 (S2016), the reel rotation start process (S2004) is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S2014, if it is determined that all the reels LR, CR, RR are temporarily stopped and it is not the time when the temporary stop time has passed (S2014: No), next, When the left reel LR is temporarily stopped, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the temporary stop time has passed, ie, the rotation start timing of the left reel LR (S2017).

As a result of the determination in S2017, when it is determined that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the time has elapsed for the temporary stop (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR is subjected to special acceleration processing ( (see FIG. 66) starts spinning (S2018), and at this timing, the second beat in one bar of the music corresponding to the production of "full rotation" is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), and this reel rotation start processing (S2004) is ended, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the timing of the temporary stop time has not elapsed (S2017: No), this reel rotation start processing (S2004 ) and return to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. In the processing of S2005, reel control processing is performed (S2005), and the processing proceeds to S2006. In this reel control process (S2005), a process of generating excitation data for controlling the rotation of the stepping motor 600 is performed. In order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114 stores a plurality of acceleration tables (see FIGS. 65 and 66). In the table, at least acceleration counter data and switching interval data corresponding to the acceleration counter data on a one-to-one basis are set.

In the reel control process of S2005, a switching interval counter, an acceleration counter and an excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114 are used. The number of timer interrupts corresponding to the switching interval of the excitation phase is set in the switching interval counter. The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for stepping motor 600 . When the 1-2 phase excitation stepping motor 600 is used, 1 phase excitation and 2 phase excitation are alternately performed, and the phase excitation pattern at that time becomes 8 patterns as shown in FIG. The value (0 to 7) of the excitation order pointer specifies which excitation data for which phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and is temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114. be done.

In this reel control process, it is determined whether or not each of the reels LR, CR, and RR is being braked. 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the switching interval counter, and it is determined whether or not the numerical information after the subtraction is "0". If the numerical information is not "0", the reel control process is terminated. If the numerical information is "0", an acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, In the acceleration table, the switching interval data corresponding to the current value of the acceleration counter is set in the switching interval counter. For example, when the reels LR, CR, and RR start to rotate, the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) is executed, so that the numerical information of the acceleration counter corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table. 25”. In this case, the numerical information of "2" is set in the switching interval counter.

Next, update processing of the excitation order pointer is executed. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and when the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". After that, an excitation data table as shown in FIG. 62 is read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and the excitation data corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read. Then, the read excitation data is stored in the RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, and RR which are targets of the reel control process.

Next, under the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the acceleration counter. As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is executed for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed this time, switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set. In this case, since it is executed under the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, if the numerical information of the acceleration counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Also, the switching interval is one interrupt when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "0". Therefore, once the numerical information of the acceleration counter becomes "0", the excitation phase is switched according to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer each time the timer interrupt process is executed. This state is the constant speed state.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the control of the stepping motor 600 has ended for all the rotating reels LR, CR, and RR (S2006). When the control of the stepping motor 600 is completed (S2006: Yes), the excitation data for each rotating reel LR, CR, RR is output to the input/output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display control device 114 (S2007 ), the motor control process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if the control of the stepping motor 600 has not been completed for all the rotating reels LR, CR, and RR (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the motor End the control process.

Since the output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 is a process of writing data to the output port (not shown) corresponding to the input/output port 608, the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) has excitation data. At the same time as writing to the input/output port 608, excitation data is supplied. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately energizes the excitation phase designated by the excitation data, thereby exciting the rotating portion 602 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the center reel CR and the right reel RR that are stop-displayed with the first temporary stop symbol are simultaneously rotated by the normal acceleration process during the "full spin" effect. Start rotating. Then, when reaching a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR rotated at a high constant speed is the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR, and the left reel LR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol is specially accelerated. Rotation is started by processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the constant high-speed rotation, the second temporarily stopped symbols of the left reel LR and the second temporarily stopped symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned horizontally. It is set to rotate at a high speed while maintaining After that, at the timing when the second temporarily stopped symbol reaches the middle effective line, all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high constant speed are stopped simultaneously and on the middle effective line. , the second temporarily stopped symbols are stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the driving control of the reels LR, CR, and RR, thereby reducing the control burden, and at least in the latter half of the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, the number patterns are displayed. Since it is possible to rotate while aligning the number patterns in a state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without making the player feel uncomfortable, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. It is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music to be output during the change time is set to BPM 120, which indicates the number of beats per minute, and one bar of the music is output in 4/4 beat. . Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the first beat in the above one bar, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the second beat in the above one bar. configured to start rotation at the timing of By constructing in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the deviation of the rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized by the player's sense of hearing. By combining the above, the visual deviation is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the "full rotation" production, and the highest expectation for the big hit in the game " It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to fourth embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, while changing from the first temporary stop pattern to the second temporary stop pattern, the sound for one bar of music is output, and the one bar is output. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started on the first beat, the rotation of the left reel LR is started on the second beat of the one measure, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music was synchronized with In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR different, the rotation start of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR can be synchronized with the music. It is configured to synchronize the tempo and timing.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the main sound (for example, loud volume, main melody, female The main note that forms the part (soprano or alto, melody line, etc.) and the auxiliary sound for the main note (e.g., louder volume, lower volume, auxiliary melody (accompaniment), male part (tenor or bass), bass line, etc.) ), the tonic is output with the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, and the secondary sound is output with the start of rotation of the left reel LR. configured to In this case, the acceleration pattern for the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, the normal acceleration process).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, with reference to FIG. 71, the drive mode and timing of the reels LR, CR, and RR during the "full spin" presentation, and the output mode and timing of the music composed of the key note and the secondary note will be described. do. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive modes of the reels LR, CR, and RR and the music output mode during the "full spin" effect in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, during the "full spin" effect of the sixth embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) are displayed. They start rotating at the same time by normal acceleration processing (at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 71). Then, when reaching a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at a high constant speed, corresponds to the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 71), the left reel LR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) is replaced with the middle reel CR and As with the right reel RR, rotation is started by normal acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the constant high-speed rotation (constant speed state of all the reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 71), the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) of the left reel LR. , the center reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed and constant speed while maintaining a state in which the second temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbols) of the right reel RR are aligned horizontally. After that, all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high constant speed are simultaneously stopped at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) reaches the active line in the middle stage. Then, the second temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle stage (the timing at which all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 71).

By configuring in this way, the acceleration processing at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR can be shared to simplify the drive control, the control load can be reduced, and the first high speed constant speed reel can be used. In at least the second half of the period T2, the number patterns can be rotated while being aligned in a state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction of the number patterns, so that the player does not feel a sense of incongruity and is prevented from losing interest in the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do so, by synchronizing the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the sense of discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) at the time of the "full rotation" effect, until it appears It is configured to output predetermined music synchronized with the period during the period. In addition, the music is composed of a key note and a secondary note, and the rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged to coincide with the output start timing of the key note and the output start timing of the secondary note.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames change from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the second reel during the "full spin" effect. The change time of 2 temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the output of the tonic of the music is started, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts outputting the subtone of the music. Configure to start rotation at the timing.

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" pattern to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that accelerates and fluctuates at 300 ms. At the same time, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" pattern) are rotated at a high speed constant speed in 100 ms. It changes to a temporary stop pattern. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started in synchronization with the output of the tonic of the music for 2 seconds.

In addition, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, performs the normal acceleration process of 300 ms for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) like the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. , and the remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" pattern) are rotated at a high speed constant speed rotation at 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped pattern is rotated for a total of 1600 ms. to the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronism with the output of the secondary sound that is output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, in a state in which all the reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed at a constant speed, the tonic and subtones of the music piece are continuously output. 2000 ms after the start of rotation), the rotation of all the reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row. be.

By constructing in this way, during the "full spin" effect, a musical composition is formed that allows the player to perceive the discrepancy in the rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR visually by the player's sense of hearing. By driving in accordance with the output of each element, the visual deviation is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the music by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the "full rotation" effect, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the ``full rotation'' performance, which has the highest expectation for the big win, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the acceleration processing at the start of rotation of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" presentation is performed in common with the normal acceleration processing, thereby eliminating the need to provide special acceleration patterns such as special acceleration processing. , the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, and the control load related to symbol control can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to fifth embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment adopting the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, while changing from the first temporary stop pattern to the second temporary stop pattern, the sound for one bar of music is output, and the one bar is output. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started on the first beat, the rotation of the left reel LR is started on the second beat of the one measure, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music was synchronized with In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR different, the rotation start of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR can be synchronized with the music. It is configured to synchronize the tempo and timing.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, three or more sounds (for example, do-re-mi (code C )), which is at least one or more notes constituting a chord (chord), and the second note (for example, G) which is the remaining note of the chord While outputting a music (sound effect) composed of, the first sound is output with the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, and the second sound is output with the start of rotation of the left reel LR. configured to In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern for the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, the normal acceleration process).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to sixth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, referring to FIG. 72, the driving mode and timing of the reels LR, CR, and RR during the "full spin" presentation, and a piece of music (sound effect) composed of the first sound and the second sound. will be described. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive modes of the reels LR, CR, and RR and the music output mode during the "full spin" effect in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, during the "full spin" effect of the seventh embodiment, first, the center reel CR and the right reel RR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) are displayed. They start rotating at the same time by normal acceleration processing (at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 72). Then, when reaching a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at a high constant speed, corresponds to the second temporarily stopped symbol (ie, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 72), the left reel LR stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) is replaced with the middle reel CR and the left reel LR. As with the right reel RR, rotation is started by normal acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all the reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 72), the second temporary stop pattern (that is, "2" pattern) of the left reel LR. , the center reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed and constant speed while maintaining a state in which the second temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbols) of the right reel RR are aligned horizontally. After that, all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high constant speed are simultaneously stopped at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) reaches the active line in the middle stage. Then, the second temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle stage (the timing at which all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 72).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do so, by synchronizing the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the sense of discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames change from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the second reel during the "full spin" effect. The change time of 2 temporary stop symbols (that is, "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the output of the first note (in the seventh embodiment, domi of the three chords of domizo) in the musical piece, which is a chord. , the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the timing of the start of outputting the second note (in the seventh embodiment, G of the triad of do-re-mi) in the musical piece that is the chord. .

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" pattern to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that accelerates and fluctuates at 300 ms. At the same time, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" pattern) are rotated at a high speed constant speed in 100 ms. It changes to a temporary stop pattern. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started in synchronization with the output of the first note of the music for 2 seconds.

In addition, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, performs the normal acceleration process of 300 ms for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) like the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. , and the remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" pattern) are rotated at a high speed constant speed rotation at 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped pattern is rotated for a total of 1600 ms. to the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronism with the output of the second sound that is output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, while all the reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, the first sound and the second sound of the musical piece are continuously output to form a chord, and then the musical piece ends. The rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped simultaneously so as to synchronize with time (2000 ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR), and a second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, during the "full spin" effect, the deviation of the rotation start timings of the reels LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized as harmony by the player's sense of hearing. By driving in accordance with the output of the first sound and the second sound that constitute the It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by suppressing the loss of interest in the game in the ``full rotation'' performance in which the expectation of a big win is the highest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when each reel LR, CR, RR from the second temporary stop symbol to the final stop symbol rotates, each reel LR, CR, RR from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol It is also possible to output a chord (for example, reshiso (chord G)) that does not cause discomfort in combination with the chord (for example, do-re-mi (chord C)) that has been output during the rotation of . By configuring in this way, the symbol control and the sound output control during the entire "full rotation" presentation are executed as an integral and harmonious presentation, and the player feels uncomfortable in the "full rotation" presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" performance, in which the degree of expectation for a big win is the highest in the game, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, it is configured to output triads of domiso in accordance with the rotation of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. Triads (major triad, minor triad, augmented triad, diminished triad) and quadruples (major seventh chord) (major 7th), minor 7th chord (minor 7th), minor 3 major 7th chord (minor major 7th), diminished 5 minor 7th chord (half diminished), diminished 7th chord (diminished) 7th), augmented 7th chord (Aucmented Major 7th)), and five chords (dominant ninth chord (ninth), dominant ninth chord (major ninth)). good too.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment has the same effects as those of the first through sixth embodiments due to the same configuration.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index about 1.49 to 1.53). On the other hand, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate resin, refractive index of about 1.59) or optical plastic (polymethyl methacrylate resin, refractive index of about 1.491 to 1.57). , nylon (nylon-based resin, refractive index of about 1.53), or polyester (polyester-based resin, refractive index of about 1.60). In this case, the shapes of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (that is, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c) are changed according to the refractive index of each resin. It is preferable to configure so as to appropriately change the configuration so that the first decorative pattern group 421 is reliably illuminated (diffused) with light.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, one concave portion in the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is formed on three sides of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c. The LEDs 422c and 424 are configured to diffuse the light in three directions, that is, the left direction, the front direction, and the right direction, with respect to the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 422c and 424. On the other hand, one concave portion in the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is composed of two sides or four or more sides, and the light diffusion direction is two or four. It may be configured to be greater than or equal to the direction.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 of the rear light guide plate 420 are positioned so as to form a pair in the vertical direction (overlapping positions in the vertical direction). was set in Also, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c of the front light guide plate 410 are positioned so as to form a pair in the left-right direction (overlapping position in the horizontal left-right direction). On the other hand, a position where one of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 or one of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c does not overlap vertically or horizontally. It may be configured so as to be provided by shifting it. By configuring in this way, the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 can be prevented from having a blank area where light is not irradiated, and the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 can be decorated. The patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 can be reliably displayed, and attention to the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are formed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of each of the LEDs 422c and 424. It was configured as On the other hand, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed on the entire upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420 . With this configuration, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 can be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422 c and 424 , and the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 can be improved. In addition, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 422c and 424 can be increased.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, each side of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c, which constitute one concave portion of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425, It was designed to be of equal length. On the other hand, the lengths of the sides of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c may be different. In particular, when the sizes of decorative patterns to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different from each other, the length of each side may be formed according to the size of the display target. Specifically, for example, when there is a first display object whose size is a predetermined size and a second display object whose size is twice the size of the first display object, the second display object The length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object is configured to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object. Thus, by forming the length of each side of the diffusion lens so as to correspond to the size of the display object, each display object can be appropriately lit.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is composed of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 shaped along the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 having a cylindrical outer shape. On the other hand, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a light guide plate that follows the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate that has a shape (for example, a flat plate shape) that is unrelated to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. You may Further, the light guide unit 400 may be composed of a plurality of light guide plates having a shape (for example, flat plate shape) unrelated to the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81 . Furthermore, in the case where the display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is a planar display device instead of the drum display device 81 and the variation effect of the third pattern is performed, a light guide plate along the outer shape of the planar liquid crystal display device (for example, The light guide unit 400 may be configured with a light guide plate having a flat plate shape) and a light guide plate having a shape irrelevant to the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape partially having an R-shaped portion). In addition, when the display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is a planar display device instead of the drum display device 81 and the variation effect of the third pattern is performed, a shape irrelevant to the outer shape of the planar liquid crystal display device (for example, The light guide unit 400 may be configured with a plurality of light guide plates having a shape partially having an R-shaped portion.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to display three types of decorative patterns (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413). The light plate 420 can display one type of decorative pattern (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421), and the two light guide plates 410, 420 can perform four types of effects, which are larger than the number of the light guide plates 410, 420. was configured to On the other hand, three or more light guide plates may be configured to enable execution of a plurality of types of effects (for example, four or more types) greater than the number of light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, both the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to have a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 . On the other hand, the light guide plate on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in a shape having a regular R shape, while the light guide plate on the back side is formed in a shape portion having a reverse R shape that is opposite (paired) to the regular R shape. It may be configured to form In this case, a predetermined production device (for example, a movable accessory or a liquid crystal display device) is provided in the space between the light guide plate having the regular R shape on the front side and the light guide plate having the reverse R shape on the back side. good too. By configuring in this way, the light guide plate on the front side and the light guide plate on the back side perform an integral and three-dimensional powerful presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of each light guide plate and attracting attention to the game. can increase

<Modification 9>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the vertical width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, the execution mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed may be reduced in the horizontal direction and executed. Further, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the board first decorative pattern group 60a and the board second decorative pattern group 60b may not be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compartmentalize the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the upper fish school pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is configured not to light up. On the other hand, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the display color of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the confirmation lamp 311 side is changed to the display color of the confirmation lamp 311 (for example, "red"). may be configured to be executed in a display color (for example, "blue") that is clearly different from the By configuring in this way, it is possible to compartmentalize the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to hinder the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the determination lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and the variation of effect can be increased.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the effects by the front light guide plate 410 and the effects by the rear light guide plate 420 are performed separately so as not to overlap. On the other hand, by performing the effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 at the same time, a variety of effects can be executed, and the effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, respectively, and the game can be played. can increase the attention of

<Modification 12>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the effect scale of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, when the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is executed, or the variation effect performed by the drum display device 81 is executed. In this case, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, or the scale of the variable production may be reduced. Examples of reducing the scale of rendering include reducing the rendering width or rendering range, reducing rendering colors or rendering brightness, and shortening rendering time.

<Modification 13>
In the above-described first embodiment, the drum display device 81 is used to determine whether or not to draw a lottery for the big win by means of the variation effect of the third symbol. On the other hand, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, or a rotating belt display device is used to perform a variable performance to perform a big winning lottery, or whether or not a ball wins a prize in a predetermined prize winning opening provided in a lottery device with a crew. It may be configured such that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big win is awarded.

<Modification 14>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, if a movable role that can suggest the game result in the variable performance is provided in advance and the movable range of the movable role overlaps with the performance part of the first decorative pattern group 421, the movable role of the movable role The effect width of the first decorative pattern group 421 may be reduced so as not to overlap with. Also, the movable range of the movable accessory may be reduced so as not to overlap with the rendering width of the first decorative pattern group 421 . In this case, it is configured so as to give priority to a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable performance. By configuring in this way, a plurality of effects can be made distinguishable so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and effects with a high degree of expectation for a big win can be highlighted. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to hinder the performance that is important as a game.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured so that light can enter from the horizontal end face of the lower flat plate portion and the lower reverse R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit. In addition, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 can be lit by allowing light to enter from the downward end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 . On the other hand, each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 may be configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end face, and each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 may be configured to be lit. Specifically, the front light guide plate 410 is configured so that light can enter from the horizontal end face of the lower flat plate portion and the lower reverse R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be lit. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 may be configured to be lit by allowing light to enter from the lateral end face of the regular R-shaped portion 410 .

In this case, regarding the lighting of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with a low degree of expectation for big hits, when it is desired to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413 by adopting a condensing lens, the decorative pattern group 411 other than the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is used. , 412 are not lit up, while a diffusion lens is adopted for the lighting of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 having higher expectations for big wins than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. The second decorative design group 411 and the third decorative design 412 may be clearly lit when the group 411 and the third decorative design 412 are to be lit. Even if the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern group 412 is lit and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit and displayed, the difference in performance is small. Therefore, when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern group 412 is lit, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest degree of expectation for the big win becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Also, it is possible to minimize discrepancies in performance and provide a game that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the arrangement position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 indicating the result of the variation effect of the third pattern is arranged It is also a part where movable accessories etc. that execute the effect for are stored and arranged. In this case, it is necessary to arrange the LED substrates for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 so as to avoid the arrangement position and the movable range of the movable role, and the movable role or the LED There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing the substrate will be reduced. Therefore, an LED board for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 indicating the result of the variation effect of the third pattern is arranged is provided. , at a position that does not interfere with the position and movable range of the movable accessory (for example, the upper side or lower side of the front light guide plate 410), the degree of freedom in designing the movable accessory or the LED board can be increased. .

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 are lit as if the first decorative pattern group 421 were displayed moving from the right side to the left side in front view. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be lit as if the first decorative pattern group 421 were moved upward or downward. In this case, the LEDs 422c and 424 are arranged in the left-right direction of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 arranged in the left-right direction are sequentially turned on from any direction to multiple directions, thereby achieving the first decoration. An effect may be executed such that the pattern group 421 is moved upward or downward from above.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 employs the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d so that the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 can be lit, respectively, and the rear light guide plate 420 employs the diffuser lenses. 423 and 425 were adopted, and the 1st decoration pattern group 421 was comprised so that lighting was possible. On the other hand, in one light guide plate, a condensing lens and a diffusing lens may be employed so that each decorative pattern can be illuminated. Specifically, for example, a low-reliability decorative pattern with a low chance of winning a big win is placed at a position where it can be visually recognized by lighting the condensing lens, and a high-reliability decorative pattern with a high chance of winning a big win is lit up by lighting the diffusion lens. Place it so that it is visible. In this case, when the low-reliability decorative pattern is lit, the high-reliability decorative pattern is configured so that the light is collected by the condensing lens so that the high-reliability decorative pattern cannot be lit. is configured so that the low-reliability decorative pattern can be illuminated by diffusion of light by the diffusion lens. Even if the low-reliability decorative pattern is lighted-displayed when the high-reliability-level decorative pattern is lighted-displayed, the discrepancies in performance are small. Therefore, even if the low-reliability decorative pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when lighting the highly-reliable decorative pattern, the discrepancies in performance are minimized. It is possible to provide a game that does not cause a sense of incompatibility to the player.

<Modification 18>
In the above-described first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest degree of expectation for big wins, and the second group of decorative patterns 411 and the third decorative design 412 with higher expectations for big wins than the fourth decorative pattern group are led to the front side. A first decorative pattern group 421 which is collectively formed on the light plate 410 and has a higher expectation for a big hit than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 is formed on the rear side different from the front light guide plate 410.例文帳に追加It was formed on the light guide plate 420 . On the other hand, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest degree of expectation for big win is formed on the front side light guide plate 410, and the first group 421 and the second decorative pattern with higher degree of expectation for big win than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Group 411 and third decorative pattern 412 may be formed on rear light guide plate 420 .

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 are positioned so that none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 are positioned at the portion where the front light guide plate 410 switches between the lower reverse R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion. was forming. On the other hand, a portion where the upper flat plate portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion are switched, a portion where the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion are switched, a portion where the regular R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion are switched, or , and the portion where the lower reverse R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are switched, any of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 may be positioned.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, light is incident from the upper flat plate portion or the lower flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 . On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the light is incident from the end surface of any of the R-shaped portions.

<Modification 21>
In the above-described first embodiment, when performing the variable effect of the third symbols on the drum display device 81, the symbol arrays of the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrays of the middle reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. rice field. In addition, the middle reel CR is arranged with "4" symbols that are not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Therefore, since there is no jackpot pattern including the "4" pattern as the jackpot forming pattern, the ready-to-win forming pattern including the "4" pattern cannot be generated as the "ready-to-win display". Therefore, when stepping up the ready-to-win formation pattern in the performance of ``pseudo fluctuation'' or the like, for example, when increasing the numbers of the ready-to-win formation pattern in ascending order, the step-up performance including ``4'' cannot be performed. Specifically, as a three-stage step-up production, even if you can produce “1” → “2” → “3” or “5” → “6” → “7”, “2” → “3” → "4" or "3" → "4" → "5" effects cannot be performed. Therefore, when the step-up effect of the ready-to-win formation pattern is performed by "pseudo-fluctuation" or the like, the step-up effect is performed from the pattern that does not include "4". By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause any inconsistency in performance and that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

<Modification 22>
In the above-described first embodiment, when performing the variable effect of the third symbols on the drum display device 81, the symbol arrays of the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrays of the middle reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. rice field. Therefore, when executing a so-called all-rotation effect in which the patterns of all the reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and varied in the variable effect, the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are arranged in ascending order, are aligned. When the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are to be rotated and temporarily stopped during full rotation are aligned with the symbols of the left reel LR, the symbols of the left reel LR and the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned. Start rotating so that the patterns are aligned. By temporarily stopping the aligned symbols on any of the effective lines (for example, the middle line) and repeating this a plurality of times, a full-rotation effect is executed. In this case, by outputting music (sound effects) in time with the timing of the temporary stop, and outputting music (sound effects) in time with the start and during rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR, It is possible to execute a powerful production that is rhythmic and has a good tempo.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b imitating the fish school pattern, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with the first decoration having the same form as the fish school pattern. A pattern group 421 is provided, and the game board 13 and the rear side light guide plate 420 are configured to perform integral performance. In this case, fish patterns are formed so that one fish pattern is completed by the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a or the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b of the game board 13 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. may be arranged. Specifically, for example, in the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, a pattern in which a part of the fish is cut off is arranged, and the rear side light guide plate 420 is arranged for the remaining pattern part of the fish, and when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 It is configured so that one fish pattern is formed when the By configuring in this way, the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can continuously perform an integral effect in the horizontal direction, and the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be executed. Unnaturalness due to discontinuity of one fish pattern in a part can be suitably suppressed. In addition, considering the height difference between the board surface position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the height in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10), the size of each divided fish pattern is formed, and the pachinko machine 10 It is preferable that the fish pattern 1 can be recognized without a sense of incompatibility (unnaturally) when viewed from the front direction.

<Modification 24>
In the above-described first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is not provided with a decorative pattern or the like, and is configured so as to clarify the effective line in the drum display device 81 . On the other hand, a decorative pattern may be arranged on the display area forming member 430 so that the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13 can perform an integral effect. Specifically, for example, the display area forming member 430 also forms fish school decorative patterns of the same form as the fish school patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b, The game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 may be configured to perform an integrated effect. In this case, for example, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, the rear light guide plate 420, or a pattern with a part of the fish cut off is arranged on the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 is arranged for the rest of the fish pattern. Then, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, one fish pattern is formed. By configuring in this manner, the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430 can continuously and integrally perform an effect in the horizontal direction.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment described above, the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430 is configured with a plurality of rib shapes. On the other hand, as the lens cut 432, light from the outside is made difficult to enter the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 by light diffusion processing (for example, emboss processing) that forms fine unevenness. may

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is condensed by the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and the directivity of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c in the front direction is adjusted. It is configured to irradiate the light with the light having the front side light guide plate 410 and make the light incident on the front side light guide plate 410 . On the other hand, a light emitting means having a directivity different from that of the above configuration may be used so that light is incident on the front light guide plate 410 . Specifically, for example, a lens that absorbs light in a direction other than the front direction and irradiates only the light in the front direction to the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c may be used.

<Modification 27>
In the first embodiment, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured to have the same shape. The lenses 423 and 425 are configured to diffuse the light at the same angle with respect to the light irradiated thereon. On the other hand, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are formed so that the diffuser portions 425a and the like have different shapes. It may be configured such that the angle of the diffused light differs between the two. With this configuration, light is guided from various directions into the rear light guide plate 420, light is comprehensively guided into the rear light guide plate 420, and all the first decorations are guided. The pattern group 421 can be lit appropriately. Further, by making the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 different, the first decorative pattern group The lighting (luminous) display of 421 can be given randomness, and the monotonous luminous display of the first decorative pattern group 421 can be suppressed.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, in the rear lower diffuser lens 425, the leftward diffuser 425a, the frontward diffuser 425b, and the rightward diffuser 425c are commonly formed in all of the concave portions. The rear lower diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end is also configured to have a rightward diffusion portion 425c or a leftward diffusion portion 425a. On the other hand, in the rear lower diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420, the right diffusion portion 425c or the left diffusion portion 425a is not formed, and the front diffusion portion 425b and the left diffusion portion 425b are not formed. The rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed only by the direction diffusion portion 425a, or the front direction diffusion portion 425b and the right direction diffusion portion 425c. By configuring in this way, the light is not diffused in the direction in which the first decorative pattern group 421 is not arranged, and the light emitted from each LED 424 can be emitted to the rear light guide plate 420 without waste.

<Modification 29>
In the above-described first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 notify the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win in the variable performance, the decision lamp 311 reports the suggestion of the occurrence of the big win in the variable performance, and the respective suggestions are provided by different display devices. was configured to run On the other hand, one display device, for example, one light guide plate, one drum display device 81, or one liquid crystal display device may be configured to perform the jackpot expectation degree suggestion and the jackpot occurrence suggestion. In this case, when the execution timings of the jackpot generation suggestion and the jackpot expectation degree suggestion are combined, the execution region of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion being executed is set as in the case where the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed. It is preferable to scale back and execute the jackpot occurrence suggestion.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front side light guide plate 410 and the rear side light guide plate 420 are arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the third pattern. It was configured to execute the advance notice production. On the other hand, one or a plurality of movable accessories such as a shutter accessory may be arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the movable accessory may be configured to execute the notice effect in the variable effect.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is displayed as an effective line. was configured as On the other hand, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be drivable, and the display area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 may be configured to be variable to change the number of effective lines. .

<Modification 32>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the game board 13 when viewed from the front (on the lower side of the first starting port 64a when viewed from the front), and the variable winning device 65 has a big winning port 65a which can be opened and closed only when a big win is made. was provided, and only the function as a winning device for game balls was installed. On the other hand, in the variable winning device 65, a first special symbol lamp variably displayed corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol capable of informing the execution status of the variable performance of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol lamp. A second special symbol lamp variably displayed corresponding to the variable performance, a first reserved number lamp corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern, a second reserved number lamp corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol, and a game ball. A so-called fourth pattern display such as a shooting mode notification lamp (so-called right-handed notification lamp) that suggests the shooting mode to the player, an error notification lamp that notifies the player that the pachinko machine 10 is not able to execute a normal game, etc. A function such as a device or a game situation suggesting device may be added. With this configuration, the game status can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65. Therefore, even if the drum display device 81 or various notification lamps, etc., malfunction, the variable winning device 65 can The notification function makes it possible to accurately suggest the game situation and the like to the player. In addition, the variable prize winning device 65, the through gate 67 and the second starting port 64b are arranged on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front so that the game state advantageous to the player (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state") can be achieved. ), in the case of a pachinko machine that allows the player to play a so-called right-handed game, by adding functions such as a so-called fourth symbol display device and a game situation suggesting device to the variable winning device 65, the above-mentioned game By confirming the variable winning device 65 in the state, it is possible to concisely suggest the game content (result) to the player.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in the same shape. On the other hand, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 may have different shapes. Specifically, for example, the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are different angles. The shape of the upper side diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are configured. With this configuration, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 overlap with each other, resulting in randomness and unexpectedness. A lighting display of a certain decorative pattern can be realized, and various effects can be executed.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment, the optical path widths of the light emitted from the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c forming one concave portion of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are the same. , the side lengths of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c are formed. On the other hand, the optical path widths of the light emitted from the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c may be different. Specifically, for example, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c have the same side length (for example, all 50 μm), and the light emitted from the front diffusion portion 425b and the optical path widths of the light emitted from the left-direction diffusion portion 425a and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c. By configuring in this way, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusing portions 425a to 425c, and it is possible to realize an unexpected lighting display of decorative patterns, and various effects can be performed.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 are arranged so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated. had configured. On the other hand, an LED corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (for example, the front right LED 415c) is arranged only on one side (for example, right direction), and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit and displayed. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the installation cost of the LED can be reduced.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, in order to light up and display the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 on the front light guide plate 410, the condensing lenses 414d, 415d and 416d were arranged. On the other hand, at least one condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d is not arranged, and depending on the part, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is The front light guide plate 410 may be directly irradiated with the light without passing through such as. In particular, LEDs corresponding to areas where there is little need to collect light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c (for example, decorative patterns in which different decorative patterns are not adjacent to each other (that is, the fourth decorative pattern group 413)) is constructed without a condenser lens. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the condensing lens in a portion where inconsistency in performance is unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts of the light guide unit 400, and reduce the manufacturing cost.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 are formed on the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion, respectively. , 425 to light up the first decorative pattern group 421 . On the other hand, the diffusing lens 425 is formed only on one of the end faces (for example, the lower end face of the rear lower flat plate portion), and the diffusion lens 425 is formed on the other end face (for example, the upper end face of the rear upper flat plate portion). The first decorative pattern group 421 may be illuminated only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on the one end surface without forming the lens. By configuring in this way, the number of parts of the light guide unit 400 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the two light guide plates 440 and 450, the second front light guide plate 440 having the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second front light guide plate 440, The light guide unit 400 is formed by the second rear light guide plate 450 and the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450 a which is the only R-shaped portion in the rear light guide plate 450 . On the other hand, as the light guide unit 400, the front light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has a regular R-shaped portion as the only R-shaped portion (that is, the same direction as the front side outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81). ), and a reverse R-shaped portion (that is, the front side outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 and A rear light guide plate having a reverse R-shaped portion) may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to form a predetermined space between the upper flat plate portions of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate. By constructing the movable accessory so that it can be executed, the light guide unit 400 and another production device can execute various productions, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 each having the sole R-shaped portion are provided on the lower side of the drum display device 81 . On the other hand, a light guide plate having only one R-shaped portion may be provided on the upper side, the left side, or the right side of the drum display device 81 .

<Modification 39>
In the above-described second embodiment, the two light guide plates 440 and 450 are each configured to have an R-shaped portion. On the other hand, only one of the light guide plates 440, 450 is formed with an R-shaped portion, and the other light guide plate 450, 440 is not formed with an R-shaped portion. good too. Also, it may be configured to execute various effects using only one light guide plate having one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 (second rear lower decorative pattern 453) provided on the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a) is In order to light up, the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) is arranged below the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a). rice field. On the other hand, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 (second rear upper decorative pattern 452) may be configured to be lit by the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451). By configuring in this way, restrictions on the arrangement of the LEDs in the light guide unit 400 can be relaxed, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

<Modification 41>
In the above-described first embodiment, two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided. It is configured to emit light through lenses 423 and 425 . Further, in the third embodiment, one light guide plate 470 is provided, and light is emitted to the light guide plate 470 through condensing lenses 475b and 476b and through a diffuser lens 473. had configured. On the other hand, if two light guide plates are provided, one light guide plate may be provided with only one condenser lens, a plurality of condenser lenses, or one , a combination of a plurality of diffusion lenses, a condensing lens and a diffusion lens, or no condensing lens and no diffusion lens, and one condensing lens for the other light guide plate. Only a plurality of condenser lenses, only one diffuser lens, a plurality of diffuser lenses, a combination of a condenser lens and a diffuser lens, or neither a condenser lens nor a diffuser lens may be used to irradiate light. . Further, when one light guide plate is provided, only one condensing lens, a plurality of condensing lenses, or one diffusing lens may be provided for the light guide plate according to the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit. Only a combination of a plurality of diffuser lenses, a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or no condensing lens and no diffusing lens may be used to irradiate the light. With this configuration, a desired lighting display can be performed for the decorative pattern on the light guide plate by appropriately adopting a condenser lens or a diffusing lens according to the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit. , the performance effect of the light guide plate can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 41>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, "chance" symbols are arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR to create a game of whether or not the "chance" will stop. On the other hand, it is also possible to construct the symbol arrangement only with number symbols without arranging the "chance" symbols on the respective reels LR, CR and RR. By configuring in this way, the acceleration/deceleration pattern and constant speed pattern necessary to skip the "chance" pattern when the "chance" pattern is arranged in the fluctuation element of the "pseudo fluctuation" and at the time of full rotation It is possible to simplify pattern control such as change of fluctuation time scale and fine adjustment of slip return, and to share the acceleration/deceleration pattern, fluctuation time and slip return variation of each reel LR, CR, RR. It is possible to reduce the control burden of symbol control of each reel LR, CR, RR.

<Modification 42>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo-stop symbol in the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element has been described. On the other hand, the symbol control of the pseudo stop symbol may be adopted in a re-lottery effect or a full rotation effect in which the big winning symbol changes during the variable effect. By configuring in this way, the symbol control pattern in the re-lottery effect and the pattern control pattern in the "full rotation" effect can be simplified, and the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 43>
In the above fifth to seventh embodiments, symbol control and sound output control in the "full rotation" effect have been described. On the other hand, the symbol control and the voice output control are changed to other variable elements in the variable production, such as the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the variable element of "re-variation", or any of the "reach display" It may be configured to be adopted in part of the production. By configuring in this way, by interlocking the symbol control and the voice output control in the variable performance, the discomfort based on the symbol control is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony of the auditory music, and the player in the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game without giving a sense of incongruity to the game, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Modification 44>
In the above-described first embodiment, the reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged with "chance" symbols, which are symbols that develop into one of the "ready-to-win displays" without giving a big win just by being aligned. On the other hand, in each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, the pattern arrangement is composed only of number patterns that can directly give a big win when aligned without arranging "chance" patterns that do not directly give a big win. may By constructing in this way, when performing a so-called pattern step-up effect at the time of the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" and the effect of the "full rotation", the pattern control can be performed without considering the "chance" pattern. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the symbol control.

<Modification 45>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the middle reel CR is arranged with the "345" symbols that are not arranged on the other reels LR and RR. On the other hand, the middle reel CR may also have the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, and may be arranged without special symbols such as the "345" symbol. By configuring in this way, when performing a so-called symbol step-up effect at the time of the variable element of "pseudo-variation" and the effect of "full rotation", symbol control can be performed without considering the "345" symbol. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the symbol control.

<Modification 46>
In the above-described fifth to seventh embodiments, the output and non-output of music are alternately performed for each temporary stop during the "full rotation" presentation. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined music piece is continuously output during the "full rotation" effect, and another music piece is output in accordance with each temporary stop and rotation start.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted by the LEDs 414 c or the like is incident from either end of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 . On the other hand, for example, a predetermined concave portion is provided in the flat plate portion or the R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the concave portion is irradiated with light, so that the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 It may be configured to irradiate light toward the inside of the light guide plate 420 and guide the light to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design such as the arrangement of the LEDs 414c.

<Modification 48>
In the upper first embodiment, the reels LR, CR, RR are rotated by a drum display device 81 having the reels LR, CR, RR as display means (effect means). It was configured to execute the variation performance of the third symbol attached to the RR. On the other hand, a rotating belt type reel mechanism composed of a plurality of belt members wound around a plurality of pulleys in a loop and printed with a plurality of third patterns rotates each of the belt members. , the variation effect of the third pattern attached to each belt member may be executed.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated in order from the right end in front view to the left side in front view, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 moves from the right side in front view to the left side in front view. It was configured to execute a production as if it were moving. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 are lit up sequentially from the right end of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view to the left in the front view, and the LEDs 422c and 424 are lit up in order from the left end of the rear light guide plate 420 to the right in the front view. It may be displayed, and an effect may be executed as if the first decorative pattern group 421 were to move from both ends of the rear light guide plate 420 toward the center.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, that is, when the lighting display of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the lighting display by the confirmation lamp 311 can be performed at the same time In order to clearly execute the performance by the definite lamp 311 which is highly important for the game (indicating that the degree of the big hit base is high), the performance area of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, a predetermined priority order (for example, high or low level of effect expectation, size or small size of effect execution area, early order of effect) speed or slowness, length or shortness of performance time, amount of suggestive information (information to be transmitted to the player) may be configured to be preferentially executed (by reducing other effects). By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the performance to which priority should be given based on the predetermined rules set in advance.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 414c and the like is condensed by the condensing lenses 414d and the like, and the light whose directivity is enhanced by the condensing lenses 414d and the like is directed substantially in front of the LEDs 414c and the like. It is configured to irradiate the front light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c and the like is configured to emit light toward the front light guide plate 410 with higher directivity than when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LEDs 414c and the like. good too. Specifically, for example, using a condensing lens capable of diffusing the light in the front direction of each LED 414c and the diagonal direction of the front direction (for example, about ±15 degrees), the light from each LED 414c etc. is condensed. Also, the light may be slightly diffused to irradiate the front light guide plate 410 .

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the diffusion lenses 425 and the like diffuse the light emitted from the LEDs 424 and the like, and the light whose diffusivity is enhanced by the diffusion lenses 425 and the like is diffused from the LEDs 424 and the like in the front direction. The light is guided in three directions: the left direction tilted about 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the right direction tilted about 20 degrees to the right from the front direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 424 and the like may be guided through the rear light guide plate 420 with a higher degree of diffusion than when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LEDs 424 and the like. good. Specifically, for example, the front direction of each LED 424, etc., the left direction inclined within about 15 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the right direction inclined to the right within about 15 degrees from the front direction. A diffuser lens capable of diffusing light may be used for diffusing the light from each LED 424 or the like to irradiate the rear light guide plate 420 .

<Modification 53>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the variation element of "pseudo variation" is not executed in the pattern including the "4" symbols included in the "345" symbols arranged only on the middle reel CR. That is, the non-common "4" symbols such as "2"→"3"→"4", "3"→"4"→"5", and "4"→"5"→"6" are directly In addition to skipping non-common "4" patterns such as "2" → "3" → "5" and "3" → "5" → "6" ( omitted), and it was configured not to execute the variation element of the "pseudo variation" in the pattern indirectly including the "4" symbol. On the other hand, although the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the pattern directly including the non-common "4" symbol is not executed, "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5"→"6", etc., which indirectly includes a non-common "4" symbol, may be configured to be executed as a variation element pattern of "pseudo variation". In this case, a pattern that does not include the "4" pattern is stored in advance, and the amount of pattern variation (fluctuation) is different from the pattern that changes in order (for example, "1" → "2" → "3"). Therefore, although pattern control different from the permuted pattern control is required, it is possible to increase the variety of variation elements of the "pseudo variation" and improve the interest of the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the probability of winning the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed. However, the probability setting value can be changed. The number of stages is not limited to six, and may be changed to any stage.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of changing the big win probability by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol winning probability and the small winning winning probability may be changed.

Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is set. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. , the setting change processing is executed to change the probability setting value to the person concerned with the hall, etc., the person concerned with the hall etc. is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is normal. Certain probability settings within a range may be forced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As explained above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate the hall staff or the like without opening the substrate box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the probability of a big win or the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) It is possible to change the setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

In each of the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", "7,341,555,777,831" as the jackpot random number and "77,175" as the small hit random number , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low-probability state and the high-probability state) continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently being awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from setting values "1" to "3", the jackpot random number value is increased by "2", while from setting values "4" to "6", the jackpot random number value is "5". increase by increments. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured so that a setting difference is caused by the change.

In the above-described embodiment, the number of executions of each special symbol in the "time shortening state" is counted by using the time saving counter common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, using a special figure 2 time-saving counter that counts only the number of fluctuation productions of the second special symbol, and a total time-saving counter that counts the total number of fluctuation productions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol " It may be configured to count the number of execution times of dynamic display of each special symbol in the "time shortening state" to determine the termination condition of the "time shortening state", or only the number of times of variation performance of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 hour-saving counter that counts is provided, and the "time shortening state" may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, and the termination condition of the "time shortening state" may be determined. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, it may be configured to execute each special symbol in the order in which the dynamic display was acquired (in the order in which it was suspended), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be replaced by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be executed with higher priority.

In the above-described embodiment, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the big hit random number) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount of the random number that gives the other game value (for example, the small hit random number) ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "the range of the random number values that fail." Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increase in the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, while making the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers common to all set values, the increment of the jackpot random number accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", and "losing random number range". was On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in descending order (or ascending order) of the number of random numbers.

In the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", and "losing random number range". was On the other hand, the "range of jackpot random numbers" that increases with the setting change is stipulated (set ). Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increment of the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number value), and according to the setting change The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging the success or failure of the small hit, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increase in the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (up 10 times). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbols. Also, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times, and the small win probability is also 5 times). good.

In the second embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol , the winning probability of the small winning game may be configured to be the same.

In the above-described embodiment, the so-called loop-type game specification is used to maintain the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big win occurs when the "probability fluctuation state" is entered. On the other hand, even if any jackpot is won after the jackpot ends, a game in which a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) is given as a termination condition for executing dynamic display a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends. May be configured according to specifications. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the enhancement of the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, all setting values are configured so that the jackpot probability is evenly increased (everything is increased by 10 times) when changing from the low probability state to the high probability state of the special symbols. On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each setting value (for example, setting value "1" is five times, setting value "2" is six times, ... setting value "6" is ten times, etc.). It may be configured as By configuring in this way, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a state with a high probability of special symbols, so that the phenomenon itself of quickly winning a big win game in a high probability state is a setting suggestion. Therefore, it is possible to create a game of how quickly a jackpot can be won in a high-probability state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the big hit random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increased amount of the big hit random number value may be compensated from the small winning random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to supplement from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 for the change of the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, when there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion performance", the "setting suggestion performance" is performed at another timing (ending performance). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the ``setting suggestion performance'', the ``setting suggestion performance'' may be executed in another round that exists in the big win. In this case, even though it was selected to execute the "setting suggestion effect" in a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, if the round does not exist, except for the round that matches the probability setting value It may be configured to perform the "setting suggestion effect" in another round.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggesting effect" is provided as an effect suggesting a probability set value that can be set in multiple stages, and the player is suggested in the "setting suggesting effect" based on the probability set value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest a plurality of stages of events that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 to the player based on the lottery results. For example, any state (stage) of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 provided in a plurality of stages (for example, "normal game state", "latency probability change state", "probability change state" and "time reduction state") may be suggested, it may be suggested which state (step) of multiple stages of production, or it is configured to suggest which state of multiple stages of jackpot expectations. may

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after there is As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Also, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, the variation start flag may be set to ON. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is displayed to the display control device 114 based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 can cause the drum display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command. . In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the drum display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above-described embodiment, the drum display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous notice effect, or a fourth pattern display device separate from the drum display device 81 may be provided, and the drum display device 81 may execute the continuous notice effect. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the fluctuation effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or may be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 . Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a role that operates according to various effects, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by activating the role in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

More specifically, as the fourth symbol display device, a first special symbol lamp that is variably displayed corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol A symbol lamp, a first reservation number lamp corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second reservation number lamp corresponding to the second special symbol are provided, and the first reservation number lamp is provided according to the winning to the first start port 64a. lighting control (e.g., increase/decrease display according to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol), and lighting control of the second pending number lamp according to the winning of the second start port 64b (e.g., the second special symbol increase or decrease display according to the number of pending balls), and along with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (to correspond) lighting control of the first special symbol lamp (for example, the first special flashing display of the symbol lamp), and along with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (to correspond) lighting control of the second special symbol lamp (for example, the second special symbol lamp flashing). Thus, in the fourth symbol display device, by informing the type of the special symbol being executed, etc., it is possible to suggest the execution mode of the variable effect to the player.

As a result, every time the drum display device 81 (and the special pattern display device 37) performs a variable effect, the pattern is continuously displayed on the fourth pattern display device, the accessory operates in a predetermined manner, By outputting a sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be made to expect a big win. In addition, the player usually continues the game while watching the drum display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the fourth pattern display device separate from the drum display device 81 displays patterns and accessories. A continuous announcement effect is performed by operation, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting/flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the player can easily notice that the effect different from usual is performed. can be recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. By making the main control device 110 perform the winning judgment and the lottery processing at the start of the variation, the voice lamp control device 113 performing the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 performing the variation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

Display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the drum display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character in a predetermined manner, sound output from the sound output device 226, Also, at least two or more of lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous announcement effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the drum display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or By changing the combination of them), a plurality of continuous announcement performance modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement performance (10R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, loss) may be prepared. .

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is displayed when the change effect is finished. As the stop symbols to be played, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. , and other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the variation is stopped. If the drum display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable effect, it is possible to make the player expect to finally get a big win.

In the above embodiment, main controller 110 sets the number of pending balls to which "1" is added when there is a winning (starting winning) to first start port 64a or second start port 64b. The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 for the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is in the variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the pending ball number command is received, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where two starting holes, the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as the starting holes for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered will be described. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. If there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port. You may make it count the number. In addition, for each starting opening, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the corresponding starting opening may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the command for the number of pending balls sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify that the suspension has been performed with the winning of the starting port It may also include information indicating whether a hold has been made by winning a prize in the starting port. Also, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is suspended. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command When the number of held balls is set to , and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing by 1 a counter for the number of retained balls for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning of each starting hole (starting winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start-up winning to any start-up opening is may include information indicating whether Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to which starting port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area is prepared for each start opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main controller 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start opening is stored. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start opening that detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 for each starting port. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won the start prize, in the look-ahead process, whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variation effect, It is possible to correctly determine a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a loss type in the case of a loss, and the like, based on which start opening the winning prize is. In addition, when the variable performance based on the start winning to the one starting port is given priority to the variable performance based on the starting winning to the other starting port, the variation based on the starting winning to the one starting port Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of suspension times of the fluctuation performance that will be the most recent big win can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 for the value of each counter obtained based on the starting winning to the starting port. When the start of the performance is determined, the continuous announcement performance may be executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize was awarded. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of starting openings, and in which a variable performance for winning one starting opening is preferentially executed over a variable rendering for winning a prize at another starting opening, The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of the prefetching of the counter value obtained for the prize winning at the starting port where the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the prize winning to the start port with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. Supposing that the continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting point with low priority, and the variable effect is constantly suspended at the starting point with high priority, the continuous warning effect ends soon. It is possible that there will be a situation where you do not. On the other hand, in this modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the starting port with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not determined for this variable effect. is not started, so you can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b can be displayed numerically in a part of the drum display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas can be displayed as reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) for a few minutes, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. It may be configured to

In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical reel driving by the drum display device 81, but horizontal reel driving by the drum display device 81. Alternatively, a pattern as identification information may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device by moving the pattern in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, majang ball, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

It should be noted that the slot machine is a well-known system in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, and the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to have a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then confirms and displays the identification information. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Group A: display multiple display parts by lighting one LED with a diffuser lens>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, light guide means (for example, rear a light guide plate 420);
A gaming machine A0 comprising: diffusion means for diffusing the light from the light emission means over the width of the light emission portion (for example, a diffuser lens 425 for the lower rear side).

According to the gaming machine A0, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, when the light-emitting means provided in the effect means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game is generated. becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The diffusing means diffuses the light from the light emitting means over the width of the light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the light-emitting part of the light-emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means having the light-guiding means, attention to the game can be enhanced. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A0,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A game machine A1 characterized by being integrally formed at a predetermined end portion of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. As a result, the light guiding means and the diffusing means are integrally formed in the rendering means to reduce the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The diffusion means is
At least, a first direction irradiation section (for example, a left direction diffusion section 425a) that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a predetermined first direction (for example, left direction), and a second direction different from the first direction ( For example, a second direction irradiation unit (for example, the front direction diffusion unit 425b) that irradiates in the front direction), and a multi-direction irradiation unit (for example, one concave portion of the rear lower diffusion lens 425). A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the multi-directional irradiation means provided in the diffusing means is provided with at least a first direction irradiation section that irradiates the light from the light emitting means in a first direction and a second direction irradiation section that irradiates the light in a second direction. be done. As a result, the predetermined information arranged in a plurality of directions can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. effective.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A2,
A gaming machine A3, wherein the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light emitting section is emitted while being diffused in two directions by the diffusion means. can be made visually recognizable accurately, and by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means having the light guide means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A4 comprising a plurality of said multi-directional irradiation means at said predetermined end.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusing means is provided with a plurality of multi-directional irradiation means at a predetermined end. As a result, the light beams can be bundled and diffused in the first direction and the second direction by each of the multi-directional irradiating means. can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the effect of the effect of the effect means having the light guide means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine A4,
The diffusion means is
A game machine A5 characterized in that a plurality of said multi-direction irradiation means are continuously formed at said predetermined end portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of multi-directional irradiation means are continuously formed in the diffusion means at a predetermined end. Thereby, even when the light emitting part of the light emitting means is arranged at any position on the predetermined end side, the light emitting part in the light guide means is illuminated by the multi-directional irradiation means continuously provided at the predetermined end. The light from the can be continuously diffused to make the predetermined information visible. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the light-emitting portions of the light-emitting means can be increased.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A5,
The multi-directional irradiation means is
a third direction irradiation section (for example, right direction diffusion section 425c) that irradiates the light from the light emitting means in a third direction (for example, right direction) different from the first direction and the second direction; A game machine A6, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the light from the light emitting means is irradiated in a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction by the third direction irradiation section provided in the multi-direction irradiation means. Thus, the predetermined information arranged in at least three directions can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means having the light guide means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In gaming machine A6,
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it does not cross the first direction and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third direction is configured so as not to cross the first direction and the second walking. As a result, the light emitted from at least the light-emitting portion is emitted while being diffused in three directions by the diffusion means, so that the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the light-emitting portion of the light-emitting means can be accurately visually recognized. There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means having the light guide means.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A7,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A8 characterized in that it is formed at least at two ends of the light guide means (for example, an upper end and a lower end of the rear light guide plate 420).

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least two end portions of the light guiding means are formed with the diffusing means, respectively. Accordingly, by diffusing the light from each of the plurality of end portions, the light can be diffused comprehensively with respect to the light guide means. Therefore, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the effect of the directing means having the light guiding means, attention to the game can be increased. There is

In gaming machine A8,
The diffusion means is
A predetermined first end of the light guide means (for example, the lower side end of the rear light guide plate 420) and a second end corresponding to the first end (for example, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420) A game machine A9 characterized in that it is formed in each of the side ends).

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusing means are formed at a predetermined first end of the light guiding means and a second end which is paired with the first end. Accordingly, by diffusing the light from one end portion and the end portion paired with the one end portion, the light can be diffused comprehensively with respect to the light guide means. Therefore, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means can be accurately visually recognized, and by enhancing the effect of the directing means having the light guiding means, attention to the game can be increased. There is

<Group B: Arrangement of a pattern on the optical path, arrangement of a pattern also in the part where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
A first light-emitting portion that emits light (for example, one LED of the lower rear LEDs 424) and a second light-emitting portion that is different from the first light-emitting portion (for example, another LED of the lower rear LEDs 424) a light emitting means (e.g. a lower LED unit) comprising;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, light guide means (for example, rear a light guide plate 420),
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B0 characterized by being formed at a position overlapping at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B0, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the rendering means is provided with a first light emitting section for emitting light and a second light emitting section different from the first light emitting section. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the predetermined information is formed at least at a position overlapping the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the light emitted from the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can accurately make the predetermined information visually recognizable, and the effect of the directing means having the light guide means can be enhanced to enhance the effect of the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
A first light-emitting portion that emits light (for example, one of the rear lower LEDs 424 or the front diffusion portion 425b of the rear lower diffusion lens 425) and a second light-emitting portion different from the first light-emitting portion (For example, another LED of the lower rear LED 424, or the left diffusion portion 425a or the right diffusion portion 425c of the rear lower diffusion lens 425) (for example, the lower LED unit 414) ,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the predetermined effect includes predetermined information related to the game (for example, a plurality of fish patterns in the first decorative pattern group 421, or A light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the fish pattern of 1) visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information is
A game machine B1 characterized by being formed at a position overlapping at least the optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B1, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the rendering means has a first light emitting part that emits light and a second light emitting part different from the first light emitting part, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is provided to the light guide means. is incident from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. The predetermined information is formed at least at a position overlapping the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the game machine by either the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine B1,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B2 characterized by having a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting portion or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the game machine by the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part, so that the effect of the presentation means having the light guide means is enhanced and the degree of attention to the game is enhanced. has the effect of increasing

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B3 characterized by having a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the game machine by the first light emitting part and the second light emitting part. There is an effect that the degree can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The predetermined information is
A game machine B4 characterized in that the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting portion and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting portion are formed in a position where they overlap.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section overlap. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the game machine by the first light emitting part and the second light emitting part. There is an effect that the degree can be increased.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The light emitting means
When light of a predetermined first emission color (for example, "red") is emitted from the first light emission section, a second emission color (for example, "blue") different from the first emission color is emitted from the second light emission section. A game machine B5 characterized by comprising: a different color light emitting means for emitting light of .

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the different-color light-emitting means provided in the light-emitting means emits light of a predetermined first emission color from the first light-emitting portion, light of a second emission color different from the first emission color is emitted from the second light-emitting portion. configured as As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors, the effect of the presentation means having the light guide means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine B5,
The predetermined information is
Consists of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion,
The different color light emitting means is
A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the first predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the first light emitting portion, and the second predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion. .

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is composed of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion. Then, the different-color light-emitting device irradiates the first predetermined portion with the light emitted from the first light-emitting portion, and irradiates the second predetermined portion with the light emitted from the second light-emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information can be lighted in different colors, and the predetermined information can be lighted in various display colors, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the performance means having the light guide means and increasing the attention to the game. have the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines B1 to B6,
a diffusing means (for example, a rear lower diffusion lens 425) for diffusing the light from the light emitting means beyond the width of the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusing means diffuses the light from the light emitting means over the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect of the directing means having the light guide means is enhanced. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine B7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A game machine B8 characterized by being integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. As a result, the light guiding means and the diffusing means are integrally formed in the effect means, thereby reducing the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the effect means.

<Group C: Sequential lighting of different LEDs for each area divided in a predetermined direction, moving display & colorful display>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group C was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
A first light emitting portion that emits light (for example, the right end LED of the rear lower LED 424), and a second light emitting portion arranged on the predetermined direction side from the first light emitting portion (for example, the right end of the rear lower LED 424) one LED on the left side of the LEDs), and a third light emitting portion arranged further on the predetermined direction side than the second light emitting portion (two LEDs on the left side of the right end LED of the rear lower LED 424). a light emitting means (e.g. a lower LED unit) comprising;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, light guide means (for example, rear a light guide plate 420),
A gaming machine C0 comprising a sequential lighting means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for sequentially lighting the light emitting means from a predetermined direction side.

According to the gaming machine C0, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the presentation means includes a first light emitting section that emits light, a second light emitting section that is arranged on the side of a predetermined direction from the first light emitting section, and a light emitting section further from the second light emitting section in a predetermined direction. and a third light emitting portion disposed on the side. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means are sequentially turned on from the predetermined direction side by the sequential lighting means. As a result, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means can be sequentially visually recognized from the predetermined direction side, and by enhancing the effect of the directing means having the light guiding means, attention to the game can be increased. It has the effect of being able to

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400, or light guide unit 400 and game board 13) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
At least, a first light emitting part that emits light (for example, the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420, or the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a), and a predetermined direction from the first light emitting part A light emitting means having a second light emitting portion (for example, the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, or the rear light guide plate 420) arranged on the (for example, left side in front view) side. (For example, the lower LED unit 414 or the game board 13);
When light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least the second light emitting portion), light guiding means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420),
Sequential light emitting means (for example, lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113, or the lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113) 1 decorative pattern group 421, lighting control of board first decorative pattern group 60a and board second decorative pattern group 60b).

According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the rendering means is provided with a first light emitting section for emitting light and a second light emitting section arranged on the predetermined direction side from the first light emitting section. Then, when light is emitted from the light emitting means to the light guiding means, the predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the sequential light emitting means sequentially emits light from the first light emitting section in the predetermined direction. As a result, the predetermined information provided in the effect means can be sequentially visually recognized in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting portion is arranged, and the effect of the effect of the effect means having the light guide means is enhanced. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine C1,
Sequential extinguishing means (for example, by the sound lamp control device 113) for sequentially extinguishing the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting part in the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means in the predetermined direction from the first light emitting part light-off control).

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sequential extinguishing means sequentially extinguishes the luminous means sequentially emitting light in the predetermined direction from the first luminous part by the sequential luminous means after the first light emission. As a result, after the predetermined information provided in the rendering means is sequentially made visible in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting unit is arranged, the predetermined information is sequentially made invisible or difficult to be visually recognized in the predetermined direction from the first light emitting unit. By doing so, it is possible to perform a powerful presentation as if the predetermined information were moving in a predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is arranged. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
The sequential light emitting means is
The gaming machine C3 is characterized by further comprising a luminous color takeover means for causing the luminous color emitted by the first luminous portion to emit light when the second luminous portion emits light.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second light-emitting section is caused to emit light by the light-emitting color takeover means provided in the light-emitting means in sequence, the first light-emitting section emits light in the light-emitting color. As a result, it is possible to perform a powerful presentation as if the predetermined information, which was visible in a predetermined luminescent color, moves in a predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is arranged. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any of game machines C1 to C3,
The sequential light emitting means is
A gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising at least a different-color light-emitting means for making the first light-emitting portion and the second light-emitting portion emit different colors.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the first light-emitting portion and the second light-emitting portion are configured to emit light of different colors by means of the different-color light-emitting means provided in the light-emitting means in sequence. As a result, it is possible to perform a colorful presentation as if the predetermined information, which is visible in a plurality of colors, moves in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is arranged. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In gaming machine C4,
The different color light emitting means is
After the first light-emitting portion emits light of a predetermined first light-emitting color (for example, “red”), the second light-emitting portion emits light of the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting portion emits light of the first light-emitting color. A gaming machine C5 characterized by emitting light in a second emission color (for example, "blue") different from the emission color.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the first light-emitting portion emits a predetermined first light-emitting color by the different-color light-emitting means, the second light-emitting portion emits light in the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting portion emits light in a color different from the first light-emitting color. Light is emitted in the second emission color. As a result, it is possible to perform a colorful presentation as if the predetermined information, which is visible in a plurality of colors, moves in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is arranged. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C5,
The directing means is
At least, a predetermined first effect means (for example, board surface first decorative pattern group 60a) provided in a game area forming member (for example, game board 13) in which game balls can flow down;
Second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420),
The sequential light emitting means is
A gaming machine C6 characterized by emitting light to the second effect means after emitting light to the first effect means.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the effect means, at least a predetermined first effect means is provided in the game area forming member through which the game ball can flow down, and dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means. A second effect means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the possible display means. Then, the light emitting means sequentially emits light to the first effect means, and then emits light to the second effect means. As a result, an integrated effect is executed by the first effect means in the game area forming member and the second effect means provided on the front side of the game machine of the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, A dynamic presentation of the identification information and a predetermined presentation by the predetermined information can be executed to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation means, thereby increasing the attention to the game.

In gaming machine C6,
The game machine C7 is characterized in that, as the predetermined information, the same kind of symbols are visibly displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the predetermined information, the same kind of pattern is displayed so as to be visually recognizable by the first effect means and the second effect means. Thus, by executing a series of integral performances by the first performance means and the second performance means, a powerful performance can be executed, and by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means, the degree of attention to the game is increased. has the effect of increasing

In gaming machine C7,
A game machine C8 characterized in that, as the predetermined information, one pattern is formed by the first effect means and the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the predetermined information, one pattern is formed by the first effect means and the second effect means. This suppresses the occurrence of a sense of incongruity when executing the performance straddling the first performance means and the second performance means, and executes a series of integral performances, thereby making it possible to execute a powerful performance. , there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The light guide means
A gaming machine C9 characterized in that the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end portion, the predetermined information provided on the light guide means can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation means having the light guide means and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C9,
a diffusing means (for example, rear-side lower diffuser lens 425) for diffusing the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the first light-emitting part or the second light-emitting part. C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C9, the following effects are produced. That is, the diffusing means diffuses the light from the light emitting means over the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect of the directing means having the light guide means is enhanced. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine C9 or C10,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusing means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means. As a result, the light guiding means and the diffusing means are integrally formed in the rendering means to reduce the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means.

<D group: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other effect>

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

The invention of Group D was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

First effect means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) that is more important for the game than the first effect as the game progresses,
The first production means is
a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, light guide means (for example, rear a light guide plate 420),
When the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is executed by the first effect means, the second effect is preferentially executed over the first effect. The game machine D0 is characterized by comprising performance priority means (for example, extinguishing the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D0, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. Further, the second effect means performs the second effect, which is more important for the game than the first effect, as the game progresses. Then, when the light emitting means provided in the first effect means has a light emitting portion for emitting light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, Predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Here, when the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is executed by the first effect means, the second effect is prioritized over the first effect by the second effect priority means. executed. Thus, even when the first performance and the second performance overlap, the second performance, which is more important than the first performance for the game, is preferentially executed to make the second performance more prominent than the first performance. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to clearly execute the performance content of the second performance, which is important for the game, to accurately suggest the information about the game to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

First effect means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses;
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the first effect reduction is performed by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. A game machine D1 characterized by comprising means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D1, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. Also, the second effect means performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the scale of effect of the first effect is reduced by the first effect reduction means. be done. Thus, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

It should be noted that "to reduce the size of the production" means, for example, when reducing the execution area of the production, or when reducing or reducing the size or amount of the pattern that appears as the production, the degree of attention (expectation for the jackpot ), lowering the light emission brightness of the effect (increasing the transparency), lowering the volume of the effect, or executing other effects preferentially (on the front side). A case where it becomes relatively difficult to see by doing so is exemplified.

In gaming machine D1,
The second production is
The game machine D2 is characterized by an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded than the first effect.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded than the first effect. This will
Even when the first performance and the second performance are executed in parallel, the scale of the performance of the first performance with a lower expectation of giving a predetermined game value than the second performance is reduced, By executing the 2nd effect preferentially, the 2nd effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to clearly execute the performance contents of the second performance, which is important for the game, to accurately suggest the information about the game to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
A first effect lottery means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d) that randomly determines whether or not to execute the first effect;
A second effect lottery means (for example, a fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the second effect;
A first effect for determining whether or not to execute the first effect based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means when the second effect is executed based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means. A determination means (for example, a light guide pattern setting process (S1415)),
The first effect reduction means is
A game machine D3, wherein the scale of the first effect is reduced when it is determined by the first effect determining means that the first effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect lottery means selects whether or not to execute the first effect, and the second effect lottery means selects whether or not to execute the second effect. Further, when the second effect is executed based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means, whether or not to execute the first effect is determined by the first effect determination means based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means. be discriminated. Then, when the first effect determination means determines that the first effect is to be executed, the first effect reduction means reduces the effect scale of the first effect. As a result, even if the first performance and the second performance for which the execution lottery is separately performed can be executed in parallel, the performance of the first performance depends on whether or not the first performance is executed. By reducing the scale, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, there is an effect that at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3,
The first production is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it can be executed in an area wider than the effect area of the second effect.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect can be executed in an area wider than the effect area of the second effect. That is, even when the second effect and the first effect having a wider effect area than the second effect are executed in parallel, the scale of the effect of the first effect to be executed is reduced. The second effect can be made more conspicuous because the effect scale of the effect is reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4,
The first production means is
a light-emitting means including a first light-emitting portion that emits light (for example, the rear lower LED 424) and a second light-emitting portion that emits light (for example, the rear upper LED 422c);
As the first effect, at least when light is emitted from either one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit, illuminated means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes it easier to visually recognize predetermined information related to the game 420) and
The first effect reduction means is
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the light from either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit The game machine D5 is characterized by comprising an irradiation reduction means for reducing or stopping irradiation of light to reduce a visible range of the predetermined information.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the first rendering means, light is emitted from the first light emitting portion provided in the light emitting means, and light is emitted from the second light emitting portion also provided in the light emitting means. Further, as a first effect, at least when light is emitted from either the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion, predetermined information regarding the game is easily visually recognized by the irradiated means. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the irradiation reduction means provided in the first effect reduction means causes the first light emitting unit Alternatively, the irradiation of light from either one of the second light emitting units is reduced or stopped, and the visible range of the predetermined information is reduced. Thereby, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the irradiation of light from either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit used for the first effect is reduced or By stopping and reducing the visible range of the predetermined information as the first effect, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, there is an effect that at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Note that "to reduce or stop the irradiation of light" means, for example, when reducing the light emission area, when reducing the light emission luminance, when stopping or interrupting the light emission, or when the light emission time is reduced, or light is emitted intermittently.

In gaming machine D5,
The irradiation reduction means is
A game machine D6 characterized by reducing or stopping light irradiation from said first light emitting section or said second light emitting section corresponding to said predetermined information on said second effect means side.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the irradiation reduction means reduces or stops the irradiation of the light from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section corresponding to the predetermined information on the side of the second rendering means. By reducing the visible range of the predetermined information on the side of the second effect means among the predetermined information, at least the first effect executed in the vicinity of the second effect is made inconspicuous, and the second effect is relatively conspicuous. can let Therefore, there is an effect that at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine D5 or D6,
The irradiated means is
a light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means;
a diffusing means (for example, rear-side lower diffuser lens 425) for diffusing the light from the first light-emitting portion or the second light-emitting portion beyond the width of the first light-emitting portion or the second light-emitting portion; A gaming machine D7 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5 or D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when light is emitted from the light emitting means by the light guiding means as the irradiated means, the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Then, the diffusion means diffuses the light from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section over the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect of the directing means having the light guide means is enhanced. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine D7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A game machine D8 characterized by being integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. As a result, the light guiding means and the diffusing means are integrally formed in the rendering means to reduce the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means.

<Group E: One light guide plate for weak and medium notices, another light guide plate for high notice display>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group E was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
first suggestion information (for example, fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded based on the determination result by the determination means; Second suggestive information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded is high, or the predetermined game value is awarded from the second suggested information. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for lottery execution of any of the third suggestion information (for example, first decorative pattern group 421) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation of the player is high;
a first effect means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A gaming machine E0 comprising a second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) capable of executing the third suggestive information based on a lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means.

According to the gaming machine E0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given based on the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined game value is obtained from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation to be granted is high, or third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation of being granted a predetermined game value is higher than the second suggestion information. Any run of information is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information is configured to be executable by the first effect means, and similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the second effect is produced. The means configures the third suggestion information to be executable. As a result, the third suggestive effect, which is capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information, is generated. By performing by a different rendering means than the first suggesting rendering and the second suggesting rendering capable of suggesting that the given degree of expectation is low, if it is erroneously executed due to noise or malfunction, there is a large effect inconsistency. 3 Abnormal execution of suggestive information can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) that randomly selects execution of suggestion by suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determination means,
The suggestive information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, and the first suggestion information. second suggestive information (for example, a third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player is high; third suggestive information (for example, first decorative pattern group 421) that can be suggested to a person,
a first effect means (for example, the front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c, etc.) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A game characterized by comprising a second effect means (for example, the rear light guide plate 420 and each LED 424, etc.) capable of executing the third suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means. Machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. In addition, the suggestive information lottery means draws lots for execution of suggestion by the suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, based on the result of determination by the determining means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and an expectation degree that a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information capable of suggesting that the game value is high to the player, and third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for the given game value to be given is higher than that of the second suggestion information are provided. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information is configured to be executable by the first effect means, and similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the second effect is produced. The means configures the third suggestion information to be executable. As a result, the third suggestive effect, which is capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information, is generated. By performing by a different rendering means than the first suggesting rendering and the second suggesting rendering capable of suggesting that the given degree of expectation is low, if it is erroneously executed due to noise or malfunction, there is a large effect inconsistency. 3 Abnormal execution of suggestive information can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine E1,
The first production means is
a first light emitting unit (for example, the front right LED 415c or the front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left direction in front view or the right direction in front view);
a second light-emitting portion (e.g., front-lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., an upward direction in front view);
When the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is the A first light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident from a second portion different from the first portion,
The first light guide means
First emission in which the light emitted in the first direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine and the light emitted in the second direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine part (for example, vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
Second emission in which the light emitted in the second direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine and the light emitted in the first direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine (for example, horizontal grooves forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern group 412 or each cherry tree pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first light emitting portion provided in the first effect means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting portion provided in the first effect means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Light is emitted in one direction. Further, when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident on the first light guide means from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine, and the second light emitting portion When the light emitted from is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestive information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light emitted in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the game machine by the first emitting portion provided in the first light guide means, and is emitted in the second direction. The light is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is hardly emitted. In addition, the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the game machine by the second emitting portion provided in the first light guide means, and is emitted in the first direction. The light is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is hardly emitted. That is, in the first rendering means, the light from the first direction makes the first suggestive information visible while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, and the light from the second direction makes the second suggestive information visible. By making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to see while making it possible, a plurality of suggestive information can be represented even by one first effect means. As a result, even when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the first rendering means, each piece of suggestive information can be discriminated and visually recognized by controlling light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. By making it possible to express a plurality of suggestive information in the first presentation means, the presentation effect of the first presentation means is heightened, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine E2,
The first effect means has at least
Directivity improving means for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting portion or the second light-emitting portion (for example, the front lower condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, or the front left LED 416c ), a gaming machine E3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the first rendering means. Accordingly, even when a plurality of suggestive information are provided in the first rendering means, only the suggestive information of the irradiation target can be accurately visually recognized. Therefore, in the case where the second suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information, is executed by the same first effect means as the first suggestion information. Also, by controlling light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, each piece of suggestive information can be discriminated and made visible. As a result, it is possible to accurately make the desired suggestive information visually recognizable, and by accurately suggesting the game-related information to the player, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The second effect means is
a third light-emitting portion that emits light (for example, the rear lower LED 424);
Second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes only the third suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the third light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined third portion 420) and
A gaming machine E4 comprising a diffusing means (for example, rear-side downward diffusion lens 425) for diffusing the light from the third light-emitting portion over the width of the third light-emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when light is emitted from the third light emitting section as the second rendering means and the light emitted from the third light emitting section is incident from the predetermined third portion, the second light guiding means generates the third suggestive information. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the diffusion means diffuses the light from the third light emitting section through the width of the third light emitting section. As a result, in the second light guide means provided with only one piece of suggestive information, the light emitted from the third light emitting section is diffused beyond the width of the third light emitting section. can radiate light over a wider area. As a result, for example, even when the third suggestive information is provided large in the second light guide means, the third suggestive information can be accurately made visible, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means. By increasing the effect, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine E4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine E5 characterized by being formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second effect means, the second light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed to reduce the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the second effect means. There is

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E5,
The first effect means and the second effect means are
A gaming machine E6 characterized by being redundantly arranged with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first effect means and the second effect means are arranged overlappingly with respect to the front direction of the game machine. As a result, by making a plurality of pieces of suggestive information visible in one rendering area, the rendering effect of the rendering means is enhanced, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine E6,
The first production means is
A game machine E7, characterized in that it is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect means is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the second effect means. That is, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion having a lower expectation than the third suggestion information that a predetermined game value is given to the front side of the game machine of the second effect means configured to allow the third suggestion information to be visually recognized. A first rendering means configured to allow information to be visually recognized is arranged. As a result, for example, even when light is emitted from the front side of the game machine by the indoor lighting of the game hall or the like, the amount of light arriving at the second effect means can be reduced by the first effect means, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress erroneous lighting of the third suggestive information, which is more affected by the production discrepancies than other suggestive information.

<F group: multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multi-directional area in one light guide plate (2 directions, bubble group), strong effect in few directions (weak effect in places where light paths overlap)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group F was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Based on the result of determination by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded, or the first suggestion information Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221 )When,
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The directing means is
First light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) for emitting light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left and right direction);
a second light emitting means (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end faces of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the downward end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when it is incident,
At least the second suggestive information is
A game machine F0 characterized in that the rendering means is provided at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded based on the determination result by the determining means, or a predetermined value from the first suggestive information. Execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a game value of . Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information can be executed by the effect means. Here, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by the first light emitting means provided in the effect means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by the second light emitting means also provided in the effect means. be irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine and is emitted from the second light emitting means. The second suggestive information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Here, in the rendering means, the second suggestive information is provided at least at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the second suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded is higher than the first suggestive information is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the light of the second light emitting means do not overlap. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the abnormal execution of the second suggestive information, which has a large effect inconsistency, when it is erroneously executed due to noise or malfunction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) that draws the execution of suggestion by suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determination means;
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The suggestive information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, and the first suggestion information. second suggestive information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for
a first light emitting unit (for example, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the horizontal direction);
a second light emitting unit (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the downward end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when it is incident,
The second suggested information is
In the light guide means, provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) A gaming machine F1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F1, the acquiring means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquiring means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determining means. In addition, the suggestive information lottery means draws lots for execution of suggestion by the suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, based on the result of determination by the determining means. Based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the suggestive information can be executed by the effect means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and an expectation degree that a predetermined game value will be given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestive information is provided that can suggest to the player that it is high. Then, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by the first light emitting section provided in the effect means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by the second light emitting part similarly provided in the effect means. be done. Further, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from the predetermined first part by the light guide means provided in the effect means, the first suggestive information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine, The second suggestive information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Here, the second suggestive information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guiding means. That is, the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information is emitted from at least one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. formed in a position that is visible only in the light that is applied. Accordingly, even when light is emitted from the first light emitting unit by mistake due to noise or malfunction, it is possible to prevent the second suggestive information, which has a large effect inconsistency, from becoming visible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The directing means has at least
Directivity improving means for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit (for example, the front right condenser lens 415d or the front left condenser lens 416d) is provided. Game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the effect means, the effect means produces at least the first suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for giving a predetermined game value is lower than that of the second suggestive information. To make it difficult or impossible to reach the position where the second suggestive information is provided by accurately irradiating the position where the first suggestive information is provided with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit even when executing Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The first suggested information is
In the light guide means, the position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the lower inverted R shape) A game machine F3 characterized by being provided in a part).

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggestive information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded is lower than the second suggestion information is light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the light for the second suggestion information makes the first suggestion information visible, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information with a high degree of expectation is made visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. . As a result, the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestive information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestive information intersects is the second level. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancies in performance are minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3,
The directing means is
A game machine F4 comprising a second directivity improving means (for example, front lower light collecting lens 414d) for improving the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of suggestive information are provided in the performance means, the performance means executes the second suggestive performance capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for giving a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestive information. Even in such a case, the second suggestive information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by accurately irradiating the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to the position where the second suggestive information is provided. There is an effect that the information can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3,
The directing means is
A game machine F5, characterized by comprising diffusion means (for example, a third upward diffusion lens 473) for diffusing the light emitted from the second light emitting section beyond the width of the second light emitting section.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the light emitted from the second light-emitting portion is diffused from the width of the second light-emitting portion by the diffusion means provided in the rendering means. Here, even if the light for the second suggestive information emitted from the second light emitting unit via the diffusion means makes the first suggestive information visible, the light for the second suggestive information is The second suggestion information with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be imparted than the first suggestion information is made visible, and when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the first suggestion information becomes visible. Even in the case of Accordingly, by diffusing the light from the second light emitting unit and irradiating the diffused light comprehensively on the second suggestive information, the second suggestive information can be clearly recognized. Even if the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize discrepancies in performance and provide a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines F1 to F5,
The light guide means
A first emission in which the light emitted in the first direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted in the second direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine. part (for example, vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
Second emission in which the light emitted in the second direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine and the light emitted in the first direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine (for example, horizontal grooves forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern group 412 or each cherry tree pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the second direction is It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. Further, the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the game machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted. It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. That is, the effect means makes the first suggestive information visible by the light from the first direction while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, and makes the second suggestive information visible by the light from the second direction. However, by making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, a plurality of suggestive information can be expressed even by one effect means. Thus, even when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the rendering means, each piece of suggestive information can be discriminated and made visible by controlling light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. By making it possible for the presentation means to express a plurality of pieces of suggestive information, the presentation effect of the presentation means is heightened, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<G group: multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multi-directional area in one light guide plate (2 directions, bubble group), minor direction positioned in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group G was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
Based on the result of determination by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded, or the first suggestion information Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221 )When,
production means (for example, front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The directing means is
First light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) for emitting light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left and right direction);
a second light emitting means (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end faces of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the downward end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when it is incident,
The display means is
A game machine G0 characterized in that the rendering means is arranged on the back side in a front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). .

According to the game machine G0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the suggestive information lottery means first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded based on the determination result by the determining means, or a predetermined value from the first suggestive information. Execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a game value of . Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information can be executed by the effect means. Here, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by the first light emitting means provided in the effect means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by the second light emitting means also provided in the effect means. be irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine and is emitted from the second light emitting means. The second suggestive information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Here, in the rendering means, the display means is provided at least on the back side in front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the display means for displaying the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the lights from the first light emitting means and the light from the second light emitting means do not overlap. As a result, even if the first light emitting means or the second light emitting means erroneously emits light due to noise or malfunction, the first indication due to the malfunction is displayed at the position where the display means indicating the result of the game is arranged. It is possible to reduce the probability that the information or the second suggestive information will be executed. As a result, there is an effect that the game-related information can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined game-related effect based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) that draws the execution of suggestion by suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determination means;
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggested information based on the lottery result of the suggested information lottery means;
The suggestive information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, and the first suggestion information. second suggestive information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for
a first light emitting unit (for example, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the horizontal direction);
a second light emitting unit (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the downward end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when it is incident,
The display means is
A game machine at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) in which the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means A gaming machine G1 characterized by being arranged on the rear side in a front view.

According to the gaming machine G1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect regarding the game. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determining means. Here, based on the determination result of the determining means, the suggestive information lottery means performs a lottery for execution of the suggestion by the suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and the suggestive information lottery means. Suggestion information is configured to be executable by the effect means based on the result of the lottery. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestive information is provided that can suggest to the player that it is high. Here, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by the first light emitting section provided in the effect means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by the second effect means also provided in the effect means. be irradiated. Then, when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from the predetermined first portion by the light guide means provided in the presentation means, the first suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, The second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Here, the display means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine in a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means. . Thus, by arranging the display means capable of executing a predetermined game-related effect on the back side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effect means do not intersect, By structuring the predetermined performance related to the game executed by the means so as not to hinder the performance, and by configuring the performance means so that the predetermined information can be visually recognized, the performance effects of the display means and the performance means are respectively enhanced, and the game is enhanced. There is an effect that the degree of attention can be increased.

In gaming machine G1,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result of the determination means;
a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving the game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means; , and
with
The display area is
A game machine at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) in which the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means The game machine G2 is arranged on the rear side in a front view.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely
The dynamic execution means performs dynamic display of the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means provides a predetermined display result. appears, a game value can be given to the player by the game value giving means. The display area of the display means is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine in a front view at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means. be done. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating whether or not to give a game value is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effect means do not intersect. By arranging the display means to be performed, the dynamic display performed by the display means is configured so as not to hinder the performance, and at the same time, the predetermined information indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given by the effect means is configured to be visible. By doing so, there is an effect that the performance effects of the display means and the performance means can be enhanced, respectively, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The directing means has at least
Directivity improving means for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit (for example, the front right condenser lens 415d or the front left condenser lens 416d) is provided. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the effect means, the effect means produces at least the first suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the player is less likely to expect a predetermined game value than the second suggestive information. To make it difficult or impossible to reach the position where the second suggestive information is provided by accurately irradiating the position where the first suggestive information is provided with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit even when executing Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3,
The first suggested information is
In the light guide means, the position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the lower inverted R shape) A game machine G4 characterized by being provided in a part).

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggestive information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded is lower than the second suggestion information is light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the light for the second suggestion information makes the first suggestion information visible, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information with a high degree of expectation is made visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. . As a result, the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestive information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestive information intersects is the second level. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancies in performance are minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4,
The second suggested information is
In the light guide means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) , a game machine G5, wherein the display means is provided on the front side of the game machine when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the second suggestive information is a position in the light guiding means at which the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect, and the display means is viewed from the front of the game machine. It is provided on the front side. As a result, the display means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game and the predetermined game effect are provided at a portion on the back side of the game machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effect means do not intersect. By enabling both the suggestive information indicating the degree of expectation to which the value is given, the predetermined effect and the suggestive information are configured to be visually recognizable within the same field of view, and the effect of the display means and the effect of the effect means are controlled respectively. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5,
The directing means is
A gaming machine G6, characterized by comprising a second directivity improving means (for example, a front lower light collecting lens 414d) for improving the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of suggestive information are provided in the performance means, the performance means executes the second suggestive performance capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for giving a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestive information. Even in such a case, the second suggestive information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by accurately irradiating the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to the position where the second suggestive information is provided. There is an effect that the information can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6,
The light guide means
A first emission in which the light emitted in the first direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted in the second direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine. part (for example, vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
Second emission in which the light emitted in the second direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine and the light emitted in the first direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine (for example, the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern group 412, or the lateral grooves forming each cherry tree pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the second direction is It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. Further, the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the game machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted. It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. That is, the effect means makes the first suggestive information visible by the light from the first direction while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, and makes the second suggestive information visible by the light from the second direction. However, by making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, a plurality of suggestive information can be expressed even by one effect means. Thus, even when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the rendering means, each piece of suggestive information can be discriminated and made visible by controlling light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. By making it possible for the presentation means to express a plurality of pieces of suggestive information, the presentation effect of the presentation means is heightened, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group H: One Light Guide Plate with Planar Shape and R Shape, Light Guided from Planar Portion in Both Shapes (Light Not Guided from R Shaped Portion)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The H group of inventions has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A bent shape portion (for example, an upper reverse R shape portion, a normal R shape portion, or a lower reverse R shape portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape portion,
The light emitting means
The game machine H0 is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat plate portion.

According to the gaming machine H0, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, when the light-emitting means provided in the effect means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game is generated. becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a curved portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped portion, and the light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. be done. As a result, light can be incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means, and predetermined information can be made visible, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the light emitting means. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest information related to the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first effect related to a game (for example, a variable effect of a third symbol);
A second effect means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing a second effect related to the first effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421);
The second effect means is
a light emitting means (for example, the lower LED unit 414) having a light emitting portion (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a front side guiding means) that makes predetermined information (for example, the second decorative pattern group 411) regarding the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine. a light plate 410);
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A front side portion (for example, an upper reverse R shape portion, a normal R shape portion, or a lower reverse R shape portion) formed continuously from the flat plate shape portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first effect means; with
The light emitting means
A gaming machine H1, characterized in that it is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat plate portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first effect means can execute the first effect related to the game, and the second effect means can execute the second effect related to the first effect. Further, the light emitting means provided in the second effect means is provided with a light emitting portion for emitting light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion by the light guide means also provided in the second effect means. In this case, the predetermined information regarding the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and positioned on the front side of the game machine from the first effect means. A light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the flat plate portion. That is, the light guide means is configured to receive light from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, not from a portion corresponding to the front side portion present on the front side of the first effect means. This is because when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the front side portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the front side portion, and it is difficult or impossible to express predetermined information in a desired manner. There is a risk. In addition, the light-emitting portion and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the front side part is located on the front side of the game machine of the first effect means, and when the light emitting part etc. are arranged so as to correspond to the front side part, the design of the second effect means (light guide means) There is a risk of restricting the degree of freedom. For this reason, in the second effect means having the front side part, the light is incident from the portion of the flat plate-shaped part that is not the front side part, thereby suitably solving the above problem and increasing the design freedom of the second effect means. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine H1,
The front side is
A gaming machine H2, characterized in that it is an external shape related portion related to the external shape of the first effect means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first effect means. This is because when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the traveling direction of the incident light is changed by the outer shape-related portion, and the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult. In addition, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the outer shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the outer shape related portion is located on the front side of the gaming machine of the first effect means, and when the light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape related portion, the second effect means (light guide means) There is a risk of restricting the degree of freedom of design. Thus, in the second rendering means having the outer shape related portion related to the outer shape of the first rendering means, the light is incident from the portion of the flat plate portion that is not the outer shape related portion, thereby suitably solving the above problem. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the second rendering means.

In gaming machine H1 or H2,
The first production means is
The game machine H3 is characterized by comprising display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means provided in the first effect means can dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. Thereby, when the outer shape related part of the second effect means for executing the second effect related to the dynamic display of the identification information is formed in a shape related to the outer shape of the display means capable of executing the dynamic display. In addition, in the second effect means having the external shape-related part, by allowing light to enter from the portion of the flat plate shape part, the above problem can be solved favorably, and the degree of freedom in designing the second effect means can be increased. effective.

In gaming machine H3,
The display means is
a reel (for example, a left reel LR) on which a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable are arranged on the peripheral surface;
a cylindrical rotating body (for example, the left reel unit 81a1) that can rotate around a rotating shaft that is concentric with the reel;
A game machine H4, comprising a driving means capable of rotationally driving the rotating body.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, the following effects are produced. That is, as the display means, a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified are arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. , the rotating body is configured to be rotatably driven by the driving means. That is, since the display means is formed in a cylindrical shape centering on the rotation axis in order to rotate the reel, the outer shape-related portion of the second effect means also has a shape related to the cylindrical shape (for example, a bent shape). ). In this case, when light is to be incident on the light guide means through the cylindrical outer shape-related portion, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the outer shape-related portion. It may be impossible or difficult to express. For this reason, in the second effect means having a cylindrical external shape-related part, by allowing light to enter from the portion of the flat plate-shaped part, the above problems can be preferably solved and the degree of freedom in design of the second effect means can be increased. has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines H1 to H4,
Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
The outer shape-related part is
As the second effect, first suggestion information (for example, a second decorative pattern group) as the predetermined information capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means 411) can be executed.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition means acquires the special information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. Here, in the outer shape related part, as the second effect, the first suggestive information as the predetermined information capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. configured as possible. As a result, while performing the first effect in the first effect means, the second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given is performed in the outer shape related part of the second effect means related to the outer shape of the first effect means. By constructing the first suggestion information to be executable, there is an effect that the effect of the first effect means and the effect of the second effect means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine H5,
The flat plate-shaped portion is
As the second effect, the second suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting that the degree of expectation of the player to be given a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestion information can be executed. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the flat plate-shaped portion, as the second effect, the second suggestion information capable of suggesting that the degree of expectation of the player to be given a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestion information is configured to be executable. As a result, by making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of suggestive information in the second effect means, the effect of the effect of the effect means is enhanced, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group I: R shape/reverse R shape, display 1 advance notice display until the switching point (design display area determination part), do not place a pattern at the part where the R shape switches>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group I was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A first bent shape portion (for example, an upward reverse R shape portion or a downward reverse R shape portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape portion;
A second bent shape portion (for example, a regular R shape portion) bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the first bent shape portion,
The predetermined information is
A game machine I0 characterized in that it is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first curved portion and the second curved portion.

According to the gaming machine I0, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, when the light-emitting means provided in the effect means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game is generated. becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guide means includes at least a predetermined flat plate portion, a first bent portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate portion, and a second bent portion bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the first bent portion. A curved portion is provided, and predetermined information is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first curved portion and the second curved portion. As a result, by not arranging the predetermined information at the switching portion between the first curved portion and the second curved portion where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guiding means may change irregularly, the light can be viewed from the front side of the game machine. It is possible to suppress unintended appearance of the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to make the expression of the predetermined information appropriate, execute an effect that does not cause any discrepancies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is

Effecting means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The directing means is
a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A first bent shape portion (for example, an upward reverse R shape portion or a downward reverse R shape portion) continuously formed from the flat plate shape portion and bent in a predetermined direction (for example, the front side of the game machine);
A second curved portion (eg, a regular R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the first curved portion and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (eg, the rear side of the game machine);
The light guide means
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding a switching portion (for example, a switching point P) between the first curved portion and the second curved portion.

According to the gaming machine I1, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect means as the game progresses. Further, when the light-emitting means provided in the effect means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game is generated. becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guide means includes at least a predetermined flat plate portion, a first curved portion continuously formed from the flat plate portion and bent in a predetermined direction, and a first curved portion continuously formed from the first curved portion. and a second bent shape portion formed and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Here, the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding the switching portion between the first curved portion and the second curved portion in the light guiding means. This is because the angle of reflection of the light guided in the light guiding means is not uniform on either surface of the light guiding means at the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, and the colliding light The amount of information tends to be sparse (coarse), and even if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching portion, the predetermined information is not expressed appropriately, and the predetermined information cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine at an appropriate timing. There is a risk. Further, the predetermined information is configured to be visible only by light from a predetermined direction, but if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching portion, it is originally not visible in a direction that would not be visible. Predetermined information may be visible from the front side of the game machine due to the irradiation of light, and there is a possibility that the predetermined information may be visually recognized at an unintended timing, resulting in a discrepancy in the content of the performance. Therefore, the predetermined information is not placed at the switching portion between the first curved portion and the second curved portion where the reflection of the light radiated into the light guiding means may change irregularly, and the position avoids the switching portion. By arranging the predetermined information in the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being unintendedly viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make the expression of the predetermined information appropriate, execute an effect that does not cause any discrepancies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is

In gaming machine I1,
The light guide means
A gaming machine I2, wherein first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate portion and the first curved portion.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first predetermined information as predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first curved portion of the light guiding means. The light guided through the flat plate portion of the light guiding means tends to have a uniform reflection angle, and even in the first curved portion continuously formed therefrom, the light guided from the flat plate portion Light is guided evenly. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by appropriately expressing the predetermined information and accurately suggesting the information regarding the game to the player.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
The light guide means
arranging second predetermined information (for example, second decorative pattern group 411) different from the first predetermined information in the second curved portion;
The second predetermined information is
A gaming machine I3 characterized by being arranged so as not to straddle the first curved portion.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the light guiding means, the second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second curved portion, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first curved portion. The light guided through the second curved portion of the light guiding means tends to have a stable reflection angle. As described above, the reflection angles are not uniform, and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse (coarse). Therefore, by appropriately expressing the second predetermined information arranged within the range of the second bent shape portion where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, and by accurately suggesting the game-related information to the player, There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine I3,
Predetermined information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that performs a lottery for execution of the suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result of the determination means,
The light guide means
Based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion by the predetermined information can be executed,
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to be capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first predetermined information,
The light emitting means
a first light emitting unit (for example, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the horizontal direction);
A second light emitting unit (e.g., front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., upward direction) different from the first direction,
The light guide means
When the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first predetermined information is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the downward end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) making the second predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident;
The directing means has at least
Directivity improving means for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit (for example, the front right condenser lens 415d or the front left condenser lens 416d) is provided. Game machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution of the suggestion based on the predetermined information is selected by the predetermined information lottery means based on the determination result of the determination means. Then, based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion by the predetermined information can be executed by the light guiding means. In addition, the second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded is higher than the first predetermined information. Here, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by a first light emitting portion provided in the light emitting means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by a second light emitting portion also provided in the light emitting means. be irradiated. Further, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the game machine, and is emitted from the second light emitting portion. The second predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second portion is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Then, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided in the light guiding means, at least the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for giving the predetermined game value is lower than that of the second predetermined information. Even in the case of using the light guiding means, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately emitted to the position where the first predetermined information is provided, and does not reach the position where the second predetermined information is provided, or This makes it possible to prevent the second predetermined information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting section. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines I2 to I4,
The first predetermined information is
In the light guide means, the position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the lower inverted R shape) A game machine I5 characterized by being provided in a part).

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first predetermined information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guiding means. That is, the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded is lower than the second predetermined information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the light corresponding to the second predetermined information makes the first predetermined information visible, the light corresponding to the second predetermined information is given a predetermined game value from the first predetermined information. The second predetermined information with a high degree of expectation is made visible, and even if the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. . As a result, the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second predetermined information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first predetermined information intersect is second. By providing the first predetermined information lower than the predetermined information, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancies in performance are minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine I4 or I5,
The directing means is
A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising second directivity improving means (for example, a front lower light collecting lens 414d) for improving the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the rendering means. Thus, when a plurality of prescribed information are provided in the performance means, the performance means executes the second prescribed performance capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for giving the prescribed game value is higher than the first prescribed information. Even in such a case, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is accurately emitted to the position where the second predetermined information is provided, so that the second predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, thereby improving the game performance. There is an effect that the information can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines I4 to I6,
The light guide means
A first emission in which the light emitted in the first direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted in the second direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine. part (for example, vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
Second emission in which the light emitted in the second direction is or is likely to be emitted to the front side of the game machine and the light emitted in the first direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the game machine (for example, horizontal grooves forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern group 412 or each cherry tree pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machines I4 to I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the second direction is It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. Further, the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the game machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted. It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is difficult to be emitted. That is, in the presentation means, the first predetermined information is made visible by the light from the first direction, while the second predetermined information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, and the second predetermined information is made visible by the light from the second direction. However, by making the first predetermined information invisible or difficult to see, a plurality of predetermined information can be represented even by one effect means. Thus, even when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided in the rendering means, each piece of predetermined information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. By making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of predetermined information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means is heightened, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the high-prediction light guide plate (Sunfish/bubble light guide plate, slit portion of display area forming member)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

First effect means (e.g., light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second effect means (e.g., confirmation lamp unit 310) that performs a second effect (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first production means is
a first light emitting means (eg, lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (eg, rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine a light guide plate 420),
The second effect means is
a second light-emitting means (e.g., confirmation lamp 311) having a second light-emitting portion that emits light (e.g., an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311);
A game characterized by comprising a cover part (for example, a lens cut 432) for reducing light from the second light emitting means to the light guide means between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means. Machine J0.

According to the game machine J0, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. Also, the second effect means performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. The first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means has a first light emitting portion for emitting light, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means enters the light guide means from a predetermined portion. In this case, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Also, the second light emitting means provided in the second effect means has a second light emitting section that emits light. Here, the light from the second light emitting means to the light guiding means is reduced by the cover portion provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the irradiation of the light from the second light emitting means to the predetermined information, and suppress the occurrence of the performance inconsistency due to the abnormal expression, thereby accurately conveying the information regarding the game to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

A gaming machine comprising a first effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The first production means is
a first light emitting means (eg, lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (eg, rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
First light guide means (for example, first decorative pattern group 421) for making predetermined information (for example, first decorative pattern group 421) about the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part For example, with a rear light guide plate 420),
A game machine J1 characterized by comprising a cover portion (for example, a lens cut 432) for reducing the amount of light for a position where the predetermined information is arranged in the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first effect can be executed as the game progresses by the first effect means. Further, the first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means is provided with a first light emitting portion for emitting light, and when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the first light emitting means Predetermined information related to the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light guide means provided in the effect means. Here, the light to the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light guiding means is reduced by the cover portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the illumination of the predetermined information with light from other than the first light emitting means, and suppress the occurrence of the performance inconsistency due to the abnormal expression, thereby notifying the player of the information about the game. There is an effect that an accurate suggestion can be made and attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine J1,
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp unit 310) capable of executing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses means is
a second light-emitting means (e.g., confirmation lamp 311) having a second light-emitting portion that emits light (e.g., an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311);
The cover part
A gaming machine J2 characterized by being disposed between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect means can execute the second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Further, a second light emitting section that emits light is provided in the second light emitting means provided in the second effect means. A cover portion is arranged between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information. Thus, in a state where the first light emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the irradiation of the light from the second light emitting means to the predetermined information, thereby preventing the production inconsistency due to the abnormal expression. By suppressing, there is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine J2,
The gaming machine J3, wherein the second light emitting means emits light with a higher luminance than the light emission luminance of the first light emitting means when the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second light emitting means emits light with a higher luminance than the light emission luminance of the first light emitting means during execution of the second effect. That is, there is a possibility that the predetermined information in the first rendering means is affected when the second light emitting means emits light. Therefore, in a state in which the first light emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the irradiation of the light from the second light emitting means to the predetermined information, thereby preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in performance due to abnormal expressions. By suppressing, there is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of game machines J1 to J3,
The cover part
A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine from the first effect means.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the cover portion is arranged on the gaming machine front side from the first effect means. As a result, the light emitted from the front side of the game machine, which is emitted by the lighting of the game hall or the effects of other game machines, is reduced by the cover portion, so that the light emitted from other than the first light emitting means is emitted to the predetermined information. By suppressing the occurrence of inconsistencies in performance due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the attention to the game. effective.

In any of game machines J1 to J4,
a third light emitting means (for example, the lower LED unit 414) having a third light emitting portion (for example, the front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
Second predetermined information (for example, second decorative pattern group 411) relating to the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion. A light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410),
A gaming machine J5, wherein the cover portion is the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the third light emitting means is provided with a third light emitting portion for emitting light, and the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from the predetermined second portion, the second light guiding means causes the game The second predetermined information relating to is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second light guiding means is used as the cover part. Thereby, the second light guiding means configured to allow the second predetermined information to be visually recognized is configured so as to be able to reduce the light to the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light guiding means as the cover portion. As a result, the second light guiding means provided with the second predetermined information can suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the irradiation of the predetermined information with light from other than the first light emitting means, and a plurality of presentations can be achieved. By suppressing the occurrence of performance discrepancies due to abnormal expressions while executing the game, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<K group: 1 light guide plate with strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for weak areas is highly anisotropic (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group K was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Based on the result of determination by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded, or the first suggestion information Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221 )When,
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The directing means is
a first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front-lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestive information;
The first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. a visible light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410);
At least a condensing means (for example, front right condensing lens 415d or front left condensing lens 416d) for condensing light from the first light emitting means and irradiating the first suggestive information. A gaming machine K0 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded based on the determination result by the determining means, or a predetermined value from the first suggestive information. Execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a game value of . Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information can be executed by the effect means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the rendering means can irradiate the first suggestive information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the rendering means can emit light to the second suggestive information. It is configured to be irradiated with light. Then, the light guiding means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. becomes visible from Here, the condensing means condenses at least the light from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information. Thus, when the first suggestive information provided on one light guide means is made visible by light emission from the first light emitting means, the light from the first light emitting means is collected by the light collecting means and the same light is guided. It is possible to illuminate only the first suggestive information without illuminating the second suggestive information provided in the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the second suggestive information when the first suggestive information is visible, and by suppressing the occurrence of the performance discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, the game-related information is suggested to the player accurately, There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) that draws the execution of suggestion by suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determination means;
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The suggestive information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, and the first suggestion information. second suggestive information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for
a first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front-lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestive information;
The first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. A visible light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410),
The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result of the determining means, the suggestive information lottery means performs a lottery for execution of the suggestion by the suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and the suggestive information lottery means. Based on the lottery result of (1), the suggestion by the suggestion information can be executed by the effect means. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestive information is provided that can suggest to the player that it is high. Here, the first suggestive information is irradiated with light by the first light emitting means provided in the effect means, and the second suggestive information is irradiated with light by the second light emitting means also provided in the effect means. be done. Then, the light guiding means provided in the presentation means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information when the second light emitting means emits light. Suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means. When trying to make visible the first suggestion information with a lower expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guiding means and the predetermined game value is given than the first suggestion information. If the second suggestive information suggesting that the degree of expectation to be played is high, becomes visible, there is a possibility that the contents of the presentation will be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, by increasing the directivity of the light with respect to the first suggestive information with a low degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and irradiating the first suggestive information without diffusing the light, the first suggestive information can be illuminated. There is an effect that it is possible to display only one suggestive information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the presentation contents.

In the gaming machine K1,
At least, a first directivity improving means (for example, the front right light collecting lens 415d or the front left light collecting lens 415d) for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiating the first suggestive information. A game machine K2 characterized by comprising a lens 416d).

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the first directivity improving means, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is enhanced and the light is emitted to the first suggestive information. When trying to make visible the first suggestion information with a lower expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guiding means and the predetermined game value is given than the first suggestion information. If the second suggestive information suggesting that the degree of expectation to be played is high, becomes visible, there is a possibility that the contents of the presentation will be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, the light for the first suggestive information with a low degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is enhanced by the first directivity improving means, and is configured to be irradiated toward the first suggestive information without being diffused. By doing so, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at an appropriate timing, and there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the content of the presentation to be inconsistent.

In gaming machine K1 or K2,
A second directivity improving means (for example, a front-lower condenser lens 414d) for improving the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiating the second suggestive information is provided. Amusement machine K3 to play.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means is enhanced by the second directivity improving means, and the light is emitted to the second suggestive information. As a result, in the light guiding means provided with the two pieces of suggestive information, each piece of suggestive information can be displayed at an appropriate timing by configuring so that the light corresponding to each piece of suggestive information is not diffused by each of the condensing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies in the content of the presentation to occur.

In game machines K1 to K3,
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game,
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A front side portion (for example, an upper reverse R shape portion, a normal R shape portion, or a lower reverse R shape portion) formed continuously from the flat plate shape portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second effect means; with
The first light emitting means is
disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine K4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate portion.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect means can execute a predetermined effect related to the game. Further, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and positioned on the front side of the game machine from the second effect means. The first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion on the flat plate portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate portion. is set. That is, the light guide means is configured such that the light is incident from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion rather than from the front side portion. This is because, when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the game machine from the second effect means, the traveling direction of the incident light is changed by the front side portion, It may be difficult or impossible to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. In addition, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. For this reason, in the light guide means having a front side portion, by allowing the light to enter from each part of the flat plate-shaped portion, the above problems can be preferably solved, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine K4,
The front side is
A game machine K5 characterized by being an external shape related portion related to the external shape of the second effect means.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means. This is because when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the outer shape-related portion, and suggestive information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult. In addition, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the outer shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the outer shape related part is configured in a shape along the outer shape of the second effect means, and when the light emitting part etc. are arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape related part, the first effect means (light guide There is a risk that the degree of freedom of design of the means) will be restricted. As a result, in the first rendering means having the outer shape related portion related to the outer shape of the second rendering means, light is incident from the portion of the flat plate portion that is not the outer shape related portion, thereby suitably solving the above problem. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the first rendering means.

<L group: 1 light guide plate with intensity effect, at least for strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, 3-direction lens)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display section that can change the pattern visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group L was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Based on the result of determination by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be awarded, or the first suggestion information Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221 )When,
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The directing means is
a first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front-lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestive information;
The first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. a visible light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410);
At least a diffusing means (for example, rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 or rear-side lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light emitted by the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. Characteristic gaming machine L0.

According to the gaming machine L0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded based on the determination result by the determining means, or a predetermined value from the first suggestive information. Execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a game value of . Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information can be executed by the effect means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the rendering means can irradiate the first suggestive information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the rendering means can emit light to the second suggestive information. It is configured to be irradiated with light. Then, the light guiding means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. becomes visible from Here, the diffuser diffuses at least the light from the second light emitter and illuminates the second suggestive information. As a result, by surely illuminating the second suggestive information, which is important for the game, and making it clearly visible, the information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It has the effect of being able to

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
Suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) that draws the execution of suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player based on the determination result of the determination means;
production means (e.g., light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
The suggestive information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, and the first suggestion information. second suggestive information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for
a first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front-lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestive information;
The first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. a visible light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410);
A gaming machine L1 comprising at least diffusion means (for example, a third upward diffusion lens 473) for diffusing the light from the second light emitting means and irradiating the second suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine L1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result of the determining means, the suggestive information lottery means performs a lottery for execution of the suggestion by the suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and the suggestive information lottery means. Suggestion information is configured to be executable by the effect means based on the result of the lottery. As the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestive information is provided that can suggest to the player that it is high. Here, the first suggestive information is irradiated with light by the first light emitting means provided in the effect means, and the second suggestive information is irradiated with light by the second light emitting means also provided in the effect means. be done. Then, the light guiding means provided in the rendering means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emitting means emits light. Suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the diffusing means diffuses at least the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. Since the second suggestive information is an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than at least the first suggestive information, the second suggestive information is exhaustively irradiated with light by the diffusing means, and the second suggestive information is 2 It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the suggestive information. Further, when the first suggestion information is made visible, if the second suggestion information, which has a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first suggestion information, is made visible, an inconsistency in performance occurs. , when the second suggestion information is made visible, even if the first suggestion information with a lower degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the second suggestion information becomes visible, the player does not receive the predetermined value. Since the execution of the second suggestive information with a high degree of expectation for imparting the game value is focused, and the execution of the first suggestive information with a low degree of expectation for the impartation of the predetermined game value is not so focused, Discrepancies are less likely to occur. Therefore, by adopting the diffusing means for the second suggestive information that is highly expected to be given a predetermined game value, the effect of the light guiding means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In gaming machine L1,
Directivity improving means (for example, the third right focusing lens 475b and the third left focusing lens 476b) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information. ), a game machine L2 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, the directivity improving means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and illuminates the first suggestive information. When trying to make visible the first suggestion information with a lower expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guiding means and the predetermined game value is given than the first suggestion information. If the second suggestive information suggesting that the degree of expectation to be played is high, becomes visible, there is a possibility that the content of the effect will be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, the light for the first suggestive information with a low degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is not diffused by the directivity improving means, and is irradiated toward the first suggestive information. There is an effect that it is possible to display only one suggestive information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the presentation from occurring.

In gaming machine L1 or L2,
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game,
The light guide means
at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
A front side portion (for example, an upper reverse R shape portion, a normal R shape portion, or a lower reverse R shape portion) formed continuously from the flat plate shape portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second effect means; with
The first light emitting means is
disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means is
The game machine L3 is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate portion.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect means can execute a predetermined effect related to the game. Further, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and positioned on the game machine front side from the second effect means. The first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion on the flat plate portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate portion. is set. That is, the light guide means is configured such that the light is incident from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion rather than from the front side portion. This is because when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the game machine from the second effect means, the traveling direction of the incident light is changed by the front side portion, It may be difficult or impossible to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. In addition, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. For this reason, in the light guide means having a front side portion, by allowing the light to enter from each part of the flat plate portion, the above problems can be suitably solved, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means can be increased. effective.

In gaming machine L3,
The front side is
A gaming machine L4 characterized by being an external shape related portion related to the external shape of the second effect means.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of the game machine L3, the following effects are produced. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means. This is because when light is to be incident on the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the outer shape-related portion, and suggestive information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult. In addition, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the outer shape related section, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the outer shape related part is configured in a shape along the outer shape of the second effect means, and when the light emitting part etc. are arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape related part, the first effect means (light guide There is a risk that the degree of freedom of design of the means) will be restricted. As a result, in the first rendering means having the outer shape related portion related to the outer shape of the second rendering means, the light is incident from the portion of the flat plate portion that is not the outer shape related portion, thereby suitably solving the above problem. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the first rendering means.

<Group M: Multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusing means>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This game machine is provided with a display unit that can change the pattern visible from the front of the game machine, and a light emitting unit that can change a single color or light emission color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group M was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to games.

A first effect means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) that performs a first effect as the game progresses;
A second effect means (for example, the front right LED unit 415) that performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first production means is
A first light emitting means (for example, the rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. a first light guide means (for example, the rear light guide plate 420) that enables
The second effect means is
a second light emitting means for emitting light (for example, the front right LED 415c);
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from the predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) regarding the game is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. a second light guide means (e.g., front light guide plate 410) that enables
It is characterized by comprising at least diffusion means (for example, rear upper diffusion lens 423 or rear lower diffusion lens 425) for diffusing the light from the second light emitting means and irradiating the second predetermined information. Gaming machine M0.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first effect means performs the first effect as the game progresses, and the second effect means performs the second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light guide means from a predetermined first portion, As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effect means and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on the second light guide means from a predetermined second portion, As the second effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the diffusing means diffuses at least the light from the second light emitting means to irradiate the second predetermined information. As a result, the second effect relating to the second predetermined information can be performed flashy by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusing means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

A first effect means (for example, the front right LED unit 415) capable of executing the first effect as the game progresses;
A second effect means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first production means is
a first light emitting means for emitting light (for example, the front right LED 415c);
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information (for example, the second decorative pattern group 411) regarding the game is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. a first light guide means (e.g., front light guide plate 410) that enables
The second effect means is
a second light-emitting means for emitting light (for example, the rear upper LED 422c);
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from the predetermined second part, the second predetermined information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) regarding the game is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. a second light guide means (for example, the rear light guide plate 420) that enables
The game machine M1 is characterized by comprising at least diffusion means (for example, a rear upper diffusion lens 423) for diffusing the light from the second light emitting means and irradiating the second predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine M1, the first effect means can execute the first effect as the game progresses, and the second effect means can execute the second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. executable. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light guide means from a predetermined first portion, As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effect means and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on the second light guide means from a predetermined second portion, As the second effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the diffusing means diffuses at least the light from the second light emitting means to irradiate the second predetermined information. As a result, the second effect relating to the second predetermined information can be performed flashy by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusing means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine M1,
The second production is
The game machine M2 is characterized by an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded than the first effect.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is awarded than the first effect. Thus, by adopting the diffusing means for the second suggestive information that is highly expected to be given a predetermined game value, the performance effect of the light guide means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be enhanced. has the effect of

In the game machine M1 or M2,
The predetermined portion is
A predetermined end of the second light guide means,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine M3 characterized by being integrally formed at a predetermined end of the second light guiding means.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the second light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second effect means, the second light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed to reduce the number of parts, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the second effect means. There is

In any of gaming machines M1 to M3,
As the first production,
Predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, fourth decorative pattern group 413),
A first specific effect (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) with a high expectation that a predetermined game value is given from the first predetermined effect,
The first production means is
It is characterized by comprising directivity improving means (for example, front right condenser lens 415d or front left condenser lens 416d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. Gaming machine M4.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the first effect, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first predetermined effect are provided. The directivity improving means provided in the first rendering means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. Thus, when the first effect means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of first effects, the light emitted from the first light emitting means is accurately emitted to the position where the desired first effect is provided, and other first effects are provided. By making it difficult or impossible to reach the position where the first effect is provided, it is possible to prevent the undesired first effect from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies, to accurately suggest game-related information to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<N Group: Pseudo Stop Symbol Display Control Corresponding to Symbol Array>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This game machine is provided with a display unit that can change the pattern visible from the front of the game machine, and a light emitting unit that can change a single color or light emission color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the N group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
three rotating members (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation driving means (for example, a motor) that rotates each of the rotating members;
A drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) that controls the rotation drive means,
The rotating member is
a common rotating member (for example, a left reel LR and a right reel RR) configured only with the identification information common to the rotating members;
a non-common rotating member (for example, a middle reel CR) including non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member;
The drive control means is
Step-change means for stepwise changing the pre-stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information in the pre-stage of the predetermined display result (e.g., "ready-to-reach display") → "6" → "7" change),
The step change means is
A game characterized by changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member when the preceding stage identification information is changed in stages. Machine No.

According to the game machine N0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members each arranged with a plurality of types of identification information, the rotating members are respectively driven to rotate by the rotation driving means, and the rotation driving means is driven by the drive control means. controlled. As the rotating means, the common rotating member is composed only of identification information common to the rotating members, and the non-common rotating member includes non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member. be done. Here, the previous-stage identification information forming a combination of the previous-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is changed stepwise by the step-changing means provided in the drive control means. Then, when changing the previous stage identification information step by step by the step changing means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member is not included. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause any inconsistency in the effect and that does not cause a sense of incongruity, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Na group: Excluding reach formation patterns by non-common identification information>
Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information in production means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The directing means is
At least two rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) arranged with a plurality of types of identification information;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating means is
Common rotating means (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) in which common identification information, which is the common identification information, is arranged;
a non-common rotating means (for example, a middle reel CR) in which the common identification information and the non-common identifying information not included in the arrangement of the common rotating means are arranged;
The drive control means is
Step-change means for stepwise changing the pre-stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information in the pre-stage of the predetermined display result (e.g., "reach display") (e.g., the reach formation pattern is set to "1") → "2" → "3"),
The step change means is
A game characterized by changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common turning means when the preceding stage identification information is changed in stages. Machine Na1.

According to the gaming machine Na1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means performs dynamic display of the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player when the coin is put out. Here, the rendering means is provided with at least two rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are respectively rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the driving control means. A dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, in the rotating means, the common rotating means in which the common identification information, which is the common identification information, is arranged, and the non-common identifying information which is not included in the arrangement of the common identification information and the common rotating means are arranged. non-common pivot means are provided. Then, the previous stage identification information forming a combination of the previous stage identification information of the predetermined display result is displayed by the previous stage display means provided in the drive control means. The means changes the pre-stage information step by step. Here, when the previous stage identification information is changed step by step by the step changing means, the combination of the previous stage information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common turning means. As a result, when the preceding stage identification information is changed step by step, the preceding stage identification information by the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common turning means is not displayed, thereby causing a discrepancy in performance. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity and lose interest in the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotation means
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Na2 characterized by changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Na2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the identification information is arranged so as to form a predetermined permutation on the common rotating means. Then, the step changing means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed step by step so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the previous stage identification information by the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotating means does not appear. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in performance, suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2,
The dynamic execution means
A dynamic display that continues the dynamic display when the non-common identification information appears on the non-common rotation means even when any of the identification information appears on the common rotation means. A gaming machine Na3 characterized by comprising a continuation means.

According to the gaming machine Na3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na1 or Na2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if any of the identification information appears in the common turning means, if the non-common identification information appears in the non-common turning means, the dynamic continuation provided in the dynamic execution means Dynamic display is continued by the means. As a result, it is possible to create a game feature in which the dynamic display continues depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, draw attention to the turning mode of the non-common turning means, and improve the amusement of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine Na3,
The dynamic display means
A predetermined first production,
a second effect in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, and
The dynamic continuation means
The gaming machine Na4 is characterized in that the second effect is executed when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Na4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display means can execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect. appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic continuation means. As a result, a game effect is created in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by making the player pay attention to whether or not the information appears.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means
In the dynamic display, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed in one rotating means, and two common rotating means can be stopped earlier than the non-common rotating means. death,
The common rotating means is
The arrangement order (for example, descending order) of the common identification information in one common rotating means and the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the common identification information for the other common rotating means are arranged in reverse order. A gaming machine Na5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Na5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the dynamic execution means allows a plurality of pieces of identification information to appear in one rotating means in the dynamic display, and the two common rotating means stop earlier than the non-common rotating means. In the common rotating means, the order of arrangement of the common identification information in one common rotating means and the order of arrangement of the common identification information in the other common rotating means are arranged in reverse order. there is As a result, the common rotating means that can be stopped earlier can be configured to generate a plurality of preceding stage identification information, and the variation of the appearing position of one preceding stage identification information can be increased, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5,
The non-common rotating means is
A game machine Na6 characterized in that the identification information is arranged in at least the same arrangement order (for example, ascending order) as the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the identification information in the one common rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Na6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the non-common rotating means, the identification information is arranged in at least the same order as the arrangement order of the identification information in one common rotating means. As a result, the order of appearance of the identification information can be made common between the one common turning means and the non-common turning means, and the player can easily recognize the order of appearance of the identification information. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6,
The non-common identification information is
The game machine Na7 is arranged in the middle of the predetermined permutation of the non-common rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Na7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-common identification information is arranged in the middle of the predetermined permutation in the non-common rotating means. As a result, regarding the appearance of the non-common identification information not included in the common rotation means, unexpectedness is created in the predetermined arrangement of the identification information in the non-common rotation means, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

<Group Nb: Excluding reach formation patterns by identification information that can give a large profit to the player>
Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information in production means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The directing means is
At least two rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) arranged with a plurality of types of identification information;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means is
a pre-stage rendering means for displaying pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information (for example, "reach display") of the pre-stage of the predetermined display result;
Step change means for changing the previous stage information step by step (for example, the reach formation pattern is changed from "1" → "2" → "3"),
The identification information is
first identification information (e.g., "2" symbol) capable of giving a predetermined first profit to the player when appearing as the predetermined display result;
second identification information (e.g., "7" symbol) capable of awarding a second profit larger than the first profit to the player when it appears as the predetermined display result;
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb1, wherein a combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as not to include the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information while the preceding stage identification information is being changed step by step.

According to the gaming machine Nb1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means performs dynamic display of the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player when the coin is put out. Here, the rendering means is provided with at least two rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are respectively rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the driving control means. A dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the previous stage identification information forming a combination of the previous stage identification information of the predetermined display result is displayed by the previous stage display means provided in the drive control means, and the stage change provided in the drive control means is also provided. The means changes the pre-stage information step by step. Here, when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result, the first identification information that can give a predetermined first profit to the player, and when it appears as a predetermined display result, the game and second identification information that can grant the person a second benefit that is greater than the first benefit. Then, the combination of the pre-stage information is changed by the step-changing means so that the pre-stage information by the second identification information is not included while the pre-stage identification information is being changed in stages. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed in stages, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information is replaced with the intermediate stage of the pre-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. By not making it appear, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be awarded has decreased, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotating means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb2 characterized by changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Nb2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotating means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the step changing means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information can be changed step by step. By preventing the middle stage of the stage identification information from appearing, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the feeling that the profit that can be given to the player has decreased, and to improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2,
The rotating means is
Alternating means for alternately arranging the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, "1"→"2"→"3" or "5"→"6"→"7" → “8” portion).

According to the gaming machine Nb3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately arranged in the alternate arrangement means of the rotating means. As a result, the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately displayed in the dynamic display, and when the previous stage identification information is changed step by step while the variation of the game is enriched, the first identification information is displayed. This is because the player feels that the profit that can be given to the player is reduced by preventing the second identification information that can give the player a larger profit from appearing in the intermediate stage of the pre-stage identification information that can change in stages. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any one of game machines Nb1 to Nb3,
The step change means is
At least, after the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. It is configured to be able to display stage identification information,
The step change means is
The gaming machine Nb4 is characterized in that the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information is not displayed as the first previous-stage identification information.

According to the game machine Nb4, in addition to the effects of the game machines Nb1 to Nb3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the step changing means displays at least the predetermined first previous stage identification information as the previous stage information, the first previous stage identification information is rotated to constitute a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be reproducible. The stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information does not appear as the first previous stage identification information. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed in stages, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information is replaced with the intermediate stage of the pre-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. By not making it appear, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be awarded has decreased, and to improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine Nb4,
The step change means is
The gaming machine Nb5 is characterized in that the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information can appear as the second preceding stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stage changing means is configured to be able to display the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information as the second previous-stage identification information. When the second identification information can appear as the pre-stage identification information that constitutes a part of the predetermined display result, by displaying the pre-stage identification information based on the second identification information that can give a large profit to the player, To provide an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by suppressing the loss of interest in the game without making the player think that the profit that can be given to the player has decreased while enriching the variation of the game.

In any one of game machines Nb1 to Nb5,
The dynamic execution means
When the determining means determines that the predetermined display result does not appear, the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information is difficult to appear,
The gaming machine Nb6 is configured so as to facilitate the appearance of the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result appears.

According to the gaming machine Nb6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result does not appear, the dynamic execution means makes it difficult for the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information to appear. is determined to appear, the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information is likely to appear. As a result, at the stage when the previous stage identification information appears, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a predetermined display result, and while enriching game variations, when changing the previous stage identification information step by step, the It is said that the profit that can be given to the player is reduced by preventing the appearance of the second identification information that can give the player a larger profit than the first identification information in the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game by feeling, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Nc group: Excluding reach formation patterns by identification information that triggers development production>
Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information in production means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The directing means is
At least two rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) arranged with a plurality of types of identification information;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means is
a pre-stage rendering means for displaying pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information (for example, "reach display") of the pre-stage of the predetermined display result;
Step change means for changing the previous stage information step by step (for example, the reach formation pattern is changed from "1" → "2" → "3"),
The identification information is
Developed identification information (for example, "chance" pattern) that can become pre-stage information by the pre-stage manifesting means when appearing in a plurality of the rotating means,
The step change means is
A game machine Nc1 characterized by changing a combination of the preceding stage identification information so as not to include the preceding stage identification information by the development identification information while the preceding stage identification information is being changed step by step.

According to the gaming machine Nc1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means performs dynamic display of the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player when the coin is put out. Here, the rendering means is provided with at least two rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are respectively rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the driving control means. A dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the previous stage identification information forming a combination of the previous stage identification information of the predetermined display result is displayed by the previous stage display means provided in the drive control means, and the stage change provided in the drive control means is also provided. The means changes the pre-stage information step by step. Here, when the identification information is revealed by a plurality of rotating means, advanced identification information is provided that can be pre-stage information by the pre-stage revealing means. Then, the combination of the previous stage information is changed by the step changing means so that the previous stage information by the advanced identification information is not included while the previous stage identification information is being changed step by step. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, does not appear in the intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. Even though the previous stage identification information has appeared, the appearance of the development identification information makes the progress of the production unclear, which can suppress the loss of interest in the game and improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A game machine Nc2 characterized by changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Nc2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotating means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the step changing means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed in stages so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the pre-stage identification information, is replaced with the intermediate stage of the pre-stage identification information that can be changed step by step. By not appearing, even though the stage identification information has appeared, the appearance of the development identification information makes the progress of the production unclear, suppressing the loss of interest in the game and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2,
The step change means is
At least, after the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. It is configured to be able to display stage identification information,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc3 characterized in that the preceding stage identification information based on the development identification information is not caused to appear as the first preceding stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the step changing means displays at least the predetermined first previous stage identification information as the previous stage information, the first previous stage identification information is rotated to constitute a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be reproducible. Further, the stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information by the advanced identification information does not appear as the first previous stage identification information. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, does not appear in the intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the unclearness of the progress of the performance due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest of the game. There is

In gaming machine Nc3,
The step change means is
A game machine Nc4 characterized in that the stage identification information based on the development identification information is not displayed as the second stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information does not appear as the second previous stage identification information. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, is replaced with the second previous-stage identification, which is the final stage of the previous-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. By preventing even information from appearing, even though the stage identification information has appeared, the appearance of the development identification information makes the progress of the performance unclear, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any of gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4,
The step change means is
The gaming machine Nc5 is characterized in that, when changing the preceding stage identification information stepwise, the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed stepwise by omitting the development identification information.

According to the game machine Nc5, in addition to the effects of the game machines Nc1 to Nc4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the step-changing means changes the previous-stage identification information step by step, the combination of the previous-step identification information is changed step-by-step by omitting the advanced identification information. Thus, when changing the previous-stage identification information in stages, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, is omitted from the previous-stage identification information that can be changed in stages to change the previous-stage identification information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the unclearness of the progress of the production due to the appearance of the development identification information despite the appearance of the previous stage identification information, and to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5,
The dynamic display means
A predetermined first production,
a second effect in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, and
The dynamic execution means
A gaming machine Nc6 characterized in that the second effect is executed when the development identification information appears in all the rotating means.

According to the game machine Nc6, in addition to the effects of the game machines Nc1 to Nc5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display means can execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect. When it appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic execution means. As a result, a game property is created in which a second performance is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, and the game is developed in all the rotating means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the identification information appears, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine Nc6,
The dynamic execution means
The game machine Nc7 is characterized in that, at the stage where the development identification information appears as the preceding stage identification information, the development to the second effect is not performed.

According to the gaming machine Nc7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured not to progress to the second presentation at the stage where the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information. In other words, unless the development identification information appears in all of the rotation means, the second effect is not developed. As a result, a game property is created in which a second performance is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, and the game is developed in all the rotating means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the identification information appears, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Group O: delay synchronization control of the left symbol row at full rotation and timing with sound>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This game machine is provided with a display unit that can change the pattern visible from the front of the game machine, and a light emitting unit that can change a single color or light emission color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, it is configured to enhance the effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296)).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by enhancing the effect of the above-described effecting means in order to make the game more interesting, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group O was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that determines based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
three rotating members (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation driving means (for example, a motor) that rotates each of the rotating members;
A drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) that controls the rotation drive means,
The drive control means is
Two-member synchronous driving means for synchronizing and driving the rotating members in a state in which at least the identification information for the two rotating members is aligned variation) and
The rotating members are synchronized in a state in which the identification information of the rotating members rotated while being synchronized by the two-member synchronizing drive means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member are aligned. 3-member synchronous drive means (for example, synchronous fluctuation by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, RR) that drives while
A music synchronizing means for outputting music in accordance with the rotational driving of the rotating member synchronously driven by the three-member synchronous driving means (for example, music output at temporary stop during full rotation). Gaming machine O0 to play.

According to the gaming machine O0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members each arranged with a plurality of types of identification information, the rotating members are respectively driven to rotate by the rotation driving means, and the rotation driving means is driven by the drive control means. controlled. Then, in the drive control means, the rotating members are driven while being synchronized with at least the identification information of the two rotating members by the two-member synchronous driving means, and the two-member synchronous driving means is driven by the three-member synchronous driving means. The rotating members are driven while being synchronized in a state in which the identification information of the rotating members that are rotationally driven while being synchronized by the driving means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member are aligned. Here, music is output by the music synchronizing means in accordance with the rotational driving of the rotary member synchronously driven by the three-member synchronous driving means. As a result, it is possible to execute a powerful performance that is rhythmic and has a good tempo, and has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (e.g., holding ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, MPU 201) that performs determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying identification information in production means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The directing means is
At least two rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) arranged with a plurality of types of identification information;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means is
a first rotating means (for example, rotating the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) for rotating at least one of the rotating means;
a second rotating means (for example, rotating the left reel LR) for rotating the other rotating means after one of the rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means;
Music output means for outputting music corresponding to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means (for example, music output at temporary stop during full rotation) A gaming machine O1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine O1, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic execution means performs dynamic display of the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player when the game is played. Here, the rendering means is provided with at least two rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotating means are respectively rotated by the rotating driving means, and the rotating means is driven to rotate by the driving control means. Means are controlled. At least one rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means provided in the drive control means, and the first rotating means is rotated by the second rotating means also provided in the drive controlling means. After the rotating means is rotated, the other rotating means is rotated. Here, music is output by the music output means so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means that are respectively rotated, and by executing an effect with a sense of unity between the rotating means that is rotated and the output music, different timings can be achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity due to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the rotation, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O1,
The first rotating means is at least a two-means synchronous rotating means (for example, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) that rotate while synchronizing the predetermined first identification information of the two rotating means. Synchronous fluctuation with matching patterns),
The second rotating means is
A three-means synchronous rotation that rotates while synchronizing the first identification information that is rotated while being synchronized by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information of the other rotating means that is aligned. Equipped with moving means (for example, synchronous fluctuation by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, RR),
The music output means is
Music synchronizing means for outputting music corresponding to the start of rotation of the rotating means rotated in synchronism by the 2-means synchronous rotating means and the 3-means synchronous rotating means (for example, at the time of full rotation) A game machine O2 characterized by comprising a music output at the time of temporary stop.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the two-means synchronous turning means provided in the first turning means, at least the predetermined first identification information of the two turning means are aligned and turned while synchronizing them. Also, the first identification information rotated while being synchronized by the two-means synchronous rotation means by the three-means synchronous rotation means provided in the second rotation means, and the first identification information in the other rotation means. are aligned and rotated while synchronizing with each other. Then, the music synchronizing means provided in the music output means outputs music corresponding to the start of rotation of the rotating means rotated synchronously by the 2-means synchronous rotating means and the 3-means synchronous rotating means. be done. As a result, music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means rotated in synchronism with each other, and an effect with a sense of unity between the rotating means rotated in synchronism and the output music is executed. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that rotates at different timings, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O1 or O2,
The first rotating means is
A game machine O3 characterized in that at least one of the rotating means is rotated from a state in which none of the rotating means are rotating.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the first rotating means, at least one rotating means is rotated from a state in which none of the rotating means are rotated. As a result, by outputting music corresponding to the start of rotation of one rotating means, music is output corresponding to the rotation of each rotating means to be rotated. By executing a performance with a sense of unity between the moving means and the output music, it is possible to suppress discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means rotated at different timings, and to increase the degree of attention to the game. , has the effect of

In any of game machines O1 to O3,
The music output means is
A game characterized by continuously outputting a predetermined music from the start of rotation of the rotation means by the first rotation means to the timing when all the rotation means stop rotating. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the music output means continuously outputs the predetermined music from the time when the first rotating means starts rotating the rotating means to the timing when all the rotating means stop rotating. As a result, the predetermined music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the output of the predetermined music is continued until the timing at which all the rotating means stop rotating. It is possible to create a sense of unity between the rotation of and the output of the music. As a result, there is an effect that the sense of unity can suppress discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that rotates at different timings, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine O4,
The music output means is
outputting a first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the first rotating means starts rotating the rotating means;
A game machine O5 characterized by outputting a second sound, which is a sound constituting the predetermined music piece and which is different from the first sound, at the timing when the second rotating means starts rotating the rotating means. .

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the first rotating means starts rotating the rotating means, and the second rotating means starts rotating the rotating means. A second sound, which is a sound that constitutes a predetermined piece of music and is different from the first sound, is output at the timing of the second sound. As a result, the first sound composing the predetermined music corresponding to the start of rotation of one rotating means is output, and the first sound composing the predetermined music corresponding to the start of rotation of the other rotating means is output. By outputting two sounds, it is possible to create a sense of unity by completing a piece of music corresponding to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, there is an effect that the sense of unity can suppress discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that rotates at different timings, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine O5,
The music output means is
Outputting the first sound and the second sound in accordance with the beat (eg, the first and second beats in one bar) at a predetermined tempo (eg, 4/4 beat of BPM 120) Characteristic game machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound and the second sound in time with a predetermined tempo. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music piece is output in time with the beat at the predetermined tempo so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and to correspond to the start of rotation of the other rotating means. By outputting the second sound that composes the predetermined music in accordance with the beat at the predetermined tempo, the music with the predetermined tempo is completed so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means, thereby creating a sense of unity of the music. be able to. As a result, there is an effect that the sense of unity can suppress discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that rotates at different timings, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O5,
The music output means is
A game machine O7 characterized by forming a special sound (for example, a chord) that produces a predetermined harmony with the first sound and the second sound.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the music output means forms a special sound that produces a predetermined harmony between the first sound and the second sound. As a result, the first sound constituting the special sound corresponding to the start of rotation of one rotating means is output, and the second sound constituting the special sound corresponding to the start of rotation of the other rotating means is output. A sense of unity can be created by outputting two sounds and completing a special sound having a predetermined harmony corresponding to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, there is an effect that the sense of unity can suppress discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that rotates at different timings, thereby increasing attention to the game.

Any one of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine B0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine C0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine D0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine E0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine F0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine G0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine H0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine I0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine J0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine K0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine L0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, and O0 for any one of the configurations of the gaming machine M0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and O0 for any configuration of the gaming machine N0 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and N0 for any one of the configurations of the gaming machine O0 1 may be applied.

For any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the gaming machines C0 to C11, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines D0 to D8, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, and I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any one of the gaming machines E0 to E7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines F0 to F6, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, and I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines G0 to G7, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, and I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any one of the game machines H0 to H6, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, and I0 to Any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any one of the game machines I0 to I7, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any one of the game machines J0 to J5, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines K0 to K5, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines L0 to L4, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any one of the game machines M0 to M4, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, A configuration limited to any one of F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

For any one of the game machines O0 to O7, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to Any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied. .

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine A0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine B0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine C0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine D0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine E0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine F0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine G0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine H0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine I0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine J0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine K0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine L0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine M0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine O0.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, In any of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the game machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A game machine Z2 in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, In any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
60a board surface first decorative pattern group 60b board surface second decorative pattern group 81 drum display device (part of display means, part of effect means, part of second effect means)
110 main controller 113 audio lamp controller (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage appearance means, part of step change means)
201 MPU (part of judgment means)
203f Hold ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of suggestive information lottery means)
222e light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f fixed lamp lighting pattern table 223d light guide pattern lottery counter 223e fixed lamp timing lottery counter 310 fixed lamp unit (a part of the second effect means)
311 decision lamp (part of second effect means, part of second light emitting means)
400 light guide unit (part of production means, part of first production means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of first effect means, part of second light guide means)
411 Second decorative design group 412 Third decorative design (a part of second suggested information)
413 4th decorative pattern group (a part of the 1st suggestive information, a part of the 2nd predetermined information)
414 lower LED unit (part of light emitting means, part of first light emitting means)
414c LED for lower front side (part of second light emitting means)
414d front lower condenser lens 415 front right LED unit (a part of the second rendering means)
415c front right LED (part of first light emitting means, part of second light emitting means)
415d front right condenser lens (part of condenser means)
416c front left LED (a part of the first light emitting means)
416d Condensing lens for front left (part of condensing means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of light guide means, part of second effect means, part of first light guide means)
421 First decorative pattern group (part of predetermined information, part of third suggestive information, part of first predetermined information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of first effect means)
422c rear upper LED (a part of the first light emitting means)
423 rear upper diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
424 rear lower LED (part of light emitting part, part of first light emitting part, part of second light emitting part, part of third light emitting part)
425 rear lower diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
425a left direction diffusion part (a part of the first direction irradiation part)
425b front direction diffusion part (a part of the second direction irradiation part)
425c rightward diffusion part (a part of the third direction irradiation part)
430 display area forming member 431 central opening 432 lens cut (a part of the cover part)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of special information)
CR middle reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of second rotating means, part of 3-means synchronous rotating means)
LR left reel (part of rotating means, part of non-common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two-means synchronized rotating means)
RR Right reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two-means synchronous rotating means)
600 stepping motor (part of rotation drive means)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
determination means for determining based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
suggestive information lottery means for randomly executing suggestions based on the suggestive information capable of suggesting the level of expectation that a predetermined game value will be awarded to the player, based on the determination result of the determining means;
The suggestive information is at least
first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be imparted; second suggestive information capable of suggesting; and third suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is awarded is higher than the second suggestive information;
The game machine is
a first light emitting means for emitting light;
A gaming machine, comprising: second light emitting means capable of emitting light and different from the first light emitting means.

Images